Subaru Crosstrek Subaru Impreza Subaru XV 2013 en US US

Black plate (1,1)
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
C Copyright 2012 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 5/ 11

Black plate (2,1)
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
1) 4-door models
2) 5-door models except XV CROSSTREK
3) XV CROSSTREK models

Black plate (3,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

Black plate (3,1)
Warranties & Models with HID headlights How to use this Owner’s 0
Manual
& Warranties for U.S.A. CAUTION
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by & Using your Owner’s Manual
High Intensity Discharge (HID) head-
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the lights contain mercury. For that
reason, it is necessary to remove read this manual. To protect yourself and
United States come with the following extend the service life of your vehicle,
warranties: HID headlights before vehicle dis-
posal. Once removed, please reuse, follow the instructions in this manual.
. SUBARU Limited Warranty recycle or dispose of the HID head- Failure to observe these instructions may
. Emission Control Systems Warranty lights as hazardous waste. result in serious injury and damage to your
. Emissions Performance Warranty vehicle.
All warranty information, including details This manual is composed of fourteen

of coverage and exclusions, is in the
& Models without HID head- chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. lights table of contents, so you can usually tell at
Please read these warranties carefully. NOTE a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
This vehicle does not contain mercury
& Warranties for Canada devices or parts. Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by airbags
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by This chapter informs you how to use the
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
come with the following warranties: tions for the SRS airbags.
. SUBARU Limited Warranty Chapter 2: Keys and doors
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty This chapter informs you how to operate
. Emission Control Warranty the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
All warranty information, including details This chapter informs you about the opera-
of coverage and exclusions, is in the tion of instrument panel indicators and
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please how to use the instruments and other
read these warranties carefully. switches.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (4,1)
Chapter 4: Climate control Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION

This chapter informs you how to operate This chapter informs you about dimen-
the climate control. sions and capacities of your SUBARU. A CAUTION indicates a situation in
Chapter 5: Audio Chapter 13: Consumer information and which injury or damage to your
This chapter informs you how to operate Reporting safety defects vehicle, or both, could result if the
your audio system. This chapter informs you about Uniform caution is ignored.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment tire quality grading standards and Report-
This chapter informs you how to operate ing safety defects. NOTE
interior equipment. Chapter 14: Index
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
Chapter 7: Starting and operating This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in tions how to make better use of your
This chapter informs you how to start and this manual. You can use it to quickly find vehicle.
operate your SUBARU. something you want to read.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
& Safety warnings & Safety symbol
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex- You will find a number of WARNINGs,
plains some safety tips on driving. CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency These safety warnings alert you to poten-
This chapter informs you what to do if you tial hazards that could result in injury to
have a problem while driving, such as a you or others.
flat tire or engine overheating. Please read these safety warnings as well
Chapter 10: Appearance care as all other portions of this manual care-
This chapter informs you how to keep your fully in order to gain a better understand-
SUBARU looking good. ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need WARNING
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you A WARNING indicates a situation in You will find a circle with a slash through it
how to keep your SUBARU running which serious injury or death could in this manual. This symbol means “Do
properly. result if the warning is ignored. not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.

Black plate (5,1)
& Abbreviation list Abbreviation Meaning Vehicle symbols 0

You may find several abbreviations in this
GVW Gross vehicle weight There are some of the symbols you may
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list. GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating see on your vehicle.
HID High intensity discharge For warning and indicator lights, refer to
Abbreviation Meaning “Warning and indicator lights” F20.
INT Intermittent
A/C Air conditioner
Lower anchors and tethers for Mark Name
Automatic/Emergency locking LATCH children
A/ELR retractor
LED Light emitting diode WARNING
ABS Anti-lock brake system
LSD Limited slip differential
AKI Anti knock index
MIL Malfunction indicator light CAUTION
ALR Automatic locking retractor
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
AT Automatic transmission ganese tricarbonyl
Power door lock
ATF Automatic transmission fluid MT Manual transmission
AWD All-wheel drive OBD On-board diagnostics
Power door unlock
CVT Continuously variable trans- RON Research octane number
mission
SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive Power window with automatic
DCCD Driver’s control center differ-
ential Supplemental restraint sys- open and close function
SRS tem
DRL Daytime running light Passengers’ windows lock
TIN Tire identification number
Electronic brake force distri- and unlock
EBD bution Tire pressure monitoring sys-
TPMS tem
ELR Emergency locking retractor Fuel
FWD Front-wheel drive
GAW Gross axle weight Front fog lights
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (6,1)
Mark Name Mark Name Mark Name
Hazard warning flasher Rear window washer Windshield defroster
Rear window defogger/Out-

Engine hood Lights side mirror defogger/Wind-
shield wiper deicer
Tail lights, license plate light
Trunk lid (4-door) and instrument panel illumi- Air recirculation
nation
Seat heater Headlights Engine oil
Child restraint top tether an-

chorages Turn signal Washer
Child restraint lower an-

chorages Illumination brightness Door lock (transmitter)
Horn Fan speed Door unlock (transmitter)
Trunk lid open (4-door) or rear

Windshield wiper Instrument panel outlets gate unlock (5-door) (trans-
mitter)
Wiper intermittent Instrument panel outlets and

foot outlets
Windshield washer Foot outlets
Rear window wiper Windshield defroster and foot

outlets

Black plate (7,1)
Safety precautions when . The SRS airbags deploy with & Child safety 0
driving considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper WARNING
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious . Never hold a child on your lap or
injuries. Because the SRS airbag in your arms while the vehicle is
WARNING moving. The passenger cannot
needs enough space for deploy-
. All persons in the vehicle should ment, the driver should always protect the child from injury in a
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE sit upright and well back in the collision, because the child will
the vehicle starts to move. Other- seat as far from the steering be caught between the passen-
wise, the possibility of serious wheel as practical while still ger and objects inside the vehi-
injury becomes greater in the maintaining full vehicle control cle.
event of a sudden stop or acci- and the front passenger should . While riding in the vehicle, in-
dent. move the seat as far back as fants and small children should
possible and sit upright and well always be placed in the REAR
. To obtain maximum protection in
back in the seat. seat in an infant or child restraint
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the system which is appropriate for
For instructions and precautions, carefully the child’s age, height and
vehicle should always wear seat- read the following sections.
belts when the vehicle is moving. weight. If a child is too big for a
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- child restraint system, the child
System) airbag does not do away belts” F1-12. should sit in the REAR seat and
with the need to fasten seatbelts. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to be restrained using the seatbelts.
In combination with the seat- “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint According to accident statistics,
belts, it offers the best combined System airbag)” F1-38. children are safer when properly
protection in case of a serious restrained in the rear seating
accident. positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Never allow a child
Not wearing a seatbelt increases to stand up or kneel on the seat.
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the . Put children aged 12 and under in
vehicle has the SRS airbag. the REAR seat properly re-
strained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (8,1)
The SRS airbag deploys with . Never leave unattended children, . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
considerable speed and force adults or animals in the vehicle. “*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
and can injure or even kill chil- They could accidentally injure System airbag)” F1-38.
dren, especially if they are 12 themselves or others through
years of age and under and are inadvertent operation of the ve- & Engine exhaust gas (carbon
not restrained or improperly re- hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, monoxide)
strained. Because children are temperature in a closed vehicle
lighter and weaker than adults, could quickly become high en- WARNING
their risk of being injured from ough to cause severe or possibly
deployment is greater. fatal injuries to them. . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD . Help prevent children, adults or Engine exhaust gas contains
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE animals from locking themselves carbon monoxide, a colorless
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS in the trunk. On hot or sunny and odorless gas which is dan-
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO days, the temperature in the gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE trunk could quickly become high . Always properly maintain the en-
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO enough to cause death or serious gine exhaust system to prevent
THE SRS AIRBAG. heat-related injuries including engine exhaust gas from enter-
. Always turn the child safety locks brain damage to anyone locked ing the vehicle.
to the “LOCK” position when inside, particularly for small chil- . Never run the engine in a closed
children sit in the rear seat. dren. space, such as a garage, except
Serious injury could result if a . When leaving the vehicle, either for the brief time needed to drive
child accidentally opens the door close all windows and lock all the vehicle in or out of it.
and falls out. Refer to “Child doors. Also make certain that the . Avoid remaining in a parked
safety locks” F2-17. trunk is closed. vehicle for a lengthy time while
. Always lock the passenger’s win- the engine is running. If that is
dows using the lock switch when For instructions and precautions, carefully unavoidable, then use the venti-
children are riding in the vehicle. read the following sections. lation fan to force fresh air into
Failure to follow this procedure . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat- the vehicle.
could result in injury to a child belts” F1-12.
. Always keep the front ventilator
operating the power window. Re- . For the child restraint system, refer to inlet grille free from snow, leaves
fer to “Windows” F2-17. “Child restraint systems” F1-25. or other obstructions to ensure

Black plate (9,1)
that the ventilation system al- & Drinking and driving & Drugs and driving 0
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that WARNING WARNING
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have t he probl em Drinking and then driving is very There are some drugs (over the
checked and corrected as soon dangerous. Alcohol in the blood- counter and prescription) that can
as possible. If you must drive stream delays your reaction time delay your reaction time and impair
under these conditions, drive and impairs your perception, judg- your perception, judgment and at-
only with all windows fully open. ment and attentiveness. If you drive tentiveness. If you drive after taking
after drinking – even if you drink just them, it may increase your, your
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate a little – it will increase the risk of passengers’ and other persons’ risk
closed while driving to prevent being involved in a serious or fatal of being involved in a serious or
exhaust gas from entering the accident, injuring or killing yourself, fatal accident.
vehicle. your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the If you are taking any drugs, check with
accident, alcohol may increase the your doctor or pharmacist or read the
severity of that injury. literature that accompanies the medication
Please don’t drink and drive. to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
Drunken driving is one of the most after taking any medications that can
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco- make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
hol affects all people differently, you may ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
have consumed too much alcohol to drive you have a medical condition that requires
safely even if the level of alcohol in your you to take drugs, please consult with
blood is below the legal limit. The safest your doctor.
thing you can do is never drink and drive. Never drive if you are under the influence
However if you have no choice but to of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple- own health and well-being, we urge you
tely before getting behind the wheel. not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (10,1)
& Driving when tired or sleepy performance problems resulting wish to operate the controls of the
from modification may not be cov- navigation system, first take the
WARNING ered under warranties. vehicle off the road and stop it in a
safe place.
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction time will be delayed and & Car phone/cell phone and
your perception, judgment and at- driving & Driving with pets
tentiveness will be impaired. If you Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
drive when tired or sleepy, your, CAUTION driving and distract your attention from
your passengers’ and other per- driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
sons’ chances of being involved in Do not use a car phone/cell phone unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
a serious accident may increase. while driving; it may distract your around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
attention from driving and can lead your passengers. Besides, the pets can
Please do not continue to drive but to an accident. If you use a car be hurt under these situations. It is also for
instead find a safe place to rest if you phone/cell phone, pull off the road their own safety that pets should be
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you and park in a safe place before properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
should make periodic rest stops to refresh using your phone. In some States/ strain a pet with a special traveling
yourself before continuing on your journey. Provinces, only hands-free phones harness which can be secured to the rear
When possible, you should share the may legally be used while driving. seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
driving with others. which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
& Modification of your vehicle & Driving vehicles equipped handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
with navigation system in the front passenger’s seat. For further
CAUTION information, consult your veterinarian,
WARNING local animal protection society or pet
Your vehicle should not be modified shop.
other than with genuine SUBARU Do not allow the monitor to distract
parts and accessories. Other types your attention from driving. Also, do
of modifications could affect its not operate the controls of the
performance, safety or durability, navigation system while driving.
and may even violate governmental The loss of attention to driving
regulations. In addition, damage or could lead to an accident. If you

Black plate (11,1)
& Tire pressures General information & Noise from under the vehicle 0
Check and, if necessary, adjust the NOTE
pressure of each tire (including the spare) & California proposition 65
You may hear a noise from under the
at least once a month and before any long warning vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
journey. after the engine is turned off. However,
WARNING this does not indicate a malfunction.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the Engine exhaust, some of its consti- This noise is caused by the operation
tire pressures to the values shown on the tuents, and certain vehicle compo- of the fuel evaporation leakage check-
tire placard. For detailed information, refer nents contain or emit chemicals ing system and is normal. The noise
to “Tires and wheels” F11-21. known to the State of California to will stop after approximately 15 min-
cause cancer and birth defects or utes.
WARNING other reproductive harm. In addi-
Driving at high speeds with exces- tion, certain fluids in vehicles and & Event data recorder
sively low tire pressures can cause certain components of product wear This vehicle is equipped with an event
the tires to deform severely and to contain or emit chemicals known to data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- the State of California to cause an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
crease in temperature could cause cancer and birth defects or other near crash-like situations, such as an
tread separation, and destruction of reproductive harm. airbag deployment or hitting a road ob-
the tires. The resulting loss of stacle, data that will assist in understand-
vehicle control could lead to an ing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
accident. & California Perchlorate Advi- The EDR is designed to record data
sory related to vehicle dynamics and safety
Certain vehicle components such as air- systems for a short period of time, typically
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
keyless entry transmitter batteries may vehicle is designed to record such data
contain perchlorate material. Special as:
handling may apply for service or vehicle . How various systems in your vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ were operating;
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. . Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (12,1)
10
depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the informa-
tion if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.

Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
Driving tips 8
In case of emergency 9
Appearance care 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13
Index 14
北米Model "A1140BE-A" Edited: 2012/ 1/ 30

Black plate (14,1)
12
1) Engine hood (page 11-5)
Illustrated index 2) Wiper switch (page 3-69)
3) Headlight switch (page 3-63)
& Exterior 4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-37)
5) Moonroof (page 2-24)
6) Outside mirrors (page 3-78)
7) Door locks (page 2-3)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-23)
9) Flat tires (page 9-5)
10) Snow tires (page 8-10)
11) Fog light switch (page 3-67)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-12)
13) Towing hook (page 9-12)

Black plate (15,1)
13
1) Rear window defogger (page 3-80)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4) 0
3) Child safety locks (page 2-17)
4) Tie-down hole (page 9-12)
5) Trunk lid (page 2-20)
6) Rear gate (page 2-23)
7) Towing hook (page 9-12)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (16,1)
14
& Interior 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-32)
! Passenger compartment area 2) Seatbelt (page 1-12)
3) Front seat (page 1-2)
4) Rear seat (page 1-7)

Black plate (17,1)
15
1) Power windows (page 2-17)
2) Door locks (page 2-3) 0
3) Outside mirror switch (page 3-78)
4) Glove box (page 6-5)
5) Front power supply socket (page 6-7)
6) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-16)/Select lever
(CVT) (page 7-18)
7) Parking brake lever (page 7-32)
8) Cup holder (page 6-6)
9) Center console (page 6-5)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (18,1)
16
& Instrument panel 1) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-66)
2) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-30)
3) Audio control buttons (page 5-30)
4) Combination meter (page 3-5)
5) Cruise control (page 7-37)
6) Information display (page 3-23)/Multi
function display (page 3-28)
7) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-5)
8) Audio (page 5-1)
9) Climate control (page 4-1)
10) Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-81)
11) Horn (page 3-82)
12) SRS airbag (page 1-38)
13) Multi function display control switches
(page 3-28)
14) Hands-free switches (page 5-34)
15) Fuse box (page 11-35)
16) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5)

Black plate (19,1)
17
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-68)
0
2) Mist (page 3-69)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-70)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-70)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-69)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-69)
7) Light control switch (page 3-63)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-67)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-63)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-64)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-66)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (20,1)
18
& Combination meter 1) Tachometer (page 3-7)

2) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-6)
! U.S.-spec. models 3) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
3-21)
4) Speedometer (page 3-6)
5) Information display selection knob (page
3-23)
6) ECO gauge (page 3-8)
7) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)
8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-7)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.

Black plate (21,1)
19
! Except U.S.-spec. models 1) Tachometer (page 3-7)

2) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-6) 0
3) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
3-21)
4) Speedometer (page 3-6)
5) Information display selection knob (page
3-23)
6) ECO gauge (page 3-8)
7) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)
8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-7)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (22,1)
20
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
Mark Name Page AT OIL TEMP warning 3-15 High beam indicator 3-22
light (CVT models) light
Seatbelt warning light 3-9 Automatic headlight
ABS warning light 3-16 beam leveler warning 3-22
light (if equipped)
Front passenger’s 3-9
seatbelt warning light Brake system warning 3-17 Front fog light indicator 3-22
light light (if equipped)
SRS airbag system 3-11
warning light Door open warning
light 3-18 Security indicator light 3-21
Front passenger’s
/ frontal airbag ON indi- 3-11
cator AWD warning light 3-19 Headlight indicator
(AWD CVT models) light (if equipped) 3-22
Front passenger’s
/ frontal airbag OFF in- 3-11
dicator Power steering warn- 3-19 Cruise control indica-
ing light tor light 3-22
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunc- 3-12 Hill start assist warn-
tion indicator light ing light/Hill start assist 3-18 Cruise control set in- 3-22
OFF indicator light dicator light
Coolant temperature
low indicator light/ 3-13 Vehicle Dynamics
Coolant temperature Control warning light/ Low fuel warning light 3-18
high warning light Vehicle Dynamics 3-19
Control operation indi-
cator light Low tire pressure
Charge warning light 3-14 warning light 3-15
Vehicle Dynamics (U.S.-spec. models)
Control OFF indicator 3-21
Oil pressure warning 3-14 light Windshield washer
light 3-14
fluid warning light
Turn signal indicator 3-22
Engine oil level warn- lights
3-14
ing light

Black plate (23,1)
21
Function settings 0
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a multi function display, the settings for some of these functions
can be changed using the display. For details, refer to “Multi function display (Non-US vehicles only; if equipped)” F3-28.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation
Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors) 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds
Impact sensor operation (only models with shock Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
sensors (dealer option))
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
Dome light and map lights illumination (models with ON/OFF OFF
moonroof)
Dome light illumination (models without moonroof)
Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Defogger and deicer system for models Rear window defogger, outside mirror defogger and Operation for 15 minutes/ Operation for 15
with the automatic climate control system windshield wiper deicer Continuous operation minutes
Dome light Operation of dome light/map light OFF delay timer OFF/Short/Normal/Long Long
Map light for models with a moonroof
Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto on/off headlights (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the auto on/off headlights Low/Normal/High/Very high Normal

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (1,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
System servicing ............................................... 1-24

1
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Forward and backward adjustment ...................... 1-3 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-24
Reclining the seatback ........................................ 1-3 Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-25
Seat cushion height adjustment (driver’s seat) ..... 1-4 Where to place a child restraint system .............. 1-26
Head restraint adjustment (if equipped)................ 1-4 Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-27
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-6 Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
Rear seats............................................................ 1-7 seatbelt ........................................................... 1-27
Armrest (if equipped)........................................... 1-7 Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-31
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8 Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-32
Folding down the rear seatback ........................... 1-9
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-35
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-12
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-12
System airbag)................................................ 1-38
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-13
Models with SRS airbags and lap/shoulder
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor restraints for driver, front passenger, and
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-13 window-side rear passengers........................... 1-38
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-13 SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-42
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-13 SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-53
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-20 SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-64
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-21 SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-65
Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ............. 1-21 Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-66
Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt
pretensioners ................................................... 1-22
System monitors ................................................ 1-24

Black plate (26,1)
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats If the front seatbacks are not

used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
WARNING the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
. Never adjust the seat while driv- increase, and both can result in
ing to avoid the possibility of serious internal injury or death.
loss of vehicle control and of
. The SRS airbags deploy with
personal injury.
considerable speed and force.
. Before adjusting the seat, make Occupants who are out of proper
sure the hands and feet of rear position when the SRS airbag
seat passengers and cargo are deploys could suffer very serious
clear of the adjusting mechan- injuries. Because the SRS airbag
ism. needs enough space for deploy-
. After adjusting the seat, push it ment, the driver should always WARNING
slightly to make sure it is se- sit upright and well back in the Put children aged 12 and under in
curely locked. If the seat is not seat as far from the steering the rear seat properly restrained at
securely locked, it may move or wheel as practical while still all times. The SRS airbag deploys
the seatbelt may not operate maintaining full vehicle control with considerable speed and force
properly. and the front passenger should and can injure or even kill children,
. Do not put objects under the front move the seat as far back as especially if they are 12 years of age
seats. They may interfere with possible and sit upright and well and under and are not restrained or
front seat locking and cause an back in the seat. improperly restrained. Because chil-
accident. dren are lighter and weaker than
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- adults, their risk of being injured
straint when the occupant sits from deployment is greater. For that
well back and upright in the seat. reason, we strongly recommend
To reduce the risk of sliding that ALL children (including those
under the seatbelt in a collision, in child seats and those that have
the front seatbacks should be outgrown child restraint devices) sit
always used in the upright posi- in the REAR seat properly re-
tion while the vehicle is running. strained at all times in a child

Black plate (27,1)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
restraint device or in a seatbelt, & Forward and backward ad- & Reclining the seatback 1
whichever is appropriate for the justment
child’s age, height and weight. Se-
cure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seat) in the REAR seats at all
times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
restrained in the rear seating posi- Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to seatback to the desired position. Then
tions than in the front seating posi- the desired position. Then release the release the lever and make sure the
tions. For instructions and precau- lever and try to move the seat back and seatback is securely locked into place.
tions concerning child restraint sys- forth to make sure that it is securely locked The seatback placed in a reclined position
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys- into place. can spring back upward with force when
tems” F1-25. the lever is pulled. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (28,1)
& Seat cushion height adjust- & Head restraint adjustment (if
ment (driver’s seat) equipped)
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way round. Doing so will prevent
the head restraints from func-
WARNING tioning as intended. Therefore,
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat when you remove the head re-
To prevent the passenger from slid- straints, you must reinstall all
is lowered.
ing under the seatbelt in the event of head restraints correctly to pro-
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
a collision, always put the seatback rises. tect vehicle occupants.
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not The height of the seat can be adjusted by . All occupants, including the dri-
place objects such as cushions moving the seat cushion adjustment lever ver, should not operate a vehicle
between the passenger and the up and down. or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of head restraints are placed in their
sliding under the lap belt and of the proper positions in order to mini-
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen mize the risk of neck injury in the
will increase, and both can result in event of a crash.
serious internal injury or death.
The head restraints for the driver’s seat
and front passenger’s seat are adjustable
in the following ways.

Black plate (29,1)
! Head restraint height adjustment are located on the top of the seatback until again to the preferred angle.
1
the head restraint locks.
! Head restraint angle adjustment
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
Each head restraint should be adjusted so The angle of the head restraint can be
that the center of the head restraint is adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears. ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
head restraint to a position where the back
To raise: of your head is as close to the head
Pull the head restraint up. restraint as possible.
To lower:
To tilt:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of Tilt the head restraint by hand to the
the seatback. preferred position. A click will be audible
when the head restraint is locked.
To remove:
To return:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint. Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
as it can go. The head restraint will
To install:
automatically return to the fully upright
Install the head restraint into the holes that position. Then, adjust the head restraint

Black plate (30,1)
Seat heater (if equipped) depending on the temperature.

Selecting the “HI” position will cause the
The seat heater is equipped in the front seat to heat up quicker.
seats.
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the
The seat heater operates when the igni- opposite side of the current position.
tion switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”
position. The indicator located on the switch illumi-
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
CAUTION When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
. There is a possibility that people be sure to turn the switch off.
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the seat heater
for a long period of time. When
using the heater, always be sure
to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period 1) HI – Rapid heating
of time while the engine is not running 2) LO – Normal heating
can cause battery discharge. 3) Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO”
or “HI” position on the switch, as desired,

Black plate (31,1)
Rear seats & Armrest (if equipped) 1
WARNING
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge
Never stack luggage or other cargo of the armrest.
WARNING
higher than the top of the seatback
Seatbelts provide maximum re- because it could tumble forward and WARNING
straint when the occupant sits well injure passengers in the event of a To avoid the possibility of serious
back and upright in the seat. Do not sudden stop or accident. injury, passengers must never be
put cushions or any other materials allowed to sit on the center armrest
between occupants and seatbacks while the vehicle is in motion.
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (32,1)
& Head restraint adjustment ! Rear windows side seating position tion.
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you have removed the head re-
straints, you must reinstall all 1) Head restraint
head restraints to protect vehicle 2) Release button 1) Incorrect (retracted position)
occupants. 2) Correct (extended position)
To remove:
. All occupants, including the dri-
While pressing the release button, pull out
ver, should not operate a vehicle
the head restraint.
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their To install:
proper positions in order to mini- Install the head restraint into the holes that
mize the risk of neck injury in the are located on the top of the seatback until
event of a crash. the head restraint locks.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the 1) Head restraint
head restraint to the extended posi- 2) Release button

Black plate (33,1)
To raise: folds down. 1

Pull the head restraint up. . Never allow passengers to ride
To lower: on the folded rear seatback or in
Push the head restraint down while the cargo area or trunk. Doing so
pressing the release button on the top of may result in serious injury or
the seatback. death.
To remove: . Secure all objects and especially
While pressing the release button, pull out long items properly to prevent
the head restraint. them from being thrown around
To install: inside the vehicle and causing
Install the head restraint into the holes that serious injury during a sudden
are located on the top of the seatback until stop, a sudden steering maneu-
the head restraint locks. ver or a rapid acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to
When the rear-center seating position is its original position, shake the
occupied, raise the head restraint to the seatback slightly to confirm that
extended position. When the rear center it is securely fixed in place. If the
seating position is not occupied, lower the seatback is not securely fixed in
head restraint to improve rearward visibi- place, the seatback may sud-
lity. denly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
& Folding down the rear seat- move out from the cargo area or
back trunk, which could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING
. When you fold down the seat- WARNING
back, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the When the seatback is returned to its
rear seat. Not doing so creates original position, observe the follow-
a risk of injury or property da- ing precautions. Failure to do so
mage if the seatback suddenly may lead to serious injury or an
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (34,1)
accident because the operation effi- may tear the strap.

ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.
. The seatbelt should not pass To return the seatback to its original
behind the securing hook for position, raise the seatback until it locks
the seatback. into place and make sure that it is securely
locked.
. The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and it In order to enable lock release of the
should be fully visible. seatback from the trunk side, adjust the
lock release strap as follows.
! 4-door models
Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock

release strap and then fold the seatback
down. 1. Pull the lock release strap behind the
seatback out from its holder.
CAUTION 2. Install the strap on the seatback and
raise the seatback until it locks into place.
Do not operate the seatback with the Make sure that the seatback is securely
lock release strap pulled. Doing so locked.

Black plate (35,1)
In this case, unlock the seatback by

pulling the strap down and then fold the
WARNING 1
seatback forward from the trunk. After returning the seatback to its
! 5-door models original position, confirm that the
unlocking marker of the lock release
knob is no longer visible. Failure to
do so could lead to serious injury or
death in the event of an accident.
Lock release knob

1) Unlocked
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock When the seatback is locked, the lock
release knob and then fold the seatback release knob is automatically pulled into
down. the seatback and the unlocking marker,
which is red colored and attached to the
To return the seatback to its original bottom of the lock release knob, will no
position, raise the seatback until it locks longer be visible.
into place and make sure that it is securely
locked referring to the following descrip-
tion.

Black plate (36,1)
Seatbelts the rear seat properly restrained According to accident statistics,

at all times. The SRS airbag children are safer when properly
& Seatbelt safety tips deploys with considerable speed restrained in the rear seating
and force and can injure or even positions than in the front seat-
WARNING kill children, especially if they are ing positions. For instructions
12 years of age and under and and precautions concerning the
. All persons in the vehicle should are not restrained or improperly child restraint system, refer to
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE restrained. Because children are “Child restraint systems” F1-25.
the vehicle starts to move. Other- lighter and weaker than adults,
wise, the possibility of serious their risk of being injured from Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
injury becomes greater in the deployment is greater. For that sensing and diagnostic module, which will
event of a sudden stop or acci- reason, we strongly recommend record the use of the seatbelt by the front
dent. that ALL children (including passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
. All belts should fit snugly in order those in child seats and those side and curtain airbags deploy.
that have outgrown child re-
to provide full restraint. Loose ! Infants or small children
fitting belts are not as effective in straint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all Use a child restraint system that is
preventing or reducing injury. suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child
times in a child restraint device
. Each seatbelt is designed to or in a seatbelt, whichever is restraint systems” F1-25.
support only one person. Never appropriate for the child’s height ! Children
use a single belt for two or more and weight.
persons – even children. Other- If a child is too big for a child restraint
wise, in an accident, serious Secure ALL types of child re- system, the child should sit in the rear seat
injury or death could result. straint devices (including for- and be restrained using the seatbelts.
ward facing child seats) in the According to accident statistics, children
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies REAR seats at all times. are safer when properly restrained in the
including retractors and attach-
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD rear seating positions than in the front
ing hardware worn by occupants
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE seating positions. Never allow a child to
of a vehicle that has been in a
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS stand up or kneel on the seat.
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
if damage is not obvious. THE CHILD BY PLACING THE the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO anchor height (window-side seating posi-
. Put children aged 12 and under in THE SRS AIRBAG.

Black plate (37,1)
tions only) and then if necessary move the & Emergency Locking Retrac- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
1
child closer to the belt buckle to help tor (ELR)
provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must When the child restraint system is re-
be taken to securely place the lap belt as The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency moved, make sure that the seatbelt
low as possible on the hips and not on the Locking Retractor (ELR). retracts fully and the retractor returned to
child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the The emergency locking retractor allows the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child normal body movement but the retractor mode.
restraint system should be used. Never locks automatically during a sudden stop, For instructions on how to convert the
place the shoulder belt under the child’s impact or if you pull the belt very quickly retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
arm or behind the child’s back. out of the retractor. the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
restraint systems with A/ELR seatbelt”
! Expectant mothers & Automatic/Emergency Lock- F1-27.
ing Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto- & Seatbelt warning light
matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ and chime
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and
Retractor normally functions as an Emer- chime” F3-9.
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
ELR has an additional locking mode & Fastening the seatbelt
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode” intended to secure a child restraint WARNING
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
out completely and is then retracted even . Never use a belt that is twisted or
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in reversed. In an accident, this can
that position and the seatbelt cannot be increase the risk or severity of
Expectant mothers also need to use the
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks injury.
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
will be heard which indicate the retractor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt . Keep the lap belt as low as
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
should be worn securely and as low as possible on your hips. In a colli-
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
possible over the hips, not over the waist. sion, this spreads the force of the
When securing a child restraint system on lap belt over stronger hip bones
the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt, instead of across the weaker
the seatbelt must be changed over to the abdomen.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (38,1)
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- ! Front seatbelts

straint when the occupant sits 1. Adjust the seat position according to
well back and upright in the seat. the following procedure.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision, Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
the front seatbacks should be upright position. Move the seat as far from
always used in the upright posi- the steering wheel as practical while still
tion while the vehicle is running. maintaining full vehicle control.
If the front seatbacks are not Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
used in the upright position in a back to the upright position. Move the seat
collision, the risk of sliding under as far back as possible.
the lap belt and of the lap belt 2. Sit well back in the seat.
sliding up over the abdomen will 3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
increase, and both can result in belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
serious internal injury or death. WARNING the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
. Do not put cushions or any other return the belt slightly and pull it out more
Never place the shoulder belt under slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
materials between occupants the arm or behind the back. If an
and seatbacks or seat cushions. let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
accident occurs, this can increase strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
If you do so, the risk of sliding the risk or severity of injury.
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result CAUTION
in serious internal injury or
death. Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weath-
er; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.

Black plate (39,1)
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle ! Adjusting the front seat shoulder WARNING 1
until you hear a click. belt anchor height
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on The shoulder belt anchor height should be
the shoulder belt. adjusted to the position best suited for the
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
on your hips, not on your waist. anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor Push the button on the buckle.
down.
Before closing the door, make sure that
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that the belts are retracted properly to avoid
it is locked in place. catching the belt webbing in the door.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (40,1)
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center ! Unfastening the seatbelt

seatbelt on 5-door models)
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt. Push the button on the buckle.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist. Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle

until you hear a click.

Black plate (41,1)
! Rear center seatbelt on 5-door 1

WARNING WARNING
models
Fastening the seatbelt with the web- . Be sure to fasten both tongue
bing twisted can increase the risk or plates to the respective buckles.
severity of injury in an accident. If the seatbelt is used only as a
When fastening the belt after it is shoulder belt (with the connec-
pulled out from the retractor, espe- tor’s tongue plate not fastened to
cially when inserting the connec- the connector’s buckle on the
tor’s tongue plate into the mating right-hand side), it cannot prop-
buckle (on right-hand side), always erly restrain the wearer in posi-
check that the webbing is not tion in an accident, possibly
twisted. resulting in serious injury or
death.
. The head restraint is not intended
to be used at the lowest position.
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate Before sitting on the seat, raise
2) Connector (tongue) the head restraint to the ex-
3) Connector (buckle) tended position. Otherwise, in
4) Center seatbelt buckle
an accident, serious injury or
death could result.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (42,1)
1. Raise the head restraint to the ex- 3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it 4. After confirming that the webbing is not
tended position. Do not remove the head through the belt guide as follows: First twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
restraint. insert one edge of the belt into the open attached at the webbing end into the
gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of buckle on the right-hand side until a click
the belt in, so that the whole belt fits is heard.
inside.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
2. Remove the tongue plate from the belt

holder on the right side of the cargo area
and pull out the seatbelt slowly.

Black plate (43,1)
7. Place the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips, not on your waist.
1
! Unfastening the seatbelt
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate 1. Insert a tongue plate or other hard
into the center seatbelt buckle marked pointed object into the slot in the con-
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it nector (buckle) on the right-hand side and
clicks. push it in. The connector (tongue) plate
Push the release button of the center will then disconnect from the buckle.
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on

the shoulder belt.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (44,1)
& Seatbelt maintenance

To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
. Do not allow the retractor to roll oils, chemicals and particularly
up the seatbelt too quickly. battery acid.
Otherwise, the metal tongue . Never attempt to make modifica-
plates may hit against the trim, tions or changes that will prevent
resulting in damaged trim. the seatbelt from operating prop-
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up erly.
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
2. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt. damage to the trim.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Insert the connector (tongue)
into the belt holder.

Black plate (45,1)
Front seatbelt pretensioners must be replaced.

1
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat- NOTE
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The . Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be signed to activate in minor frontal
activated in the event of an accident impacts, in side impacts or in rear
involving a moderate to severe frontal impacts.
collision. . In the case of rollover accidents
– XV CROSSTREK models:
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt As the curtain airbags deploy, the
pretensioner driver’s side seatbelt pretensioner
a n d f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ’s s i d e
NOTE shoulder belt pretensioner are acti-
This section is applicable to the follow- The pretensioner sensor also serves as vated simultaneously.
ing components. the frontal SRS airbag sensor. If the – Except XV CROSSTREK models:
. Except XV CROSSTREK models: sensor detects a certain predetermined Seatbelt pretensioners are not acti-
– Driver’s side seatbelt amount of force during a frontal collision, vated.
– Front passenger’s side seatbelt the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in . The following four components op-
. XV CROSSTREK models: by the retractor to take up the slack so that erate simultaneously.
– Driver’s side seatbelt the belt more effectively restrains the front – Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
seat occupant. – Seatbelt pretensioner for front
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, passenger
an operating noise will be heard and a – SRS frontal airbag for driver
small amount of smoke will be released. – SRS frontal airbag for front pas-
These occurrences are normal and not senger*
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a *: This does not operate if the occupant
fire in the vehicle. detection system deactivates airbag op-
eration. For details, refer to “Front
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-44.
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
event that a pretensioner is activated,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (46,1)
both the driver’s and front passenger’s sioners or could make the sys- & Seatbelt with shoulder belt
seatbelt retractor assemblies should tem inoperative, possibly result- and lap belt pretensioners
be replaced only by an authorized ing in serious injury. Seatbelt
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat- pretensioners have no user-ser- NOTE
belt retractor assemblies, use only viceable parts. For required ser- This section is applicable to the front
genuine SUBARU parts. vicing of front seatbelt retractors passenger ’s side seatbelt in XV
. If either front seatbelt does not equipped with seatbelt preten- CROSSTREK models.
retract or cannot be pulled out due to sioners, consult your SUBARU
a malfunction or activation of the dealer.
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU . When discarding front seatbelt
dealer as soon as possible. retractor assemblies or scrap-
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem- ping the entire vehicle due to
bly or surrounding area has been collision damage or for other
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer reasons, consult your SUBARU
as soon as possible. dealer.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
buyer to the contents of this section.
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
WARNING belt pretensioner)
2) Lap belt pretensioner
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an On the front passenger’s side in XV
upright position with their seat- CROSSTREK models, the shoulder belt
belts properly fastened. Refer to pretensioner is supplemented by a lap belt
“Seatbelts” F1-12. pretensioner, which is located at the base
. Do not modify, remove or strike of the center pillar. Like the shoulder belt
the front seatbelt retractor as- pretensioner, the lap belt pretensioner
semblies or surrounding area. instantaneously pulls in the belt to elim-
This could result in accidental inate slack if a certain level of frontal
activation of the seatbelt preten- collision force is detected. As a result, the

Black plate (47,1)
seatbelt restrains the front seat occupant

more effectively.
passenger
– SRS frontal airbag for driver
WARNING 1
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, – SRS frontal airbag for front pas- . To obtain maximum protection,
an operating noise will be heard and a senger* the occupants should sit in an
small amount of smoke will be released. *: This does not operate if the occupant upright position with their seat-
These occurrences are normal and not detection system deactivates airbag op- belts properly fastened. Refer to
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a eration. For details, refer to “Front “Seatbelts” F1-12.
fire in the vehicle. passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-44. . Do not modify, remove or strike
. Pretensioners are designed to func- the front seatbelt retractor as-
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been tion on a one-time-only basis. In the semblies or surrounding area.
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re- event that a pretensioner is activated, This could result in accidental
mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt both the driver’s and front passenger’s activation of the seatbelt preten-
cannot be pulled out and retracted and seatbelt retractor assemblies should sioners or could make the sys-
therefore must be replaced. be replaced only by an authorized tem inoperative, possibly result-
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seating in serious injury. Seatbelt
NOTE pretensioners have no user-ser-
belt retractor assemblies, use only
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de- genuine SUBARU parts. viceable parts. For required ser-
signed to activate in minor frontal
impacts, in side impacts or in rear . If either front seatbelt does not vicing of front seatbelt retractors
retract or cannot be pulled out due to equipped with seatbelt preten-
impacts. sioners, consult your SUBARU
. When a rollover accident occurs, the a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer.
lap belt pretensioner does not activate;
however, as the curtain airbags deploy, dealer as soon as possible. . When discarding front seatbelt
the shoulder belt pretensioner is acti- . If the front seatbelt retractor assem- retractor assemblies or scrap-
vated. At this time, the driver’s side bly or surrounding area has been ping the entire vehicle due to
seatbelt pretensioner and passenger’s damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer collision damage or for other
side shoulder belt pretensioner acti- as soon as possible. reasons, consult your SUBARU
vate simultaneously. . When you sell your vehicle, we urge dealer.
. The following four components op- you to explain to the buyer that it has
erate simultaneously. seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver buyer to the contents of this section.
– Seatbelt pretensioners for front
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (48,1)
& System monitors of the seatbelt pretensioner, con- & Precautions against vehicle
A diagnostic system continually monitors sult your nearest SUBARU deal- modification
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner er. Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
while the vehicle is being driven. The you want to install any accessory parts to
seatbelt pretensioners share the control your vehicle.
module with the SRS airbag system. CAUTION
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a The front sub sensors are located CAUTION
seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag on both the right and left sides at the
system warning light will illuminate. For Do not perform any of the following
front of the vehicle, and the SRS
details, refer to “SRS airbag system airbag control module including the
modifications. Such modifications
monitors” F1-64. impact sensors is located under the
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
center console. If you need service
& System servicing or repair in those areas or near the . Attachment of any equipment
front seatbelt retractors, have the (bush bar, winches, snow plow,
WARNING work performed by your authorized skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
SUBARU dealer. ine SUBARU accessory parts to
. When discarding a seatbelt re- the front end.
tractor assembly or scrapping . Modification of the suspension
the entire vehicle damaged by a NOTE system or front end structure.
collision, consult your SUBARU If the front part of the vehicle is
dealer. . Installation of a tire of different
damaged in an accident to the extent size and construction from the
. Tampering with or disconnecting that the seatbelt pretensioner does not tires specified on the vehicle
the system’s wiring could result operate, contact your SUBARU dealer placard attached to the driver’s
in accidental activation of the as soon as possible. door pillar or specified for indivi-
seatbelt pretensioner and/or dual vehicle models in this Own-
SRS airbag or could make the er’s Manual.
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. Do not
use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag
systems. For required servicing

Black plate (49,1)
Child restraint systems properly secured in the vehicle. When

installing the child restraint system, care-
child from injury in a collision,
because the child will be caught
1
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions. between the passenger and objects
inside the vehicle.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the Additionally, holding a child in your
rear seating positions than in the front lap or arms in the front seat exposes
seating positions. that child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces considerable speed and force, the
require that infants and small children be child could be injured or even killed.
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
Infants and small children should always

be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle. You should use an infant or child
restraint system that meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-
patible with your vehicle and is appro-
priate for the child’s age and size. All child
restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or WARNING
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of WARNING Children should be properly re-
child restraint systems by use of lower and strained at all times. Never allow a
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-32). Never let a passenger hold a child child to stand up, or to kneel on any
Children could be endangered in an on his or her lap or in his or her seat. Unrestrained children will be
accident if their child restraints are not arms while the vehicle is moving. thrown forward during sudden stop
The passenger cannot protect the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (50,1)
or in an accident and can be injured A: Front passenger’s seat In this seating position, you should use
seriously. You should not install a child restraint only a child restraint system that has a
Additionally, children standing up or system (including a booster seat) due to bottom base that fits snugly against the
kneeling on or in front of the front the hazard to children posed by the contours of the seat cushion and can be
seat are exposed another serious passenger’s airbag. securely retained using the seatbelt.
danger. Since the SRS airbag de- B: Rear seat, window-side seating
ploys with considerable speed and
WARNING
positions
force, the child could be injured or Put children aged 12 and under in
Recommended positions for all types of
even killed. the rear seat properly restrained at
child restraint systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force
& Where to place a child re- Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
and can injure or even kill children,
straint system lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
installing a child restraint system. especially if they are 12 years of age
The following are SUBARU’s recommen- and under and are not restrained or
Some types of child restraints might not be
dations on where to place a child restraint improperly restrained. Because chil-
able to be secured firmly due to projection
system in your vehicle. dren are lighter and weaker than
of the seat cushion.
adults, their risk of being injured
In this seating position, you should use from deployment is greater.
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the For that reason, be sure to secure
contours of the seat cushion and can be ALL types of child restraint devices
securely retained using the seatbelt. (including forward facing child
seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
C: Rear seat, center seating position You should choose a restraint de-
Installing a child restraint system is not vice which is appropriate for the
recommended, although the A/ELR seat- child’s age, height and weight. Ac-
belt and an upper anchorage (tether cording to accident statistics, chil-
anchorage, if equipped) are provided in dren are safer when properly re-
this position. strained in the rear seating posi-
Some types of child restraints might not be tions than in the front seating posi-
able to be secured firmly due to projection tions.
of the seat cushion.

Black plate (51,1)
& Choosing a child restraint & Installing child restraint sys- 1

system tems with A/ELR seatbelt
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
WARNING Unsecured child restraint sys-
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS Choose a child restraint system that is tems can be thrown around in-
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S appropriate for the child’s age and size side of the vehicle in a sudden
SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A (weight and height) in order to provide the stop, turn or accident; they can
R E A R W A R D FA C I N G C H I L D child with proper protection. The child strike and injure vehicle occu-
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS- restraint system should meet all applic- pants as well as result in serious
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- injuries or death to the child.
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO cle Safety Standards for the United States
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO dards for Canada. It can be identified by CAUTION
THE SRS AIRBAG. looking for the label on the child restraint
When you install a child restraint
system or the manufacturer’s statement of
system, follow the manufacturer’s
compliance in the document attached to
instructions supplied with it. After
the system.
installing the child restraint system,
Also it is important for you to make sure check to ensure that it is held
that the child restraint system is compa- securely in position. If it is not held
tible with the vehicle in which it will be tight and secure, the danger of your
used.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (52,1)
child suffering personal injury in the

event of an accident may be in-
creased.
! Installing a rearward facing child

restraint
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the system forward and from side to side to
retractor to change the retractor over from check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) child restraint can be more firmly secured
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) by pushing it down into the seat cushion
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind and then tightening the seatbelt.
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
1. Place the child restraint system in the
clicks will be heard which indicate the to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
rear seating position.
retractor functions as ALR. properly functioning).
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.

Black plate (53,1)

NOTE installed on the window-side seating
position or the rear center seating
1
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the position of a 4-door model, remove
ELR function of the retractor. That the rear seat head restraint. For de-
function is restored by allowing the tails, refer to “Head restraint adjust-
seatbelt to retract fully. ment” F1-8.
Store the head restraint in the trunk (4-
! Installing forward facing child re- door models) or cargo area (5-door
straint models). Avoid placing the head re-
straint in the passenger compartment
WARNING to prevent it from being thrown around
in the passenger compartment in a
Before installing a child restraint sudden stop or a sharp turn.
system, be sure to confirm that the
8. To remove the child restraint system, – When a child restraint system is
seatback is securely locked into
press the release button on the seatbelt installed on the rear center seating
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
buckle and allow the belt to retract position of a 5-door model, raise the
serious injury or death could result.
completely. The belt will return to the rear seat head restraint to the ex-
ELR mode. tended position. Do not remove the
1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm
that it is securely locked into place. head restraint. For details, refer to
WARNING – For 5-door models, it is possible to “Rear center seating position” F1-8.
check whether the seatback is locked 3. Place the child restraint system in the
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- visually. If the seatback is locked into rear seating position.
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT place, the red colored unlocking mar-
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO ker which is attached to the bottom of WARNING
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH the lock release knob is invisible. For
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE When you intend to install a child
details, refer to “5-door models” F1- restraint system on the rear center
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE 11.
SRS AIRBAG. seating position, if the child restraint
2. Prepare the rear seat head restraint system does not fit snugly against
where a child restraint system is intended the contours of the rear center seat
to be installed in the following way. cushion, install the child restraint
– When a child restraint system is system on the window-side seating
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (54,1)
position to be safe. For details, refer

to “Where to place a child restraint
system” F1-26.
6. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 8. Before having a child sit in the child
7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, try to move it back and
retractor to change the retractor over from forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) secured. Sometimes a child restraint can
4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) be more firmly secured by pushing it down
or around the child restraint system function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the seat cushion and then tightening
following the instructions provided by its into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, the seatbelt.
manufacturer. clicks will be heard which indicate the 9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
– When a child restraint system is retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
installed on the rear center seating properly functioning).
position of a 5-door model, pass the 10. Latch the top tether hook onto the
rear center seatbelt through the belt tether anchorage that is located behind
guide properly. For details, refer to the rear seat and tighten the top tether
“Rear center seatbelt on 5-door mod- firmly. For additional instructions, refer to
els” F1-17. “Top tether anchorages” F1-35.

Black plate (55,1)
rear center seat is occupied (including & Installing a booster seat 1

when a child restraint system is installed)
next time, be sure to raise the head WARNING
restraint to the extended position.
. Child restraint systems and seat-
NOTE belts can become hot in a vehicle
When the child restraint system is no that has been closed up in sunny
longer in use, remove it and restore the weather; they could burn a small
ELR function of the retractor. That child. Check the child restraint
function is restored by allowing the system before you place a child
seatbelt to retract fully. in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
11. To remove the child restraint system, Unsecured child restraint sys-
press the release button on the seatbelt tems can be thrown around in-
buckle and allow the belt to retract side of the vehicle in a sudden
completely. The belt will return to the stop, turn or accident; they can
ELR mode. strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
If you have installed a child restraint injuries or death to the child.
system for the rear center seating posi-
tion on a 5-door model, when you
remove the child restraint system, the CAUTION
seatbelt may not be restored to the ELR
mode even if the seatbelt is retracted. In When you install a child restraint
this case, lower the head restraint to the system, follow the manufacturer’s
retracted position to allow the seatbelt to instructions supplied with it. After
retract moreover. The seatbelt will return installing the child restraint system,
to the ELR mode. check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
Remember that the head restraint is not
tight and secure, the danger of your
intended to be used at the lowest position
child suffering personal injury in the
(retracted position). Therefore, when the
event of an accident may be in-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (56,1)
creased. effective in preventing or redu-

cing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
4. To remove the booster seat, press the shoulder belt over the neck may
release button on the seatbelt buckle and result in neck injury during sud-
1. Place the booster seat in the rear allow the belt to retract. den braking or in a collision.
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
WARNING & Installation of child restraint
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through . Never use a belt that is twisted or systems by use of lower and
or around the booster seat and the child reversed. In an accident, this can tether anchorages (LATCH)
following the instructions provided by its increase the risk or severity of
manufacturer. injury to the child. WARNING
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle . Never place the shoulder belt
until you hear a click. Take care not to . Child restraint systems and seat-
under the child’s arm or behind belts can become hot in a vehicle
twist the seatbelt. the child’s back. If an accident
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned that has been closed up in sunny
occurs, this can increase the risk weather; they could burn a small
across the center of child’s shoulder and or severity of injury to the child.
that the lap belt is positioned as low as child. Check the child restraint
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in system before you place a child
possible on the child’s hips. order to provide full restraint. in it.
Loose fitting belts are not as . Do not leave an unsecured child

Black plate (57,1)

Unsecured child restraint sys-
1
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s Some types of child restraint systems can Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
instructions supplied with it. After be installed on the rear seat of your anchorages (bars) and two or three upper
installing the child restraint system, vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such anchorages (tether anchorages) for ac-
check to ensure that it is held child restraint systems are secured to the commodating such child restraint sys-
securely in position. If it is not held designated anchorages provided on the tems.
tight and secure, the danger of your vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
child suffering personal injury in the chorages are sometimes referred to as the
event of an accident may be in- LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
creased. Tethers for CHildren).
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (58,1)
installing a child restraint system only on system, be sure to confirm that the chorages (bars).
the rear seat window-side seating posi- seatback is securely locked into
tions. For each window-side seating posi- place. Otherwise, in an accident,
tion, two lower anchorages are provided. serious injury or death could result.
Each lower anchorage is located where
the seat cushion meets the seatback. 1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm
that it is securely locked into place.
– For 5-door models, it is possible to
check whether the seatback is locked
visually. If the seatback is locked into
place, the red colored unlocking mar-
ker which is attached to the bottom of
the lock release knob is invisible. For
details, refer to “5-door models” F1-
11. Remove the covers and locate the lower
anchorages (bars).
3. Remove the rear seat head restraint.
For details, refer to “Rear windows side
seating position” F1-8.
*: If equipped
The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages) are provided at the locations
shown in the above illustration. For de-
tails, refer to “Top tether anchorages” F1-
35.
To install a child restraint system using
lower and tether anchorages, perform the
following procedure.
2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of
WARNING the rear seat seatbacks. These marks
indicate the positions of the lower an-
Before installing a child restraint

Black plate (59,1)
4. While following the instructions sup- firmly. For additional instructions, refer to & Top tether anchorages 1
plied by the child restraint system manu- “Top tether anchorages” F1-35. Your vehicle is equipped with two or three
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the top tether anchorages so that a child
lower anchorages located at “ ” marks on restraint system having a top tether can
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the be installed in the rear seat. When
hooks are connected, make sure the installing a child restraint system using
adjacent seatbelts are not caught. top tether, proceed as follows, while
observing the instructions by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
7. Before seating a child in the child able.
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to verify that it is
held securely in position.
8. To remove the child restraint system,
5. [If your child restraint system is of a follow the reverse procedures of installa-
flexible attachment type (which uses tion.
tether belts to connect the child restraint
system properly to the lower anchorages)] If you have any question concerning this
While pushing the child restraint into the type of child restraint system, ask your
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower SUBARU dealer.
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt.
6. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located behind
the rear seat and tighten the top tether
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (60,1)
! Anchorage location Two or three upper anchorages are ! 5-door models

installed on the rear shelf behind the rear
! 4-door models seat.
1) For left seat

2) For center seat (if equipped)
1) For left seat 3) For right seat
2) For center seat (if equipped)
3) For right seat

Black plate (61,1)
Two or three upper anchorages are

installed on the back side of the rear
For the center seating position on 5-
door models, route the top tether under
1
seatback. the head restraint as illustrated below.
! To hook the top tether
CAUTION
. Except for the center seating
position on 5-door models, re-
move the head restraint when
mounting a child restraint sys-
tem. Otherwise, it might be pos-
sible that the top tether cannot be
fastened tightly. 4-door models
. For the center seating position on
5-door models, raise the center
1) Seatbelt guide
head restraint to the extended
2) Seatbelt of the center seating position
position when mounting a child
3) Top tether
restraint system. Otherwise, it
will be impossible to use the 2. Tighten the top tether securely.
seatbelt guide that is attached
to the head restraint correctly. Please contact your SUBARU dealer if
you have any question regarding the
The seatbelt guide is essential
installation of a child restraint system.
for routing the belt webbing at
the center seating position. For
information about using the seat-
belt guide, refer to “Rear center 5-door models
seatbelt on 5-door models” F1-
17. 1. Open the cover (4-door models) and
attach the top tether hook to the appro-
priate upper anchorage.

Black plate (62,1)
*SRS airbag (Supplemental The system also controls front seatbelt the blink of an eye – and force to
pretensioners. For operation instructions protect in high speed collisions,
Restraint System airbag) and precautions concerning the seatbelt the force of an airbag can injure
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re- pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre- an occupant whose body is too
straint system. This name is used be- tensioners” F1-21. close to SRS airbag.
cause the airbag system supplements the It is also important to wear your
vehicle’s seatbelts.
WARNING seatbelt to help avoid injuries
. To obtain maximum protection in that can result when the SRS
& Models with SRS airbags and the event of an accident, the airbag contacts an occupant not
lap/shoulder restraints for driver and all passengers in the in proper position such as one
driver, front passenger, and vehicle should always wear seat- thrown forward during pre-acci-
window-side rear passengers belts when the vehicle is moving. dent braking.
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple- The SRS airbag is designed only Even when properly positioned,
mental restraint system in addition to a to be a supplement to the primary there remains a possibility that
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating protection provided by the seat- an occupant may suffer minor
position and each rear window-side seatbelt. It does not eliminate the injury such as abrasions and
ing positions. The supplemental restraint need to fasten seatbelts. In com- bruises to the face or arms
system (SRS) consists of seven airbags. bination with the seatbelts, it because of the SRS airbag de-
offers the best combined protec- ployment force.
The configurations are as follows. tion in case of a serious accident.
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal . The SRS airbags deploy with
airbags Not wearing a seatbelt increases considerable speed and force.
the chance of severe injury or Occupants who are out of proper
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side death in a crash even when the position when the SRS airbag
airbags vehicle has the SRS airbag. deploys could suffer very serious
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas- injuries. Because the SRS airbag
senger, and window-side rear passen- For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system, needs enough space for deploy-
gers) ment, the driver should always
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-12.
. Knee airbag for driver sit upright and well back in the
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily seat as far from the steering
These SRS airbags are designed only close to the SRS airbag. Because wheel as practical while still
as a supplement to the primary protec- the SRS airbag deploys with maintaining full vehicle control
tion provided by the seatbelt. considerable speed – faster than and the front passenger should

Black plate (63,1)
move the seat as far back as and force and can injure or even . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD 1
possible and sit upright and well kill children, especially if they are FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
back in the seat. 12 years of age and under and FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
. Do not place any objects over or are not restrained or improperly SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
near the SRS airbag cover or restrained. Because children are THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
between you and the SRS airbag. lighter and weaker than adults, CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
If the SRS airbag deploys, those their risk of being injured from THE SRS AIRBAG.
objects could interfere with its deployment is greater. . Never allow a child to stand up,
proper operation and could be For that reason, we strongly or to kneel on the front passen-
propelled inside the vehicle and recommend that ALL children ger’s seat, or never hold a child
cause injury. (including those in child seats on your lap or in your arms. The
and those that have outgrown SRS airbag deploys with consid-
child restraint devices) sit in the erable force and can injure or
REAR seat properly restrained at even kill the child.
all times in a child restraint
device or in a seatbelt, whichever
is appropriate for the child’s age, CAUTION
height and weight.
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
Secure ALL types of child re- some smoke will be released.
straint devices (including for- This smoke could cause breath-
ward facing child seats) in the ing problems for people with a
REAR seats at all times. history of asthma or other
According to accident statistics, breathing trouble. If you or your
children are safer when properly passengers have breathing pro-
restrained in the rear seating blems after SRS airbag deploys,
WARNING positions than in the front seat- get fresh air promptly.
ing positions. . A deploying SRS airbag releases
. Put children aged 12 and under in For instructions and precautions hot gas. Occupants could get
the rear seat properly restrained concerning the child restraint burned if they come into direct
at all times. The SRS airbag system, refer to “Child restraint contact with the hot gas.
deploys with considerable speed systems” F1-25.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (64,1)
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
the buyer to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.

Black plate (65,1)
! Components 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side) 1
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
20) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side in XV CROSSTREK models)
1) Airbag control module (including impact 4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
sensor [all models] and rollover sensor 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
[XV CROSSTREK models]) 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side)
side)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (66,1)
& SUBARU advanced frontal system.

WARNING
airbag system The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU in the center portion of the steering wheel. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
advanced frontal airbag system that com- The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
requirements in the amended Federal under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark. Also, the INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) driver’s knee airbag is stowed in the BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
No. 208. bottom of the steering column. TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
system automatically determines the de- the following components deploy.
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal . SRS frontal airbag for driver
airbag at the time of deployment as well as . SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
whether or not to activate the front
. Knee airbag for driver
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the These components supplement the seat-
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy- belts by reducing the impact to the
ment. occupant’s head, chest and knees.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
WARNING
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and Never allow a child to stand up, or to
tag. kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU The SRS airbag deploys with con-
advanced frontal airbag system is a siderable force and can injure or
supplemental restraint system and must even kill the child.
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint

Black plate (67,1)
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that

can result when the SRS airbag
1
contacts an occupant not in proper
position such as one thrown toward
the front of the vehicle during pre-
accident braking.
WARNING WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con-
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu-
with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position
injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough WARNING
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well . Do not put any objects over the
back in the seat as far from the steering wheel pad and dash-
steering wheel as practical while board. If the SRS frontal airbag
still maintaining full vehicle control deploys, these objects could in-
and the front passenger should terfere with its proper operation
move the seat as far back as and could be propelled inside the
possible and sit upright and well vehicle, causing injury.
back in the seat. . Do not put any objects under the
It is also important to wear your driver’s side of the instrument
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (68,1)
panel. If the knee airbag deploys, ror over the rear view mirror. If the whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
those objects could interfere with SRS airbag deploys, those objects airbag should be deployed or not.
its proper operation and could be could become projectiles that could The occupant detection system may not
propelled inside the vehicle, seriously injure vehicle occupants. inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
causing injury. airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
. The key must not be attached to ! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag airbag deploys. This is normal. In this
heavy, sharp or hard acces- case, although the front passenger’s SRS
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a frontal airbag does not operate, the front
sories, or another key. If the knee dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
airbag deploys, those objects passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-
different ways depending on the severity ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
could interfere with its proper of impact.
operation and could be propelled sioner. For details about the seatbelt
inside the vehicle and cause Have the system inspected by your pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
injury. SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS tensioners” F1-21.
airbag system warning light illuminates. Observe the following precautions. Failure
NOTE to do so may prevent the SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system from
The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS
functioning correctly or cause the system
curtain airbag are not controlled by the
to fail.
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem. . Do not apply any strong impact to the
front passenger’s seat.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air- . Do not spill liquid on the front passen-
bag ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag immediately.
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator . Do not remove or disassemble the front
operates in different ways depending on passenger’s seat.
the severity of impact. . Do not install any accessory (such as
The occupant detection system sensor is an audio amplifier) other than a genuine
WARNING installed under the seat upholstery and SUBARU accessory under the front pas-
monitors the physique and posture of the senger’s seat.
Do not attach accessories to the front passenger. Using this information, . Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir- the occupant detection system determines la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.

Black plate (69,1)
. Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat ! Occupant detection system

or pierce the seat upholstery.
have the system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
1
The occupant detection system sensor is
. Do not place a magnet near the installed under the seat upholstery and Also, if luggage or electronic devices are
seatbelt buckle. monitors the physique and posture of the placed on the front passenger’s seat, this
front passenger. Using this information, may adversely affect the ability of the
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
the occupant detection system determines system to determine deployment. This
passenger’s occupant detection system
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal may prevent the front passenger’s frontal
have failed, the SRS airbag system
airbag should be deployed or not. airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-
warning light will illuminate. Have the
system inspected by your SUBARU deal- If the front passenger’s seat cushion is ing properly. Check that the indicators
er immediately if the SRS airbag system wet, this may adversely affect the ability of work properly.
warning light illuminates. the system to determine deployment. If When the OFF indicator turns off and the
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this the seat cushion is wet, the front passen- ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-
may affect the proper function of the ger should stop sitting on the front ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. passenger’s seat. Wipe off liquid from collision. Remove luggage and electronic
Have your vehicle inspected at your the seat immediately, let the seat dry devices from the front passenger’s seat.
SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front naturally and then check the SRS airbag
passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle system warning light as follows.
NOTE
to your SUBARU dealer. . If the SRS airbag system warning light This device complies with Part 18 of
illuminates, keep the seat dry until the the FCC Rules. This device may cause
NOTE warning light turns off. If the SRS airbag interference. If this device causes inter-
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag system warning light stays on even when ference, consult the nearest SUBARU
and SRS curtain airbag are not con- the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to dealer. Also, for maintenance of the
trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron- sit on the front passenger’s seat and have system, consult the nearest SUBARU
tal airbag system. the system checked by your SUBARU dealer. A copy of the original declara-
dealer. tion of conformity can be found in
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and chapter 13.
OFF indicators . If the SRS airbag system warning light
does not illuminate, check that the front ! Conditions in which front passen-
Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
ON and OFF indicators” F3-11. indicators work properly. If the indicators activated
do not work properly, do not allow anyone The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
to sit on the front passenger’s seat and will not be activated when any of the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (70,1)
following conditions are met regarding the CAUTION infant or a small child is in a child restraint
front passenger’s seat: system (including booster seat). Remove
. The seat is empty. When the front passenger’s seat is the child restraint system from the seat. By
. The seat is equipped with an appro- occupied by an infant in an appro- referring to the child restraint manufac-
priate child restraint system and an infant priate child restraint system, ob- turer’s recommendations as well as the
is restrained in it. (See WARNING that serve the following precautions. child restraint system installation proce-
follows.) Failure to do so may interfere with dures in “Child restraint systems” F1-25,
. The front passenger’s occupant detec- the proper operation of the occu- correctly install the child restraint system.
tion system is malfunctioning. pant detection system, activating Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
the front passenger’s SRS frontal position and make sure that the front
WARNING airbag even though that seat is passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
occupied by the infant in the child turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- restraint system. If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT . Do not place any article (includ- while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE ing electronic devices) on the following actions.
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON- seat other than the infant in the
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be . Ensure that no article is placed on the
child restraint system. seat other than the child restraint system
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly . Do not place more than one and the child occupant.
recommended that any forward fa- infant in the child restraint sys- . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
cing child seat or booster seat be tem. sition and seatback of front passenger’s
installed in the REAR seat, and that seat are locked into place securely by
even children who have outgrown a ! If the front passenger’s frontal air- moving the seat back and forth.
child restraint system be also bag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator turns off even when If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
seated in the REAR seat. This is
an infant or a small child is in a child while the OFF indicator turns off after
because children sitting in the front
restraint system (including booster taking relevant corrective actions de-
passenger’s seat may be killed or
seat) scribed above, relocate the child restraint
severely injured should the front
system to the rear seat and immediately
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de- Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” contact your SUBARU dealer for an
ploy. REAR seats are the safest position if the front passenger’s frontal inspection.
place for children. airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator turns off even when an

Black plate (71,1)

NOTE . Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated. position.
1
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is ! Conditions in which front passen- . Make sure that the front passenger
seated in the front passenger’s seat, ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag cover, seat heater or massager, etc.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
will be activated for deployment upon . If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag the front passenger should remove any
impact when any of the following condi-
depending on the occupant’s seating unnecessary items before sitting in the
tions are met regarding the front passen-
posture. Children should always wear a front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
ger’s seat.
seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre- rear seat.
spective of whether the airbag is . When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. Next, turn the ignition switch to the
deactivated or activated. If the front . When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is acti- are placed on the seat.
the system to complete self-checking.
vated (the ON indicator remains illumi- Following the system check, both indica-
nated while the OFF indicator turns off), ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON
take the following actions. indicator illuminates and the ON
indicator should illuminate while the OFF
. Ensure that no article is placed on indicator turns off even when the
indicator remains off.
the seat other than the occupant. front passenger’s seat is occupied
by an adult If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
If the ON indicator still remains illumi- This can be caused by the adult incor- nated while the ON indicator remains off,
nated while the OFF indicator turns off rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat. ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
despite the fact that the actions noted Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” and immediately contact your SUBARU
above have been taken, seat the child/ position. Ask the front passenger to set dealer for an inspection.
small adult in the rear seat and im- the seatback to the upright position, sit up ! How to contact the vehicle manu-
mediately contact your SUBARU dealer straight in the center of the seat cushion, facturer concerning modifications
for an inspection. Even if the system correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/ for persons with disabilities that
has passed the dealer inspection, it is her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to may affect the advanced airbag
recommended that on subsequent trips the rearmost position. Turn the ignition system (U.S. only)
the child/small adult always take the switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF
rear seat. indicator remains illuminated while the ON Changing or moving any parts of the front
indicator remains off, take the following seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,
Children who have outgrown a child
actions. front side frame, radiator panel, instrument
restraint system should always wear the
panel, combination meter, steering wheel,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (72,1)
steering column, tire, suspension or floor There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
panel can affect the operation of the tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
SUBARU advanced airbag system. If in such an area, please contact the
you have any questions, you may contact SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
the following SUBARU distributors. you bought your vehicle.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
HI 96819
808-839-2273
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
bile
491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
Guam
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828

Black plate (73,1)
! Operation The SRS airbags can function only when

1
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the characteristic of item(s)
or person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection system sensor. For this
reason, only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag may deploy in the event of a
collision, but this does not mean failure
of the system.
If the front sub sensors and the impact
sensors in the airbag control module
detect a predetermined amount of force
during a frontal collision, the control
module sends signals to the airbag
module(s) (only driver’s module or both
driver’s and front passenger’s modules)
instructing the module(s) to inflate the
SRS frontal airbag(s). On driver’s side, the
SRS knee airbag also inflates with the
SRS frontal airbag.
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (74,1)
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS some smoke will be released. These SRS airbag deployment depends on the
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators. occurrences are a normal result of the level of force experienced in the passen-
The two inflators of each airbag are deployment. This smoke does not indicate ger compartment during a collision. That
triggered either sequentially or simulta- a fire in the vehicle. level differs from one type of collision to
neously, depending on the severity of another, and it may have no bearing on
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS CAUTION the visible damage done to the vehicle
frontal airbag and depending on the itself.
severity of impact and the characteristic Do not touch the SRS airbag system
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case components around the steering ! Example of accident in which the
of the front passenger’s SRS frontal wheel and dashboard with bare driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
airbag. hands right after deployment. Doing ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most
so can cause burns because the likely deploy
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- components can be very hot as a
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s result of deployment.
vision is not obstructed. The time required
from detecting impact to the deflation of The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
the SRS airbag after deployment is short- passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
er than the blink of an eye. signed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
frontal collision. They are not designed to
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
deploy in most lesser frontal impacts
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
because the necessary protection can be
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
pretensioners operate at the same time.
are not designed to deploy in most side or
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents
airbag would activate in a non-accident because deployment of only the driver’s A head-on collision against a thick con-
situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
and will not interfere with the driver’s would not help the occupant in those only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
ability to maintain control of the vehicle. situations. The driver’s and front passen- driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, function on a one-time-only basis.
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and

Black plate (75,1)
magnitude to the collision described ! Examples of the types of accidents Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
1
above. in which it is possible that the both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
driver’s/driver’s and front passen- frontal airbags may be activated when the
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de- vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
ploy undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (76,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.

Black plate (77,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in most cases if the vehicle is struck from & SRS side airbag and SRS 1
in which the driver’s/driver’s and the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its curtain airbag
front passenger’s SRS frontal side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
airbag(s) will basically not deploy speed frontal collision. The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin is stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
1) First impact the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is
2) Second impact located at the top of each center pillar.
In an accident where the vehicle is In a moderate to severe side impact
impacted more than once, the driver’s collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal impacted side of the vehicle deploys
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first between the occupant and the side
impact. window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
Example: In the case of a double collision, head.
first with another vehicle, then against a In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
concrete wall in immediate succession, sides of the vehicle deploy between the
once either or both of the driver’s and front occupant and the side window and sup-
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are plement the seatbelt by reducing the
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS activated on the first impact, it/they will not impact to the occupant’s head.
frontal airbags are designed not to deploy be activated on the second impact.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (78,1)
WARNING door, and it provides protection

by deploying rapidly (faster than
The SRS side airbag and SRS the blink of an eye) in the event of
curtain airbag are designed only to a side impact collision. However,
be a supplement to the primary the force of SRS side airbag
protection provided by the seatbelt. deployment may cause injuries
They do not do away with the need if your head or other parts of the
to fasten seatbelts. It is also impor- body are too close to the SRS
tant to wear your seatbelt to help side airbag.
avoid injuries that can result when . Since your vehicle is equipped
an occupant is not seated in a with SRS curtain airbags, do not
proper upright position. sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms or hands out of the window. WARNING
The SRS curtain airbag on each Do not rest your arm on either front
side of the cabin is stored in the door or its internal trim. It could be
roof side (between the front pillar injured in the event of SRS side
and a point over the rear seat), airbag deployment.
and it provides protection by
deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event
of a side impact. For XV CROSS-
TREK models, the SRS curtain
airbags also deploy in the event
of a rollover. However, the force
of its deployment may cause
WARNING injuries if your head is too close
to it.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the

Black plate (79,1)
WARNING 1
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or to wrap his/
her arms around the front seat
seatback. In the event of an
accident, the force of the SRS
side airbag deployment could
injure the child seriously be-
cause his/her head or arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also WARNING
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children . Do not attach accessories to the
aged 12 and under should be door trim or near either SRS side
placed in the rear seat anyway airbags and do not place objects
and should be properly re- near the SRS side airbags. In the
strained at all times. event of the SRS side airbag
. Never allow a child to kneel on deployment, they could be pro-
any passenger’s seat facing the pelled dangerously toward the
side window or put their head, vehicle’s occupants and cause
arms and hands out of the win- injuries.
dow. In the event of an accident, . Do not attach a hands-free micro-
the force of the SRS curtain phone or any other accessory to
airbag deployment could injure a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
the child seriously because his/ pillar, the windshield, a side win-
her head is close to the SRS dow, an assist grip, or any other
curtain airbag. cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (80,1)
A hands-free microphone or deploy independently of each other since

other accessory in such a loca-
WARNING each has its own impact sensor. There-
tion could be propelled through Do not put any kind of cover or fore, they may not both deploy in the same
the cabin with great force by the clothes or other objects over either accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and
curtain airbag, or it could prevent front seatback and do not attach SRS curtain airbag deploys independently
correct deployment of the curtain labels or stickers to the front seat of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
airbag. In either case, the result surface on or near the SRS side frontal airbags in the steering wheel and
could be serious injuries. airbag. They could prevent proper instrument panel.
. Never hang or place coat hangers deployment of the SRS side airbag, An impact sensor, which senses impact
or other hard or pointed objects reducing protection available to the force, is located in each of the following
near the side windows. If such front seat’s occupant. locations.
items are present when the SRS . In the left and right front doors
curtain airbags deploy, they ! Operation . In the left and right center pillars
could be thrown through the
passenger compartment and . In the left and right rear wheel houses
cause serious injuries. They . Under the rear center seat
could also prevent proper opera- For XV CROSSTREK models, a rollover
tion of the SRS curtain airbags. sensor is also located inside the airbag
control module.
If the impact sensor that is located under
the rear center seat and one of the center
pillar impact sensors or front door impact
sensors together sense an impact force
above a predetermined level in a side
collision, the control module causes both
the SRS side airbag and curtain airbag on
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain the impacted side to inflate regardless of
airbag can function only when the ignition whether the rear wheel house impact
switch is in the “ON” position. sensor on the same side senses an
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS impact.
side airbags and SRS curtain airbags If the impact sensor that is located under

Black plate (81,1)
the rear center seat and one of the rear

wheel house impact sensors together
rences are a normal result of the deploy-
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
For XV CROSSTREK models, the SRS
curtain airbags are also designed to
1
sense an impact force above a predeter- in the vehicle. deploy when the vehicle is in an extremely
mined level in a side collision, the control inclined state such as during a rollover.
module causes only the SRS curtain CAUTION They are not designed to deploy in most
airbag on the impacted side to inflate. lesser inclined state.
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
For XV CROSSTREK models, if the roll- system components around the Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
over sensor detects rollover of the vehicle, front seat seatback with bare hands airbag are designed to function on a one-
the control module inflates the SRS right after deployment. Doing so can time-only basis.
curtain airbags on both sides. At this time, cause burns because the compo-
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
nents can be very hot as a result of
pretensioners also operate at the same deployment depend on the level of force
deployment.
time. experienced in the passenger compart-
After deployment, do not touch any ment during a side impact collision. That
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag part of the SRS curtain airbag level differs from one type of collision to
immediately starts to deflate. The time system (from the front pillar to the another, and it may have no bearing on
required from detection of an impact to part of the roof side over the rear the visible damage done to the vehicle
deflation of an SRS side airbag after seat). Doing so can cause burns itself.
deployment is shorter than the blink of because the components can be
an eye. very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
for a while following deployment then airbag are designed to deploy in the event
slowly deflates. of an accident involving a moderate to
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain severe side impact collision. They are not
airbag deploy even when no one occupies designed to deploy in most lesser side
the seat on the side on which an impact is impact. Also, they are not designed to
applied. deploy in most frontal or most rear impacts
because SRS side airbag and SRS
When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployment would not help
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud the occupant in those situations.
inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be released. These occur-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (82,1)
! Example of the type of accident in ! Examples of the types of accidents

which the SRS side airbag will most in which the SRS curtain airbag will
likely deploy. most likely deploy.
Except XV CROSSTREK models
A severe side impact near the front seat

activates the SRS side airbag.
A severe side impact near the front seat or
the rear seat activates the SRS curtain
airbag.

Black plate (83,1)

1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
XV CROSSTREK models
impact near the front seat or the rear 1
seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curb-
stone laterally.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (84,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side 1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy (XV CROSSTREK models). 2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.

Black plate (85,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact. 1
deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (86,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
Except XV CROSSTREK models the passenger compartment.
similar object.
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.

Black plate (87,1)

1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
XV CROSSTREK models
side-on impact. 1
the passenger compartment.
similar object.
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (88,1)
! Examples of the types of accidents 2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
3) The vehicle pitches end over end. the first impact, they will not be activated
in which the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag is not designed In the event of accidents like those on the second.
to deploy in most cases illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy & SRS airbag system monitors
in most cases.
A diagnostic system continually monitors

1) First impact the readiness of the SRS airbag system
2) Second impact (including front seatbelt pretensioners)
A) SRS curtain airbag while the vehicle is being driven. The
B) SRS side airbag SRS airbag system warning light will show
In an accident where the vehicle is struck normal system operation by illuminating
from the side more than once, the SRS for approximately 6 seconds when the
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
only once on the first impact. position.
Example: In the case of a double side The following components are monitored
impact collision, first with one vehicle and by the indicator:
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision immediately followed by another from the . Front sub sensor
with another vehicle (moving or station- same direction, once the SRS side airbag – Right-hand side
ary).

Black plate (89,1)
– Left-hand side . Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- . Illumination of the warning light
. Airbag control module (including im- ger’s side) while driving
1
pact sensor [all models] and rollover . Front passenger’s occupant detection
sensor [XV CROSSTREK models]) system sensor
. Frontal airbag module . Front passenger’s occupant detection & SRS airbag system servicing
– Driver’s side control module
– Front passenger’s side . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON WARNING
. Knee airbag module (driver’s side) and OFF indicator
. When discarding an airbag mod-
. Side airbag sensor . All related wiring
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
– Center pillar right-hand side cle damaged by a collision, con-
– Center pillar left-hand side WARNING
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. Front door impact sensor If the warning light exhibits any of . The SRS airbag has no user-
– Right-hand side the following conditions, there may serviceable parts. Do not use
– Left-hand side be a malfunction in the seatbelt electrical test equipment on any
. Side airbag module pretensioners and/or SRS airbag circuit related to the SRS airbag
– Driver’s side system. Immediately take your vehi- system. For required servicing of
– Front passenger’s side cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer the SRS airbag, consult your
. Curtain airbag sensor to have the system checked. Unless nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
– Rear wheel house right-hand side checked and properly repaired, the ing with or disconnecting the
– Rear wheel house left-hand side seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS system’s wiring could result in
. Curtain airbag module airbag will not operate properly in accidental inflation of the SRS
– Right-hand side the event of a collision, which may airbag or could make the system
– Left-hand side increase the risk of injury. inoperative, which may result in
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear . Flashing or flickering of the warn- serious injury.
center seat) ing light
. Seatbelt pretensioner . No illumination of the warning CAUTION
– Driver’s side light when the ignition switch is
– Front passenger’s side first turned to the “ON” position If you need service or repair in areas
. Lap belt pretensioner (front passen- . Continuous illumination of the indicated in the following list, have
ger’s side in XV CROSSTREK models) warning light the work performed by an author-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (90,1)
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air- replaced, use only genuine SUBARU & Precautions against vehicle
bag control module, impact sensors parts. modification
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas. NOTE
WARNING
. Under the center console In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. To avoid accidental activation of the
. On both the right and left sides at . The front part of the vehicle was system or rendering the system
the front of the vehicle involved in an accident in which only inoperative, which may result in
. Steering wheel and column and the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both serious injury, no modifications
nearby areas driver’s and front passenger’s SRS should be made to any components
. Bottom of the steering column frontal airbags did not deploy. or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
and nearby areas . The pad of the steering wheel, the This includes following modifica-
. Top of the dashboard on front cover over the front passenger’s SRS tions.
passenger’s side and nearby frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear . Installation of custom steering
areas wheels
seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
. Each front seat and nearby area wise damaged. . Attachment of additional trim
. Inside each center pillar . The center pillar, front door, rear materials to the dashboard
. Inside each front door wheel house or rear sub frame, or an . Installation of custom seats
area near these parts, was involved in
. In each roof side (from the front . Replacement of seat fabric or
an accident in which the SRS side
pillar to a point over the rear seat) leather
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
. Between the rear seat cushion deploy. . Installation of additional fabric or
and rear wheel house on each . The fabric or leather of either front leather on the front seat
side seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise . Attachment of a hands-free mi-
. Under the rear center seat damaged. crophone or any other accessory
. The rear part of the vehicle was to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
In the event that the SRS airbag is involved in an accident in which no rear pillar, the windshield, a side
deployed, replacement of the system SRS airbag was deployed. window, an assist grip, or any
should be performed only by an author- other cabin surface that would be
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- near a deploying SRS curtain
nents of the SRS airbag system are airbag.

Black plate (91,1)
. Installation of additional electri- etc.) other than genuine SUBARU 1

cal/electronic equipment such as accessory parts to the side body.
a mobile two-way radio on or
near the SRS airbag system Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
components and/or wiring is not you want to install any accessory parts on
advisable. This could interfere your vehicle.
with proper operation of the
SRS airbag system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (3,1)
Keys and doors
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2 Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-12
Key number plate ................................................ 2-2 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-13 2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-2
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-3 Arming the system ............................................ 2-13
Key replacement ................................................. 2-3 Disarming the system ........................................ 2-14
Valet mode ........................................................ 2-14
Door locks ........................................................... 2-3
Passive arming .................................................. 2-15
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-3
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-16
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-16
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-5
Power door locking switches ............................. 2-6 Child safety locks .............................................. 2-17
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-6 Windows............................................................. 2-17
Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-17
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-7
Power window operation by passengers............. 2-19
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-8
Initialization of power window ............................ 2-20
Unlocking the doors ............................................ 2-9
Opening the trunk lid/unlocking rear gate ............ 2-9 Trunk lid (4-door) ............................................... 2-20
Vehicle finder function......................................... 2-9 To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-21
Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-10 To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-21
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-10 Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-21
Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-10 Rear gate (5-door).............................................. 2-23
Replacing lost transmitters ................................. 2-11 Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-24
Alarm system ..................................................... 2-12 Moonroof switches ............................................ 2-25
System operation ............................................... 2-12 Sun shade ......................................................... 2-26

Black plate (94,1)
2-2 Keys and doors
Keys & Key number plate Immobilizer

The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in CAUTION
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This FCC WARNING
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the Changes or modifications not ex-
vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement” F2-3. pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
The immobilizer system is designed to

prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
1) Master key with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
2) Submaster key be used to operate your vehicle. Even if
3) Sub key an unregistered key fits into the ignition
4) Key number plate switch and can be turned to the “START”
Three types of keys are provided for your position, the engine will automatically stop
vehicle. after several seconds.
Each immobilizer key contains a trans-
CAUTION ponder in which the key’s ID code is
stored. When a key is inserted into the
Do not attach a large key holder or
ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
key case to either key. If it bangs
position, the transponder transmits the
against your knees while you are
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
driving, it could turn the ignition
receiver. If the transmitted ID code
switch from the “ON” position to the
matches the ID code registered in the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position, thereby
immobilizer system, the system allows the
stopping the engine.
engine to be started. Since the ID code is
transmitted and acted upon almost in-

Black plate (95,1)
Keys and doors 2-3
stantly, the immobilizer system does not windows and the moonroof, and lock Door locks
impede normal starting of the engine. the doors and rear gate.
If the engine fails to start, pull out the key . Do not leave spare keys or any & Locking and unlocking from
once before trying again. Refer to “Ignition record of your key number in the the outside
2
switch” F3-3. vehicle.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of & Security indicator light If you unlock the driver’s door with a
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC key and open the door while the alarm
Rules. Operation is subject to the Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-21.
system is armed, the alarm system is
following two conditions: (1) this de- triggered and the vehicle’s horn
vice may not cause harmful interfer- & Key replacement sounds. In this case, perform any of
ence, and (2) this device must accept the following operations.
Your key number plate will be required if
any interference received, including . Press any button on the remote
you ever need a replacement key made.
interference that may cause undesired transmitter.
Any new key must be registered for use
operation. . Insert the key into the ignition
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
before it can be used. Up to four keys switch and turn the ignition switch to
CAUTION the “ON” position.
can be registered for use with one vehicle.
. Do not place the key under direct One key that has already been registered
is required in order to register a new key. For details about the alarm system,
sunlight or anywhere it may refer to “Alarm system” F2-12.
become hot. If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code still
. Do not get the key wet. If the key remains in the memory of the vehicle’s
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth immobilizer system. For security reasons,
immediately. the lost key’s ID code should be erased
from the memory. To erase the lost key’s
ID code, all keys that will be used are
NOTE required.
To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the fol- For details about new key registration and
lowing security precautions: erasing the lost key’s ID code, contact
. Never leave your vehicle unattended your SUBARU dealer.
with its keys inside.
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (96,1)
2-4 Keys and doors
To lock the driver’s door from the outside Locking using lock lever Locking using power door locking switch
with the key, turn the key toward the front. 1) Rotate the lock lever forward. 1) Press the front side (lock side) of the
2) Close the door. power door locking switch.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
2) Close the door.
rear. Pull the outside door handle to open
an unlocked door. In this case, all closed doors and the rear
gate (for 5-door) are locked at the same
To lock the door from outside without the time.
key, the following methods are available.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate (for 5-door) are locked before
leaving your vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle when locking the
doors from the outside without the key.

Black plate (97,1)
Keys and doors 2-5
& Locking and unlocking from WARNING Switch Automatically turning

the inside Item position off
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
Map OFF*1 Approximately 20 2
lights*1 minutes later
dren are in your vehicle.
Dome light DOOR Approximately 20
Along with the proper use of seat- minutes later
belts and child restraints, locking Ignition Approximately 20
the doors reduces the chance of switch light — minutes later
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
Cargo area Approximately 20
accident. light DOOR minutes later
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is acciden- *1: The battery drainage prevention function
tally opened, and intruders from affects only the map lights on models with the
unexpectedly opening doors and moonroof, and only when the map light
entering your vehicle. switches are in the OFF position. The map
1) Unlock lights on models without the moonroof do not
2) Lock turn off automatically, so push the light switches
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the & Battery drainage prevention manually to turn them off.
lock lever forward. To unlock the door from function
The operational/non-operational setting of
the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward. If a door or the rear gate (5-door) is not this function can be changed by a
The red mark on the lock lever appears completely closed, the interior lights will SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
when the door is unlocked. remain illuminated as a result. However, dealer to change the setting.
several lights are automatically turned off
Pull the inside door handle to open an by the battery drainage prevention func- NOTE
unlocked door. tion to prevent the battery from dischar- . The factory setting (default setting)
Always make sure that all doors and the
ging. The following interior lights are for this function is set as “operational”.
rear gate (for 5-door) are closed before
affected by this function. . When leaving the vehicle, please
starting to drive. make sure that all doors and the rear
gate (5-door) are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate while the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (98,1)
2-6 Keys and doors
key is in the ignition switch. Power door locking switches doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention func-

tion
This function prevents the doors from
being locked with the key still in the
ignition switch.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
1) Lock
2) Unlock ! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function non-operational
All doors and the rear gate (for 5-door) can
be locked and unlocked by the power door . If the lock lever is turned to the front
locking switches located at the driver’s (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
side and the front passenger’s side doors. open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
To lock the doors, push the front side of driver’s door is locked.
the switch. . If the spare key is used to lock the
To unlock the doors, push the rear side of driver’s door from the outside of the
the switch. vehicle, the door is locked.
When you close the doors after you set This function’s operational/non-opera-
the door locks, the doors remain locked. tional setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
NOTE dealer for details.
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the

Black plate (99,1)
Keys and doors 2-7

NOTE Remote keyless entry system responsible for compliance
When leaving the vehicle, make sure could void the user’s authority
you are holding the key before locking to operate the equipment.
the doors. CAUTION 2
This device complies with Part 15 of
. Do not expose the remote trans- the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
mitter to severe shocks, such as Rules. Operation is subject to the
those experienced as a result of following two conditions: (1) this de-
dropping or throwing. vice may not cause harmful interfer-
. Do not take the remote transmit- ence, and (2) this device must accept
ter apart except when replacing any interference received, including
the battery. interference that may cause undesired
. Do not get the remote transmitter operation.
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with Two transmitters are provided for your
a cloth immediately. vehicle.
. When you carry the remote trans-
The remote keyless entry system has the
mitter on an airplane, do not
following functions.
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane. . Locking and unlocking the doors (and
When any button of the remote rear gate on the 5-door) without a key
transmitter is pressed, radio . Unlocking the rear gate on the 5-door
waves are sent and may affect without a key
the operation of the airplane. . Opening the trunk lid on the 4-door
When you carry the remote trans- without a key
mitter in a bag on an airplane, . Sounding a panic alarm
take measures to prevent the . Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
buttons of the remote transmitter tem. For detailed information, refer to
from being pressed. “Alarm system” F2-12.
. FCC WARNING
The operable distance of the remote
Changes or modifications not keyless entry system is approximately 30
expressly approved by the party feet (10 meters). However, this distance
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (100,1)
2-8 Keys and doors
will vary depending on environmental NOTE & Locking the doors

conditions. The system’s operable dis- The turn signal lights will flash once or
tance will be shorter in areas near a twice when the transmitter button is
facility or electronic equipment emitting pressed in the following cases.
strong radio waves such as a power plant, – When locking the doors
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote – When unlocking the doors
controller of home electronic appliances. – When opening the trunk lid (4-door
models)
NOTE – When unlocking the rear gate (5-
The remote keyless entry system does door models)
not operate when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch. Operation of the turn signal light in the
above cases can be set to “On” or
“Off” by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details. Also,
Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and
for models with a multi function dis-
rear gate (5-door). An electronic chirp will
play, the setting can be changed using
sound once and the turn signal lights will
the display. For details, refer to “Multi
flash once.
function display (Non-US vehicles only;
if equipped)” F3-28. If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk
lid) is not fully closed, an electronic chirp
will sound five times and the turn signal
lights will flash five times to alert you that
the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are
not properly closed. When you close the
door, it will automatically lock and then an
: Trunk lid/rear gate unlock button
electronic chirp will sound once and the
: Unlock/disarm button
turn signal lights will flash once.
: Lock/arm button
A: Panic button

Black plate (101,1)
Keys and doors 2-9
& Unlocking the doors & Opening the trunk lid/un- & Vehicle finder function
locking rear gate Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large 2
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ”
button three times in a 5-second period
will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound
once and its turn signal lights to flash three
times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “ ” button
three times, the system may not re-
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s spond to the signals from the remote
door. An electronic chirp will sound twice transmitter.
! 4-door models
and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
To unlock all doors and the rear gate (5- The trunk lid opens when the “ ” button
door), briefly press the “ ” button a is pressed continuously for at least 2
second time within 5 seconds. seconds. An electronic chirp will sound
twice and the turn signal lights will flash
NOTE twice.
If the interval between the first and ! 5-door models
second presses of the “ ” button (for Pressing the “ ” button unlocks the rear
unlocking of all of the doors and the gate.
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-
tem may not respond. An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the turn signal lights will flash twice.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (102,1)
2-10 Keys and doors
& Sounding a panic alarm & Selecting audible signal op- & Replacing the battery
eration
Using an electronic chirp, the system will CAUTION
give you an audible signal when the doors
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
or in the transmitter when repla-
the audible signal off.
cing the battery.
Perform the following steps to deactivate
the audible signal. You can also use the . Be careful not to damage the
same steps to restore the function. printed circuit board in the trans-
mitter when replacing the battery.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate. . Be careful not to allow children to
2. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side touch the battery and any re-
of the power door locking switch. moved parts; children could
swallow them.
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC” 3. While holding down the REAR (UN-
LOCK) side of the power door locking . There is a danger of explosion if
button once. an incorrect replacement battery
switch, pull the key out and re-insert it into
The horn will sound and the turn signal the ignition switch at least 6 times within is used. Replace only with the
lights will flash. 10 seconds after Step 2. same or equivalent type of bat-
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any 4. Open and close the driver’s door once tery.
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a within 10 seconds after Step 3. . Batteries should not be exposed
button on the remote transmitter is to excessive heat such as sun-
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated 5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to
indicate completion of the setting. shine, fire or the like.
after approximately 30 seconds.
You may have the above settings done by When the transmitter battery begins to get
your SUBARU dealer. Also, for models weak, transmitter range will begin to
with a multi function display, the setting decrease. Replace the battery as soon
can be changed using the display. For as possible.
details, refer to “Multi function display
(Non-US vehicles only; if equipped)” F3-
28.

Black plate (103,1)
Keys and doors 2-11
To replace the battery: negative (−) side facing up.

5. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
2
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” button
six times to synchronize the unit.
& Replacing lost transmitters
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing
1. Open the key head using a flat-head the hooks. If you lose a transmitter or want to
screwdriver. purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), your transmit-
ters should be reprogrammed for security
reasons. For details, contact your
SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry
system.
1) Negative (−) side facing up

2. Remove the transmitter case from the 4. Replace the old battery with a new
key head. battery (type CR1620 or equivalent) mak-
ing sure to install the new battery with the

Black plate (104,1)
2-12 Keys and doors
Alarm system with a delay of up to 30 seconds. & Activating and deactivating

The alarm is triggered by: the alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn . Opening any of the doors, the rear gate To change the setting of your vehicle’s
or trunk lid alarm system for activation or deactiva-
sounds and the hazard warning flashers tion, do the following.
flash if someone attempts to break into . Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only models with shock 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
your vehicle.
sensors (dealer option)) “Disarming the system” F2-14.
The system can be armed or disarmed 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
with the remote transmitter. NOTE doors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a
The system will not be activated when the The alarm system can be set to trigger 5-door).
key is inserted into the ignition switch. the illumination of the following interior 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
lights. position.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
. Map lights (models with moonroof) 4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
for activation at the time of shipment from
. Dome light (illuminates only when of the driver’s power door locking switch,
the factory. You can set the system for
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR” open the driver’s door within the following
deactivation yourself or have it done by
position) 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
your SUBARU dealer.
. Cargo area light (illuminates only releasing the switch. The setting will then
when the cargo area light switch is in be changed as follows.
& System operation the “DOOR” position)
The alarm system will sound the following If the system was previously activated:
alarms when triggered. The notifications regarding the map The odometer/trip meter screen displays
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30 lights, dome light and cargo area light “AL oF” and the horn sounds twice,
seconds. are deactivated as the factory setting. A indicating that the system is now deacti-
SUBARU dealer can activate the sys- vated.
. The turn signal lights will flash for 30
tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for If the system was previously deacti-
seconds.
details. vated:
If any of the doors or the rear gate/trunk lid The odometer/trip meter screen displays
remains open after the 30-second period, “AL on” and the horn sounds once,
the horn will continue to sound for a indicating that the system is now acti-
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door or the vated.
rear gate/trunk lid is closed while the horn
is sounding, the horn will stop sounding

Black plate (105,1)
Keys and doors 2-13

NOTE the trunk lid on the 4-door) are locked. than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear
You may have the above setting 5. Close all doors (and the rear gate on gate on the 5-door) will lock, an electronic
change done by your SUBARU dealer. the 5-door). chirp will sound once, the turn signal lights
will flash once, and the security indicator 2
& If you have accidentally trig- light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
gered the alarm system flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice
! To stop the alarm approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-
Do any of the following operations: ing that the system has been armed for
. Press any button on the remote trans- surveillance.
mitter. If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid)
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” is not fully closed, an electronic chirp
position. sounds five times, the turn signal lights
NOTE flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate) are not properly closed.
Only registered keys will stop the When you close the door, the system will
alarm. If the immobilizer transponder : Press to Arm the system. automatically arm and doors will automa-
is not registered, the alarm will not : Press to Disarm the system.
tically lock.
stop.
! To arm the system using power
door locking switches
& Arming the system
1. Close all windows.
! To arm the system using remote 2. Remove the key from the ignition
transmitter switch.
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if 3. Open the doors and get out of the
equipped). vehicle.
2. Remove the key from the ignition 4. Make sure that the engine hood is
switch. locked.
3. Open the doors and get out of the 5. Close the doors (and the rear gate on
vehicle. the 5-door) but leave only the driver’s door
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and or the front passenger’s door open.
6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (106,1)
2-14 Keys and doors
. The 30-second standby time can be lights will flash twice. The flashing of the
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- security indicator light will then change
formed by your SUBARU dealer. slowly (once approximately every 3 sec-
. If your vehicle is a 4-door and you onds from twice approximately every 2
open the trunk using the remote trans- seconds), indicating that the alarm system
mitter’s “ ” button with the alarm has been disarmed.
system armed, the system will be
temporarily placed in a standby state. NOTE
The system will go back to the surveil- After disarming the alarm system,
lance state upon locking the trunk. briefly press the “ ” button a second
. The system is in the standby mode time within 5 seconds to unlock all
for a 30-second period after locking the other doors and the rear gate (5-door).
doors with the remote transmitter. The
security indicator light will flash at ! Emergency disarming
6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of
the power door locking switch to set the short intervals during this period. If you cannot disarm the system using the
door locks. . If any of the following actions are transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
done during the standby period, the broken or the transmitter battery is too
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
system will not switch to the surveil- weak), you can disarm the system without
sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
lance state. using the transmitter as follows.
once and the security indicator light will
start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing – Doors are unlocked using the . Turn the ignition switch from the
for 30 seconds (standby time), the indi- remote transmitter. “LOCK” to the “ON” position with a
cator lights will then flash slowly (twice – Any door (including the rear gate registered key.
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat- of a 5-door or the trunk of a 4-door)
ing that the system has been armed for is opened. & Valet mode
surveillance. – Ignition switch is turned to the When you choose the valet mode, the
“ON” position. alarm system does not operate. In valet
NOTE mode, the remote transmitter is used only
& Disarming the system for locking and unlocking the doors and
. The system can be armed even if the Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than rear gate (5-door) and panic activation.
engine hood, windows and/or moon- 2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The
roof are open. Always make sure that driver’s door will unlock, an electronic To enter the valet mode, change the
they are fully closed before arming the chirp will sound twice, the turn signal setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
system. deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating

Black plate (107,1)
Keys and doors 2-15
and deactivating the alarm system” F2- key once they have been closed.
12. The security indicator light will con- Failure to lock the doors manually
tinue to flash once every 3 seconds will result in a higher security risk.
indicating that the system is in the valet 2
mode. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
To exit valet mode, change the setting of position.
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
ing the alarm system” F2-12.
& Passive arming

When passive arming mode has been
programmed by the dealer, arming of the 4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
system is automatically accomplished with the inside door lock levers.
without using the remote transmitter. Note 5. Close the doors. The system will
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE automatically arm after 1 minute.
MANUALLY LOCKED.
! To enter the passive mode In the passive mode, the system can also
1) ON be armed with the remote transmitter or
If you wish to program the passive arming with the power door locking switches. If
2) LOCK
mode, have it done by your SUBARU the remote transmitter or power door
dealer. 2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
! Arming the system “LOCK” position and remove the key from arming will take place immediately regard-
the ignition switch. less of whether or not the passive mode
CAUTION 3. Open the doors and get out of the has been selected.
vehicle. ! Disarming the system
In passive mode, the system will
automatically activate the alarm but To disarm the system, briefly press the
WILL NOT automatically lock the “ ” button on the transmitter.
doors. In order to lock the doors
you must either lock them as in-
dicated in step 4 below or with the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (108,1)
2-16 Keys and doors
& Tripped sensor identification & Shock sensors (dealer op- Examples:
The security indicator light flashes when tion) – Vibration from a construction site
the alarm system has been triggered. The shock sensors trigger the alarm – Vibration in a multistory car park
Also, the number of flashes indicates the system when they sense impacts applied – Vibration from trains
location of unauthorized intrusion or the to the vehicle and when any of their . You can have the sensitivity of the
severity of impact on the vehicle. electric wires are cut. The alarm system shock sensors adjusted to your pre-
causes the horn to sound and the turn ference by your SUBARU dealer.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
signal lights to flash for a short time when
“ON” position, the indicator light will light
the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of
for 1 second and then flash as follows.
a strong impact or multiple impacts by
. When a door or rear gate (5-door) was sounding the horn and flashing the turn
opened: 5 times signal lights, both lasting approximately 30
. When a door or the trunk (4-door) was seconds.
opened: 4 times If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
. When the ignition switch was turned to connect them and set them for activation
the “ON” position: 3 times or deactivation.
. When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only models NOTE
with shock sensors (dealer option)) . The shock sensors are not always
. When a light impact was sensed: once able to sense impacts caused by break-
(only models with shock sensors (dealer ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
option)) does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
NOTE hammer).
Any of the above indicator light flash- . The shock sensors may sense vi-
ings will recur each time the ignition bration as indicated in the following
switch is turned to the “ON” position. examples and trigger the alarm system.
Rearming the alarm system cancels the Select the settings of the alarm system
flashing. and shock sensors appropriately de-
pending on where you usually park
your vehicle.

Black plate (109,1)
Keys and doors 2-17
Child safety locks Windows & Power window operation by

driver
WARNING ! Driver’s side power window 2
switches
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
Each rear door has a child safety lock that dows using the lock switch when
prevents the door from being opened even children are riding in the vehicle.
if the inside door handle is pulled. . Before leaving the vehicle, al-
When the child safety lock lever is in the 1) Lock switch
ways remove the key from the 2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto
lock position, the door cannot be opened ignition switch for safety and up and down feature)
from inside regardless of the position of never allow an unattended child 3) For front passenger’s window
the inner door handle lock lever. The door to remain in the vehicle. Failure 4) For rear left window
can only be opened from the outside. to follow this procedure could 5) For rear right window
result in injury to a child operat-
WARNING ing the power window. All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver
Always turn the child safety locks to side door.
the “LOCK” position when children The power windows operate only when
sit in the rear seat. Serious injury the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (110,1)
2-18 Keys and doors
! Operating the driver’s window This switch also has a one-touch auto up NOTE
feature that allows the window to be . If a window detects an impact simi-
closed fully without holding the switch. lar to that caused by trapping an object
Pull the switch up until it clicks and release (for example, when the vehicle encoun-
it, and the window will fully close. To stop ters a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-
the window halfway, push the switch down ment function may operate.
lightly. . The window cannot be operated for
a few seconds after the anti-entrap-
NOTE ment function operates.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected . If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
due to situations such as battery or nected due to situations such as
fuse replacement, the one-touch auto battery or fuse replacement, the anti-
up/down function is deactivated. Initi- entrapment function is deactivated.
alize the power window to reactivate Initialize the power window to reacti-
1) Automatically open/close the one-touch auto up/down function. vate the anti-entrapment function. Re-
2) Open/close Refer to “Initialization of power win- fer to “Initialization of power window”
dow” F2-20. F2-20.
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it. ! Anti-entrapment function While closing the driver’s window auto-
The window will open as long as the matically, if the window senses a sub-
switch is held. CAUTION stantial enough object trapped between
the window and the window frame, it
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down feature that allows the window to be . Never attempt to test this func- automatically moves down slightly and
tion using fingers, hands or other stops.
opened fully without holding the switch.
parts of your body.
Push the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open. . The anti-entrapment function
To stop the window halfway, pull the may not operate properly if some
switch up lightly. object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.

Black plate (111,1)
Keys and doors 2-19
! Operating the passengers’ win- ! Locking the passengers’ windows & Power window operation by
dows passengers
! Passenger’s side power window 2
switches
1) Lock
To open: 2) Unlock
Push the appropriate switch down and To lock:
hold it until the window reaches the Press the lock switch. When the lock
desired position. Each passenger window can be controlled
switch is in the lock position, the passen-
To close: by the power window switch located on
gers’ windows cannot be opened or
Pull the switch up and hold it until the the door.
closed.
window reaches the desired position. To unlock:
Press the lock switch again.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (112,1)
2-20 Keys and doors
! Operating the windows & Initialization of power win- Trunk lid (4-door)
dow
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due
to situations such as battery or fuse
WARNING
replacement, the following functions are . To prevent dangerous exhaust
deactivated. gas from entering the vehicle,
. One-touch auto up/down function always keep the trunk lid closed
. Anti-entrapment function while driving.
Initialize the power window using the . Help prevent children, adults or
following procedure to reactivate these animals from locking themselves
functions. in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
1. Close the driver’s door. trunk could quickly become high
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” enough to cause death or serious
To open: position.
Press the switch down and hold it until the heat-related injuries including
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway brain damage to anyone locked
window reaches the desired position.
by pushing down the power window inside, particularly for small chil-
To close: switch. dren.
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
4. Pull up the power window switch and . When leaving the vehicle, either
window reaches the desired position.
close the window completely. Continue close all windows and lock all
When the lock switch on the power pulling up the switch for approximately 1 doors. Also make certain that the
window switch cluster, located on the second after the window is closed com- trunk is closed.
driver’s side door, is in the lock position, pletely.
the passengers’ windows cannot be oper- 5. Open the driver’s side window com-
ated with the passengers’ switches. pletely by fully pushing down the power
windows switch.

Black plate (113,1)
Keys and doors 2-21
& To open and close the trunk & Internal trunk lid release time.
lid from outside handle
WARNING
The trunk lid can be opened using the The internal trunk lid release handle is a 2
remote keyless entry system. Refer to device designed to open the trunk lid from Never allow any child to get in the
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-7. inside the trunk. In the event children or trunk and play with the release
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the adults become locked inside the trunk, the handle. If the driver starts the vehi-
trunk lid down until the latch engages. handle allows them to open the lid. The cle without knowing that a child is
handle is located on the inside of the trunk inside the trunk and the child opens
NOTE lid. the lid using the release handle, the
Do not leave your valuables in the child could fall out and be killed or
trunk when you leave your vehicle. seriously injured.
& To open the trunk lid from CAUTION

inside
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk, of the handle.
pull the yellow handle upward as indicated
by the arrow on the handle.
This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then,
push up the lid.
Pull the trunk lid release lever upward. The handle is made of material that
The lever is on the floor at the left of the remains luminescent for approximately
driver’s seat. an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
exposed to ambient light even for a short
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (114,1)
2-22 Keys and doors
. Load the trunk so that cargo can the end until you hear a click. released.
not strike the release handle. If
the cargo hits the handle while If the latch is not released, contact your
the vehicle is being driven, the SUBARU dealer.
handle may be pulled up and the In this case, press the “ ” button on the
trunk lid may open. That may key lug to release the latch, then close the
cause cargo to fall out of the trunk lid.
trunk, which could create a traffic Also, if the movement of the trunk lid
safety hazard. release handle feels restricted or not
entirely smooth during operation, or the
handle and/or handle base is cracked,
! Inspection
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Perform the following steps at least twice
a year to check the release handle for
correct operation.
This places the latch in the locked posi-
1. Open the trunk lid. tion.
2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin 3. Pull the trunk lid release handle from
blade. Slide the screwdriver blade from outside the vehicle, as indicated by the
the slit aperture of the lock assembly to arrow on the handle to check if the latch is

Black plate (115,1)
Keys and doors 2-23
Rear gate (5-door) . Do not attempt to shut the rear

gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also avoid closing the rear
gate by pulling on the recessed 2
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
To close: gate stays or scratch the stays
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down while loading or unloading cargo.
firmly until the latch engages. That could cause leakage of gas
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
from the stays, which may result
using any of the following systems. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
in their inability to hold the rear
. Power door locking switch: Refer to pull it down holding the recessed grip.
gate open.
“Power door locking switches” F2-6.
WARNING . Be careful not to hit your head or
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
face on the rear gate when open-
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-7. . To prevent dangerous exhaust ing or closing the rear gate and
To open: gas from entering the vehicle, when loading or unloading car-
First unlock the rear gate lock then push always keep the rear gate closed go.
the rear gate opener button. while driving.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (116,1)
2-24 Keys and doors
NOTE Moonroof (if equipped) . Never try to check the anti-en-

If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due trapment function by deliberately
to a discharged vehicle battery, a placing part of your body in the
malfunction in the door locking/unlock- WARNING moonroof.
ing system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
rear gate lock release lever. For the head or any objects protrude from CAUTION
procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the the moonroof. A person could be
rear gate cannot be opened” F9-16. seriously injured if the vehicle stops . Do not sit on the edge of the open
suddenly or turns sharply or if the moonroof.
vehicle is involved in an accident. . Do not operate the moonroof if
To avoid serious personal injury falling snow or extremely cold
caused by entrapment, always con- conditions have caused it to
form to the following instructions freeze shut.
without exception. . The anti-entrapment function
. Before closing the moonroof, does not operate when the moon-
make sure that no one’s hands, roof is being tilted down. Be sure
arms, head or other objects will to confirm that it is safe to do so
be accidentally caught in the before tilting the moonroof down.
moonroof.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
ways remove the key from the functions.
ignition switch for safety and The moonroof operates only when the
never allow an unattended child ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the moonroof.

Black plate (117,1)
Keys and doors 2-25
& Moonroof switches pletely. Pressing the switch continuously momentarily push the switch to the
may cause damage to the moonroof. “OPEN” side or “CLOSE” side.
! Tilting moonroof
! Sliding moonroof After washing the vehicle or after it rains, 2
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
Driving with the moonroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to be
generated at high speeds. If this oc-
curs, use the moonroof at the initial
stop position of 16 in (40 cm) away
from the fully closed position.
1) Raise
1) Open ! Anti-entrapment function
2) Lower
2) Close When the moonroof senses a substantial
The tilting function is activated only when enough object trapped between its glass
the moonroof is fully closed. To open:
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
Slide the “OPEN/CLOSE” switch rear- automatically moves back to the fully open
To raise: ward. The sun shade will also be opened position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
Press the rear side of the “UP/DOWN” together with the moonroof. The moonroof ment function may also be activated by a
switch momentarily. The moonroof raises will stop at a position approximately 16 in strong shock on the moonroof even when
completely. (40 cm) away from the fully opened there is nothing trapped.
position. Slide the switch rearward again
To lower: to open the moonroof completely. CAUTION
Press and hold the front side of the “UP/
DOWN” switch until the preferred position To close: Never attempt to test this function
has reached. Slide the “OPEN/CLOSE” switch forward. using fingers, hands or other parts
To stop the moonroof at a selected mid- of your body.
Release the switch after the moonroof has
way position while opening or closing it,
been raised or has been lowered com-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (118,1)
2-26 Keys and doors
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
& Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or

backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.

Black plate (5,1)
Instruments and controls
Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3 Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-14
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3 AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) ........... 3-15
ACC.................................................................... 3-4 Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
ON...................................................................... 3-4 models) ........................................................... 3-15
START ................................................................ 3-4 ABS warning light.............................................. 3-16 3
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-4 Brake system warning light................................ 3-17
Ignition switch light (if equipped) ......................... 3-4 Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-18
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5 Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF
indicator light .................................................. 3-18
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-5 Door open warning light .................................... 3-18
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-5 All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models)........ 3-19
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle Power steering warning light.............................. 3-19
movement upon turning on the ignition
switch............................................................... 3-6 Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-19
Speedometer....................................................... 3-6
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-21
Odometer............................................................ 3-6
Security indicator light....................................... 3-21
Double trip meter ................................................ 3-7
Select lever/gear position indicator (CVT
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7 models) ........................................................... 3-21
Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-8 Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-22
ECO gauge (if equipped) ..................................... 3-8 High beam indicator light ................................... 3-22
Warning and indicator lights .............................. 3-9 Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-22
Seatbelt warning light and chime ......................... 3-9 Cruise control set indicator light
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-11 (if equipped) .................................................... 3-22
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light
indicators......................................................... 3-11 (models with HID headlights)............................ 3-22
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction Front fog light indicator light (if equipped).......... 3-22
indicator light................................................... 3-12 Headlight indicator light (if equipped) ................. 3-22
Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant Information display (if equipped)...................... 3-23
temperature high warning light ......................... 3-13
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-23
Charge warning light .......................................... 3-14
Driving information display ................................ 3-24
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-14
Clock ................................................................ 3-27
Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 3-14

Black plate (6,1)
Instruments and controls
Multi function display (Non-US vehicles Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-66
only; if equipped) ............................................ 3-28 Illumination brightness control......................... 3-66
Basic operation .................................................. 3-28 Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ............... 3-67
Opening screen.................................................. 3-29 Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with
Ending screen.................................................... 3-29 HID headlights) ................................................ 3-67
Self-check screen............................................... 3-29 Fog light switch (if equipped) ........................... 3-67
Basic screens .................................................... 3-31 Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-68
Selection screen ................................................ 3-34 Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-69
Date and time settings........................................ 3-36 Rear window wiper and washer switch –
Image quality and volume settings...................... 3-40 5-door ............................................................. 3-70
Screen settings .................................................. 3-43 Mirrors ................................................................ 3-71
Maintenance settings.......................................... 3-51 Inside mirror...................................................... 3-71
Driving history registration ................................. 3-54 Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped) ....... 3-71
Car settings ....................................................... 3-55 Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink®
Initialize ............................................................. 3-60 (if equipped) .................................................... 3-73
Light control switch ........................................... 3-63 Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-78
Headlights.......................................................... 3-63 Defogger and deicer .......................................... 3-80
High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-64 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ........................... 3-81
Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-65 Horn .................................................................... 3-82
Daytime running light system ............................. 3-65

Black plate (123,1)
Instruments and controls 3-3
Ignition switch tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi- battery to go dead.

tion, thereby stopping the engine. . If the ignition switch will not move
Also, if the key is attached to a from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
WARNING keyholder or to a large bunch of position, turn the steering wheel
other keys, centrifugal force may act slightly to the left and right as you turn
. Never turn the ignition switch to on it as the vehicle moves, resulting the ignition switch. 3
“LOCK” while the vehicle is in unwanted turning of the ignition
being driven or towed because switch. & LOCK
that will lock the steering wheel,
preventing steering control. And The key can only be inserted or removed
when the engine is turned off, it in this position. The ignition switch will lock
takes a much greater effort than the steering wheel when you remove the
usual to steer. key.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al- If turning the key is difficult, turn the
ways remove the key from the steering wheel slightly to the right and left
ignition switch for safety and as you turn the key.
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even The ignition switch has four positions:
make the vehicle move. LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
NOTE
CAUTION . Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
Do not attach a large key holder or not running.
key case to either key. If it banged . Using electrical accessories for a The key can be turned from the “ACC” to
against your knees or hands while long time with the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position only when the select
you are driving, it could turn the “ON” or “ACC” position can cause the lever is in the “P” position (CVT models)
ignition switch from the “ON” posi- and the key is pushed in while turning it
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (124,1)
3-4 Instruments and controls
(all models). NOTE contains an immobilizer transponder.

The engine may not start in the follow- . The key is near or touching another
& ACC ing cases: transmitter.
In this position the electrical accessories
(audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can & Key reminder chime
be used. The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened and the ignition
& ON switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
This is the normal operating position after
The chime stops under the following
the engine is started.
conditions.
& START . when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position
The engine is started in this position. The . when the key is removed from the
starter cranks the engine to start it. When ignition switch
the key is released (after the engine has
. when the driver’s door is closed
started), the key automatically returns to . The key grip is touching another key
the “ON” position. or a metallic key holder.
& Ignition switch light (if
CAUTION equipped)
For easy access to the ignition switch in
Do not turn the ignition switch to the the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
“START” position while the engine nates when the driver’s door is opened or
is running. when the driver’s door is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
If your registered key fails to start the
engine, pull out the key once (the security The light remains illuminated for several
indicator light will blink), and then insert tens of seconds and then gradually turns
the key in the ignition switch and turn it to off under the following conditions.
the “START” position and again try to start . when the driver’s door is closed
the engine. . when the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
. The key is near another key that

Black plate (125,1)
The light turns off immediately under the Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges
following conditions.
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position NOTE
. when all doors and the rear gate (5- Liquid-crystal displays are used in
door) are locked using the remote keyless some of the meters and gauges on 3
entry transmitter the combination meter. You will find
their indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Combination meter illumina-

tion
“ON” position, the various parts of the
The hazard warning flasher is used to combination meter are illuminated in the
warn other drivers when you have to park following sequence.
your vehicle under emergency conditions. 1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
The hazard warning flasher works regard- needles, gauge needles and liquid crystal
less of the position of the ignition switch. display illuminate.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, 2. Meter and gauge indications each
push the hazard warning button on the show MAX position.
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, 3. Meter and gauge indications each
push the button again. show MIN position.
4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
NOTE gins.
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (126,1)
& Canceling the function for trip knob. & Odometer

meter/gauge needle move-
ment upon turning on the
ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that takes place when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” *: They cannot be displayed when the
position. To change the setting, perform ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” To change the current setting, press the
or “ACC” position. trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated 1) Trip knob
NOTE This meter displays the odometer when

the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
. Your vehicle’s initial movement
setting of the meter/gauge needles The odometer shows the total distance
has been set for activation “ ” at that the vehicle has been driven.
the time of shipment from the factory. If you press the trip knob when the ignition
. It is not possible to change the initial switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position,
movement setting of the meter/gauge the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you
needles when the ignition switch is in do not press the trip knob within 10
the “ON” position. Change the setting seconds of illumination of the odometer/
when the ignition switch is in the trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn
1) Trip knob
“LOCK” or “ACC” position. off.
2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or Also, if you open and close the driver’s
“ ” on the trip meter display. & Speedometer door within 10 seconds of illumination of
The speedometer shows the vehicle the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
The display can be switched as shown in speed. meter will turn off.
the following sequence by pressing the

Black plate (127,1)
& Double trip meter door within 10 seconds of illumination of fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip the trip meter will be lost.
meter will turn off.
The display can be switched as shown in & Tachometer
the following sequence by pressing the
trip knob.
The tachometer shows the engine speed 3
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. This may cause severe da-
mage to the engine.
*: They cannot be displayed when the
1) Trip knob ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
This meter displays the two trip meters
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob
position.
and keep the knob pressed for more than
The trip meter shows the distance that the 2 seconds.
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero. CAUTION
If you press the trip knob when the ignition To ensure safety, do not attempt to
switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, change the function of the indicator
the odometer/trip meter will light up. It is during driving, as an accident could
possible to switch between the A trip result.
meter and B trip meter indications while
the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do
not press the trip knob within 10 seconds NOTE
of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, If the connection between the combina-
the odometer/trip meter will turn off. tion meter and battery is broken for any
Also, if you open and close the driver’s reason such as vehicle maintenance or
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (128,1)
& Fuel gauge door, the fuel gauge indication will turn off. NOTE
. The ECO gauge shows only an
NOTE approximate indication of fuel effi-
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel ciency.
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler . After resetting the trip meter, the
door (lid) is located on the right side of average rate of fuel consumption is not
the vehicle. shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).
Before that time, the ECO gauge does
& ECO gauge (if equipped) not operate.
Fuel gauge
1) Trip knob
The fuel gauge is displayed when the
ignition is in the “ON” position, and it
shows the approximate amount of fuel
remaining in the tank.
The gauge indication may change slightly
during braking, turning or acceleration due 1) U.S.-spec. models
to fuel level movement in the tank. 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
If you press the trip knob while the ignition The ECO gauge shows the difference
switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position, between the current rate of fuel consump-
the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the tion and the average rate of fuel consump-
amount of fuel remaining in the tank. If, tion since the trip meter was last reset.
while the fuel gauge is indicating the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you If the needle of the gauge moves towards
(a) do not press the trip knob for 10 the right side, this indicates better fuel
seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s efficiency.

Black plate (129,1)
Warning and indicator lights : Coolant temperature high warning light : Cruise control indicator light
(if equipped)
: Charge warning light
Several of the warning and indicator lights : Cruise control set indicator light
illuminate when the ignition switch is : Oil pressure warning light (if equipped)
initially turned to the “ON” position. This
permits checking the operation of the : Engine low oil level warning light : Headlight indicator light (if equipped) 3
bulbs. : Windshield washer fluid warning light : Automatic headlight beam leveler
Apply the parking brake and turn the : AT OIL TEMP warning light warning light (models with HID head-
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For (CVT models) lights)
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and then turn off after several : Low tire pressure warning light If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
seconds or after the engine has started. (U.S.- spec. models) burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
: Seatbelt warning light / : ABS warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
only when the driver fastens the / : Brake system warning light for repair.
seatbelt.) : Low fuel warning light & Seatbelt warning light
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning and chime
: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start
light assist OFF indicator light Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
(The seatbelt warning light turns off warning device at the driver’s and front
only when the front seat passenger : Door open warning light passenger’s seat, as required by current
fastens the seatbelt.) safety standards.
: AWD warning light (CVT models)
: SRS airbag system warning light With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
: Power steering warning light position, this device reminds the driver
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag and front passenger to fasten their seat-
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
ON indicator light belts by illuminating the warning lights in
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag tion indicator light the locations indicated in the following
OFF indicator light illustration and sounding a chime.
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- tor light
function indicator light
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (130,1)
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” turned ON next time, however, the
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will complete sequence of the warning
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the operation resumes. For further details
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri- about canceling the warning operation,
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will please contact your SUBARU dealer.
also sound simultaneously. If there is no passenger on the front
NOTE passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will
. If the driver’s and/or front passen- be deactivated. The front passenger’s
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened occupant detection system monitors
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning whether or not there is a passenger on
device operates as follows according the front passenger’s seat.
to the vehicle speed.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
Driver’s warning light – At speeds lower than approxi-
to do so may prevent the device from
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
functioning correctly or cause the device
The warning light(s) for unfastened
to fail.
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
steady illumination and flashing at . Do not install any accessory such as a
15-second intervals. The chime will table or TV onto the seatback.
not sound. . Do not store a heavy load in the
– At speeds higher than approxi- seatback pocket.
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
The warning light(s) for unfastened place his/her hands or legs on the front
seatbelt(s) will alternate between passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
flashing and steady illumination at pull the seatback.
15-second intervals and the chime . Do not use front seats with their back-
will sound while the warning light(s) ward-forward position and seatback not
Front passenger’s warning light is/are flashing. being locked into place securely. If any of
. It is possible to cancel the warning them are not locked securely, adjust them
! Operation operation that follows the 6-second again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
If the driver and/or front passenger have/ warning after turning ON the ignition “Front seats” F1-2.
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when switch. When the ignition switch is
If the seatbelt warning device for the front

Black plate (131,1)
passenger’s seat does not function cor- & SRS airbag system & Front passenger’s frontal
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the warning light airbag ON and OFF indica-
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is tors
deactivated even when the front passen- WARNING
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions. If the warning light exhibits any of 3
. Ensure that no article is placed on the the following conditions, there may
seat other than a child restraint system be a malfunction in the seatbelt
and its child occupant, although we pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
strongly recommend that all children sit system. Immediately take your vehi-
in the rear seat properly restrained. cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
. Ensure that there is no article left in the to have the system checked. Unless
seatback pocket. checked and properly repaired, the
. Ensure that the backward-forward po- seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
sition and seatback of front passenger’s airbag will not operate properly in
seat are locked into place securely by the event of a collision, which may
moving the seat back and forth. increase the risk of injury.
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. Flashing or flickering of the warn- indicator
If still the seatbelt warning device for front ing light / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
passenger’s seat does not function cor- . No illumination of the warning indicator
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- light when the ignition switch is
tions described above, immediately con- The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
first turned to the “ON” position and OFF indicators show you the status of
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion. . Continuous illumination of the the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
warning light The indicators are located next to the
. Illumination of the warning light clock in the center portion of the dash-
while driving board.
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (132,1)
indicators illuminates depending on the control system checked and re- take several driving trips. If the light does
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal paired as necessary could cause not turn off, take your vehicle to your
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad- serious damage, which may not be authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring. covered by your vehicle’s warranty. ! If the light is blinking
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks If the light is blinking while driving, an
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
while the engine is running, it may indicate engine misfire condition has been de-
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
that there is a problem or potential tected which may damage the emission
indicator will remain off.
problem somewhere in the emission con- control system.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
trol system. To prevent serious damage to the emis-
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
sion control system, you should do the
airbag ON indicator will remain off while ! If the light illuminates steadily following.
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
If the light illuminates steadily while driving . Reduce vehicle speed.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” or does not turn off after the engine starts,
position, if both the ON and OFF indica- . Avoid hard acceleration.
an emission control system malfunction . Avoid steep uphill grades.
tors remain illuminated or off simulta- has been detected.
neously even after the system check . Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
period, the system is malfunctioning. You should have your vehicle checked by ble.
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- . If towing a trailer, stop doing so as soon
ately for an inspection. ately.
as possible (trailer towing permitted with
NOTE XV CROSSTREK models only).
& CHECK ENGINE warn- This light also illuminates when the fuel
ing light/Malfunction in- The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. stop blinking and illuminate steadily after
dicator light several driving trips. You should have your
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
CAUTION the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning vehicle checked by an authorized
light/malfunction indicator light illuminating SUBARU dealer immediately.
If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi- could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
nates while you are driving, have Remove the cap and retighten it until it
your vehicle checked/repaired by clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
your SUBARU dealer as soon as with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
possible. Continued vehicle opera- cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
tion without having the emission warning light turn off immediately. It may

Black plate (133,1)
& Coolant temperature overheating. After that, have If the engine coolant temperature in-
low indicator light/Cool- the system checked by your creases over the specified range, the
ant temperature high nearest SUBARU dealer. Refer indicator light/warning light blinks in
warning light to “Engine overheating” F9- RED. At this time, the engine is close to
11. overheating.
CAUTION – Blinking in RED and BLUE If the engine coolant temperature in-
3
alternately: creases further, the indicator light/warning
. After turning the ignition switch The electrical system may be light illuminates in RED continuously. At
to the “ON” position, if this malfunctioning. Contact your this time, the engine may be overheating.
indicator light/warning light be- SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
haves in any of the following tion. When the indicator light/warning light
ways, the electrical system may blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely
be malfunctioning. Contact your This coolant temperature low indicator stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and
SUBARU dealer immediately for light/coolant temperature high warning refer to the emergency steps to take in the
an inspection. light has the following three functions. case of engine overheating. Refer to
– It remains blinking in RED. . Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi- “Engine overheating” F9-11. After that,
cient warming up of the engine have the system checked by your nearest
– It remains illuminated in RED SUBARU dealer.
for more than 2 seconds. . Blinking in RED indicates that the
– It remains blinking in RED and engine is close to overheating Also, if the indicator light/warning light
BLUE alternately. . Illumination in RED indicates overheat- often blinks in RED, the electrical system
ing condition of the engine may be malfunctioning. Contact your
. While driving, if this indicator SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
light/warning light behaves in For a system check, this indicator light/
any of the following ways, take warning light illuminates in RED for NOTE
the specified appropriate mea- approximately 2 seconds when the igni- If the engine is restarted after a certain
sure listed below. tion switch is turned to the “ON” position. driving condition, this indicator light/
– Blinking or illuminated in After that, this indicator light/warning light warning light may illuminate in RED.
RED: changes to BLUE and maintains illumina- However, this is not a malfunction if the
Safely stop the vehicle as tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light indicator light/warning light turns off
soon as possible, and refer turns off when the engine is warmed up after a short time.
to the emergency steps to sufficiently.
take in the case of engine
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (134,1)
& Charge warning light CAUTION vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.

If this light illuminates when the engine is Do not operate the engine with the NOTE
running, it may indicate that the charging oil pressure warning light illumi- . After replacing or adding the engine
system is not working properly. nated. This may cause serious en- oil, if the engine oil level is within the
If the light illuminates while driving or does gine damage. normal range when restarting the en-
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the gine on a level surface, the warning
engine at the first safe opportunity and light will turn off.
check the alternator belt. If the belt is & Engine low oil level . The warning light may illuminate
loose, broken or if the belt is in good warning light temporarily in the following conditions
condition but the light remains illuminated, because a low oil level may be detected
This light illuminates when the engine oil as a result of significant oil movement
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
level decreases to the lower limit. The in the engine.
immediately.
illuminating conditions and remaining oil – when the vehicle is considerably
quantity are as follows.
& Oil pressure warning . when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
inclined on an uphill or steep slope
light – when the vehicle has continu-
position but the engine is not running: ously accelerated and decelerated
If this light illuminates when the engine is approximately 2.2 US qt (2.1 liters, 1.8 – when the vehicle is continuously
running, it may indicate that the engine oil Imp qt) turned
pressure is low and the lubricating system . while the engine is running: approxi- – when the vehicle is driven on a
is not working properly. mately 3.8 US qt (3.6 liters, 3.2 Imp qt) road that alternates continuously
If the light illuminates while driving or does between uphill and downhill
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the If the engine low oil level warning light
engine at the first safe opportunity and illuminates while driving, park the vehicle
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is in a safe and level location, and then & Windshield washer
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is check the engine oil level. When the fluid warning light
at the proper level but the light remains engine oil level is not within the normal
range, refill with engine oil. Refer to This light illuminates when the fluid level in
illuminated, contact your nearest the windshield washer fluid tank de-
SUBARU dealer immediately. “Engine oil” F11-7.
creases to the lower limit (approximately
For details about checking the engine oil If the warning light does not turn off after
1.1 US qt, 1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt).
level or adding the engine oil, refer to refilling the engine oil, or the warning light
“Engine oil” F11-7. illuminates even though the engine oil
level is within the normal range, have the

Black plate (135,1)
& AT OIL TEMP warning should be checked monthly when cold Your vehicle has also been equipped with
light (CVT models) and inflated to the inflation pressure a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
recommended by the vehicle manufac- when the system is not operating properly.
If this light illuminates when the engine is turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
running, it may indicate that the transmis- pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
sion fluid temperature is too hot. a different size than the size indicated on When the system detects a malfunction, 3
If the light illuminates while driving, im- the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- the telltale will flash for approximately one
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place sure label, you should determine the minute and then remain continuously
and let the engine idle until the warning proper tire inflation pressure for those illuminated. This sequence will continue
light turns off. tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the
! Transmission control system warn- As an added safety feature, your vehicle malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
ing has been equipped with a tire pressure system may not be able to detect or signal
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes a low tire pressure telltale when one or
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
after the engine has started, it may malfunctions may occur for a variety of
more of your tires is significantly under- reasons, including the installation of re-
indicate that the transmission control inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
system is not working properly. Contact placement or alternate tires or wheels on
pressure telltale illuminates, you should the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service stop and check your tires as soon as
immediately. functioning properly. Always check the
possible, and inflate them to the proper TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
& Low tire pressure inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
one or more tires or wheels on your
warning light (U.S.-spec. vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
models) reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, to continue to function properly.
When the ignition switch is turned to the and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability. Should the warning light illuminate stea-
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- dily after blinking for approximately one
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2 Please note that the TPMS is not a minute, have the system inspected by
seconds to check that the tire pressure substitute for proper tire maintenance, your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning and it is the driver’s responsibility to possible.
properly. If there is no problem and all tires maintain correct tire pressure, even if
are properly inflated, the light will turn off. under-inflation has not reached the level WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale. If this light does not illuminate
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (136,1)
briefly after the ignition switch is for tire and sensor replacement and/ & ABS warning light
turned ON or the light illuminates or system resetting.
steadily after blinking for approxi- If the light illuminates steadily after CAUTION
mately one minute, you should have blinking for approximately one min-
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- ute, promptly contact a SUBARU . If any of the following conditions
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as dealer to have the system inspected. occur, we recommend that you
soon as possible. have the ABS system repaired at
If this light illuminates while driving, the first available opportunity by
never brake suddenly and keep CAUTION your SUBARU dealer.
driving straight ahead while gradu- – The warning light does not
ally reducing speed. Then slowly The tire pressure monitoring system illuminate when the ignition
pull off the road to a safe place. is NOT a substitute for manually switch is turned to the “ON”
Otherwise an accident involving checking tire pressure. The tire position.
pressure should be checked peri-
serious vehicle damage and serious – The warning light illuminates
personal injury could occur. odically (at least monthly) using a
when the ignition switch is
tire gauge. After any change to tire
If this light still illuminates while turned to the “ON” position,
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
driving after adjusting the tire pres- but it does not turn off even
itoring system will not re-check tire
sure, a tire may have significant when the vehicle speed ex-
inflation pressures until the vehicle
damage and a fast leak that causes ceeds approximately 25 mph
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have (40 km/h).
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to – The warning light illuminates
as soon as possible. at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the during driving.
When a spare tire is mounted or a TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- . When the warning light is on (and
wheel rim is replaced without the tion pressures. If the tire pressures the brake system warning light is
original pressure sensor/transmitter are now above the severe low off), the ABS function shuts
being transferred, the Low tire pres- pressure threshold, the low tire down. However, the conventional
sure warning light will illuminate pressure warning light should turn brake system continues to oper-
steadily after blinking for approxi- off a few minutes later. Therefore, be ate normally.
mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for
the TPMS is unable to monitor all the front and rear tires. The ABS warning light illuminates to-
four road wheels. Contact your gether with the brake system warning light
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible

Black plate (137,1)
if the EBD system malfunctions. For When the battery becomes fully charged, of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
further details of the EBD system mal- the light will turn off. switch in the “ON” position and with the
function warning, refer to “Electronic parking brake fully released.
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system & Brake system If the brake system warning light should
warning” F3-17. warning light illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
3
NOTE WARNING
If the warning light behavior is as switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
described in the following conditions, . Driving with the brake system indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
the ABS system may be considered warning light on is dangerous. brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
normal. This indicates your brake system stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
may not be working properly. If and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
. The warning light illuminates when
the light remains illuminated, level is below the “MIN” mark in the
the ignition switch is turned to the
have the brakes inspected by a reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
“ON” position and turns off approxi-
SUBARU dealer immediately. the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
mately 2 seconds after the engine has
dealer for repair.
started. . If at all in doubt about whether
. The warning light illuminates right the brakes are operating prop- ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
after the engine is started but turns off erly, do not drive the vehicle. (EBD) system warning
immediately, remaining off. Have your vehicle towed to the The brake system warning light also
. The warning light remains illumi- nearest SUBARU dealer for re- illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
nated after the engine has been started, pair. EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
but it turns off when the vehicle speed together with the ABS warning light.
reaches approximately 25 mph (40 This light has the following functions. The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
km/h). the brake system warning light and ABS
! Parking brake warning
. The warning light illuminates during warning light illuminate simultaneously
driving, but it turns off immediately and The light illuminates with the parking
during driving.
remains off. brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
When driving with an insufficient battery parking brake is fully released. tional braking system will still function.
voltage such as when the engine is jump However, the rear wheels will be more
started, the ABS warning light may illumi- ! Brake fluid level warning prone to locking when the brakes are
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage This light illuminates when the brake fluid applied harder than usual and the vehi-
and does not indicate a malfunction. level has dropped to near the “MIN” level cle’s motion may therefore become some-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (138,1)
what harder to control. & Low fuel warning light WARNING

If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously, The low fuel warning light illuminates When the Hill start assist warning
take the following steps. when the tank is nearly empty, at approxi- light illuminates, have the vehicle
mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal). inspected at an authorized SUBARU
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, It only operates when the ignition switch is
flat place. dealer.
in the “ON” position.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake and then restart it. CAUTION ! Hill start assist OFF indicator light
3. Release the parking brake. If both While the Hill start assist system is
warning lights turn off, the EBD system Promptly put fuel in the tank when- deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to ever the low fuel warning light indicator light illuminates continuously to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the illuminates. Engine misfires as a inform the driver that the Hill start assist
system inspected. result of an empty tank could cause system is not operational.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again damage to the engine.
and remain illuminated after the engine & Door open warning
has been restarted, shut down the engine NOTE light
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. This light does not turn off unless the The warning light illuminates if any door,
tank is replenished up to an internal the rear gate (5-door models) or trunk lid
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
fuel quantity of approximately 4.5 US (4-door models) is not fully closed. This
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
gal (17 liters, 3.7 Imp gal). function is effective even if the ignition
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position,
system inspected. & Hill start assist warning or the key is removed from the ignition
light/Hill start assist switch.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. OFF indicator light Always make sure this light is not illumi-
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the nated before you start to drive.
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. ! Hill start assist warning light
While the engine is running, if there are
any malfunctions in the Hill start assist
system, the warning light will illuminate.

Black plate (139,1)
& All-Wheel Drive warn- light illuminates when a malfunction has At this time, there will be more resis-
ing light (CVT models) been detected in the electric power steer- tance when steering. However this is
ing system. not a malfunction. Normal steering
This light illuminates when All-Wheel force will be restored after the steering
Drive is disengaged and the drive me- CAUTION wheel is not operated for a while and
chanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive the power steering control system has 3
for maintenance or similar purposes. When the power steering warning an opportunity to cool down. However,
It flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires light is illuminated, there may be if the power steering is operated in a
of differing diameters fitted on the wheels more resistance when the steering non-standard way which causes power
or with an excessively low air pressure in wheel is operated. Drive carefully to assist limitation to occur too fre-
any of the tires. the nearest SUBARU dealer and quently, that may result in a malfunc-
have the vehicle inspected immedi- tion of the power steering control
CAUTION ately. system.
Continuing to drive with the AWD
warning light flashing can damage NOTE & Vehicle Dynamics
the powertrain. If the AWD warning If the steering wheel is operated in the Control warning light/
light starts to flash, promptly park in following ways, the power steering Vehicle Dynamics Con-
a safe place and check whether the control system may temporarily limit trol operation indicator
tires have differing diameters and the power assist in order to prevent the light
whether any of the tires has an system components, such as the con-
excessively low inflation pressure. trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating. ! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
& Power steering warn- quently and turned sharply while the
ing light vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low CAUTION
speeds, such as while frequently turn- The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
This warning light illuminates when the
ing the steering wheel during parallel
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” tem provides its ABS control
parking. through the electrical circuit of the
position and turns off after the engine
. The steering wheel remains in the ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS
has started. This indicates that the warn-
fully turned position for a long period is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
ing system is working properly.
of time. Control system becomes unable to
While the engine is running, this warning
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (140,1)
provide ABS control. As a result, the when the ignition switch is turned to the ! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
Vehicle Dynamics Control system “ON” position. tion indicator light
also becomes inoperative, causing . The warning light illuminates while the The indicator light flashes during activa-
the warning light to illuminate. vehicle is running. tion of the skid suppression function and
Though both the Vehicle Dynamics during activation of the traction control
Control and ABS systems are inop- NOTE function.
erative in this case, the ordinary If the warning light behavior is as
functions of the brake system are described in the following examples, NOTE
still available. You will be safe while the Vehicle Dynamics Control system . The light may remain illuminated for
driving with this condition, but drive may be considered normal. a short period of time after the engine
carefully and have your vehicle . The warning light illuminates when has been started, especially in cold
checked at a SUBARU dealer as the ignition switch is turned to the weather. This does not indicate the
soon as possible. “ON” position and turns off approxi- existence of a problem. The light
mately 2 seconds after the engine has should turn off as soon as the engine
started. has warmed up.
NOTE . The warning light illuminates right . The indicator light illuminates when
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle after the engine is started but turns off the engine has developed a problem
Dynamics Control system itself mal- immediately, remaining off. and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
functions, the warning light only illumi- . The warning light illuminates after malfunction indicator light is on.
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock the engine has started and turns off
Brake System) remains fully opera- The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
while the vehicle is subsequently being
tional. probably malfunctioning under the follow-
driven.
. The warning light illuminates when ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
. The warning light illuminates during
the electronic control system of the at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
driving, but it turns off immediately and
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system remains off. . The light does not turn off even after
malfunctions. . The warning light illuminates when the lapse of several minutes (the engine
the engine has stalled and continues to has warmed up) after the engine has
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
illuminate after the engine has been started.
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle restarted. However, it will turn off once
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- the vehicle starts moving.
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate

Black plate (141,1)

! Immobilizer system
& Vehicle Dynamics light does not flash if its fuse is blown),
Control OFF indicator The security indicator light starts blinking the immobilizer system will function
in the following conditions. normally.
light
. approximately 60 seconds after the
The light illuminates when the Vehicle ignition switch is turned from the “ON” & Select lever/gear position in-
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position
dicator (CVT models) 3
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con- . immediately after the ignition key is
trol system. pulled out
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is If the indicator light does not blink in the
probably malfunctioning under any of the above conditions, it may indicate that
following conditions. Have your vehicle immobilizer system may be malfunction-
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
ately. immediately.
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” In the event that an unauthorized key (for
position. example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used, the security indicator light illumi-
. The light does not turn off even once
nates. For details about the immobilizer
several seconds have elapsed after the
system, refer to “Immobilizer” F2-2.
ignition switch has been turned to the
“ON” position. NOTE 1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
. The security indicator light remains
& Security indicator light off in the following conditions. This is This indicator shows the position of the
This indicator light shows the status of the normal and does not indicate a mal- select lever.
alarm system. It also indicates operation function.
For models with manual mode, when the
of the immobilizer system. – while the engine is running
manual mode is selected, the gear posi-
! Alarm system – for approximately 60 seconds tion indicator (which shows the current
after the ignition switch is turned gear selection) and the upshift/downshift
It blinks to show the driver the operational from the “ON” position to the
status of the alarm system. For detailed indicator light up. Refer to “Continuously
“ACC” or “LOCK” position variable transmission” F7-18.
information, refer to “Alarm system” F2- . Even if the security indicator light
12. flashes irregularly or its fuse blows (the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (142,1)
& Turn signal indicator speed and have your vehicle in- & Headlight indicator
lights spected at a SUBARU dealer as light (if equipped)
soon as possible.
These lights show the operation of the turn This indicator light illuminates under the
signal or lane change signal. following conditions.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink & Cruise control set in- . when the light switch is turned to the
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned dicator light (if “ ” or “ ” position
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. equipped) . when the light control switch is in the
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-37. “AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
This light illuminates when vehicle speed nate automatically
& High beam indicator has been set to use the cruise control
light function. Refer to “To set cruise control”
F7-37.
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode. & Automatic headlight
This indicator light also illuminates when beam leveler warning
the headlight flasher is operated. light (models with HID
headlights)
& Cruise control indica-
tor light (if equipped) This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
This light illuminates when the cruise normally.
control main button is pressed to activate If this light illuminates while driving or does
the cruise control function. For details, not turn off approximately 3 seconds after
refer to “To set cruise control” F7-37. turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, have your vehicle inspected at
CAUTION
your SUBARU dealer.
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illumi- & Front fog light indicator
nates, the cruise control indicator light (if equipped)
light flashes at the same time. At This indicator light illuminates while the
this time, avoid driving at high front fog lights are illuminated.

Black plate (143,1)
Information display (if & Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi-
equipped) tor cation
1) U.S.-spec. models 1) U.S.-spec. models

1) Outside temperature indicator 2) Except U.S.-spec. models 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
2) Driving information display
3) Clock The outside temperature indicator shows When the outside temperature drops to
the outside temperature in a range from 378F (38C) or lower, the temperature
With the ignition switch in the “ACC” −40 to 1228F (−40 to 508C). indication flashes to show that the road
position, the clock appears on the display. surface may be frozen.
The indicator can give a false reading If the outside temperature drops to 378F
With the ignition switch in the “ON” under any of the following conditions.
position, the outside temperature indica- (38C) or lower while the display is giving
. When there is too much sun. an indication other than the outside
tor, driving information display and clock
. During idling; while running at low temperature, the display switches to the
all appear on the display.
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine outside temperature indication and flashes
is restarted immediately following a shut- for 5 seconds before returning to its
down. original indication.
. When the actual outside temperature If the display is already indicating an
falls outside the specified indicator range. outside temperature of 378F (38C) or lower
when the ignition switch is turned to the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (144,1)
“ON” position, the indication does not sequence. The driving range indicates the distance
flash. that can be driven taking into account the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
NOTE the average rate of fuel consumption.
The outside temperature indication When the low fuel warning light illumi-
may differ from the actual outside nates, the driving range display flashes for
temperature. The road surface freeze 5 seconds. (The display first switches to
warning indication should be treated the driving range value if a different value
only as a guide. Be sure to check the was previously displayed.)
condition of the road surface before
driving.
& Driving information display
! Driving range on remaining fuel
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
If the driving range is shown as “ ”,
there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the
1) Information display selection knob tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-
With the ignition switch in the “ON” ately.
position, each successive press of the NOTE
information display selection knob
1) U.S.-spec. models The driving range on remaining fuel is
switches the display in the following 2) Except U.S.-spec. models only a guide. The indicated value may

Black plate (145,1)
differ from the actual driving range on corresponding to that trip meter dis-
remaining fuel, so you must immedi- play is not shown until the vehicle has
ately fill the tank when the low fuel subsequently covered a distance of 1
warning light illuminates. mile (or 1 km).
! Average fuel consumption ! Current fuel consumption 3
1) Trip knob
Pressing the trip knob toggles the display
between the average fuel consumption
corresponding to the A trip meter display
and the average fuel consumption corre-
1) U.S.-spec. models
sponding to the B trip meter display. 1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models When either of the trip meter displays is 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
reset, the corresponding average fuel This indication shows the rate of fuel
This display shows the average rate of consumption value is also reset.
fuel consumption since the trip meter was consumption at the present moment.
last reset. NOTE
. The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
actual values and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
. When either trip meter display is
reset, the average fuel consumption
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (146,1)
! Journey time display is giving a reading other than the

journey time, the display switches to the
journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and
returns to its original reading each time a
complete hour has elapsed.
NOTE
The journey time is reset when the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
position. It is also reset if the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK” or
“ACC” position prior to restarting of
the engine.
1) Trip knob
! Average vehicle speed
The journey time shows the time that has Pressing the trip knob toggles the display
elapsed since the ignition switch was between the average vehicle speed cor-
turned to the “ON” position. responding to the A trip meter display and
the average vehicle speed corresponding
to the B trip meter display.
When either of the trip meter displays is
reset, the corresponding average vehicle
speed value is also reset.
NOTE
When either trip meter display is reset,
the average vehicle speed correspond-
ing to that trip meter display is not
1) U.S.-spec. models shown until the vehicle has subse-
2) Except U.S.-spec. models quently covered a distance of 1 mile
(or 1 km).
The journey time indication flashes each This display shows the average vehicle
time a complete hour has elapsed. If the speed since the trip meter was last reset.

Black plate (147,1)
! Turn off display of driving informa- & Clock 3. While the clock display is flashing,
tion display press and hold the “+” button for approxi-
The driving information display can be mately 2 seconds. The clock format will
turned off. then change.
To turn off the display, turn the ignition 4. The clock display will continue to flash
switch to the “LOCK” position and press for approximately 3 seconds to inform you 3
the “+” button adjacent to the clock display that the clock display has been changed.
for approximately 5 seconds. Then, the If you want to change the clock display
driving information display and the clock again, press and hold the “+” button for
display will blink for 3 seconds to notify approximately 2 seconds while the clock
you that the driving information display display is flashing.
has been turned off.
To restore the driving information display,
once again press the “+” button for
approximately 5 seconds. To adjust the time shown by the clock,
press the “+” button or “−” button. If you
NOTE press the “+” button, the indicated time will
. The initial display setting of the change in one-minute increments. If you
driving information display has been press the “−” button, the indicated time will
set to operational at the time of ship- change in one-minute decrements. If you
ment from the factory. keep the button pressed, the rate at which
. The average fuel consumption and the indicated time changes will speed up.
average vehicle speed are calculated
even while the driving information dis- The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour
play is not displayed. clock displays. Perform the following
. Even if you turn off the driving procedure to switch the display format.
information display, the display will 1. Place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”
automatically turn on when the battery position.
voltage is disconnected and then re- 2. Press and hold the “−” button that is
connected for battery replacement or located near the clock display for approxi-
fuse replacement. mately 5 seconds. The clock display will
then start to flash.

Black plate (148,1)
malfunction is detected. In addition, sev- to “Top display setting” F3-43.)

Multi function display 4) Clock
eral settings for the displayed content can
(Non-US vehicles only; be performed. 5) Driving information display (For the dis-
if equipped) played contents, refer to “Basic screens”
F3-31.)
WARNING
. Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
multi function display while the
vehicle is in motion. When opera-
tion of the multi-function display
is disturbing your awareness and
ability to concentrate on driving,
stop the vehicle before perform-
ing operations on the screen.
Also, do not concentrate on the
display while driving. Doing so Control switch
may cause you to look away from 1) Up (select)
the road and could result in an 2) Set (enter)
accident. 3) Down (select)
. Adjust the beep volume so that
you can hear noises in the en-
vironment outside while driving.
& Basic operation
If you drive the vehicle without By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
hearing noises in the environ- switch, the screens and selection items
ment outside, an accident may can be switched. When the “ /SET”
occur. switch is pulled toward you, the item can
Multi function display be selected and set.
Various information will be shown on the 1) Outside temperature indicator If there are some useful messages, such
multi function display. Also, a warning 2) Information reminder as reminder information, vehicle informa-
message will appear on the display if a 3) Top display (For the display setting, refer tion, warning information, etc., they will

Black plate (149,1)
interrupt the current screen, and appear & Ending screen

on the display accompanied by a beep. If
such a screen is displayed, take proper
action according to the message shown
on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the
3
original screen after a few seconds. If
the warning screen can be displayed
again, an information reminder “ ” will
appear on the upper left part of the
display. To recall the message marked
with “ ” on the display, pull the “ /SET”
switch on the steering wheel toward you.
NOTE
& Opening screen . The opening screen will disappear When the ignition switch is turned to the
When the door is unlocked and the
when the ignition switch is turned to “LOCK” position, the “Goodbye” screen
the “ON” position while the opening will appear for approximately 3 seconds.
driver’s door is opened, the opening
screen is displayed.
screen will appear for approximately 20
seconds.
. If any of the doors (including the & Self-check screen
rear gate) is opened while the opening When the ignition switch is turned to the
screen is displayed, the door ajar “ON” position, the vehicle self-check is
warning will appear. performed. The screens corresponding to
. The opening screen can be set to on the following items will appear one after
or off. For details, refer to “Bypass another for approximately 2 seconds
screen setting” F3-49. each.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (150,1)
1) Windshield washer fluid Example of notification

2) Brake fluid If there is a warning message or a
3) Engine oil maintenance notification, it will appear for
4) Oil filter approximately 3 seconds. Take the appro-
5) Tire
priate actions based on the messages
6) Inspection and maintenance
indicated.
If there is no warning message, the self-
check is complete without notification. NOTE
The self-check screen can be set to on
or off. For details, refer to “On/Off
setting” F3-52.

Black plate (151,1)
& Basic screens

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the steering wheel, you can switch the screen that is always displayed. Also, when the “ /SET”
switch is pulled and held, the selection screen can be displayed.
Fuel consumption screen
3
Displays the following information
. a value for the average fuel consumption corresponding to the driving
distance of each trip meter
. a bar indicator showing the current fuel consumption
. a value for the driving range based on remaining fuel
The displayed location can be customized. For details, refer to “Fuel
consumption screen setting” F-44.
ECO gauge screen
Displays the fuel economy level for the current driving conditions using the
motion of a gauge pointer.
If the gauge pointer moves toward the green side, this indicates better fuel
efficiency.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (152,1)
ECO history screen
Displays average and current fuel consumption histories.

The time range of the history can be customized from 30 minutes
(minimum) to 120 minutes (maximum). For details, refer to “Economy
history setting” F-45.
Vehicle activation status screen
Displays the following vehicle information.

. steering angle and driving wheel status
. activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
. activation status of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
Triple meter screen

Displays three optional pieces of information that can be selected from the
following items.
. Average vehicle speed
. Lifetime fuel consumption
. Engine oil temperature
. Accelerator opening ratio
. Block time
. Block distance
. Block fuel consumption
For details, refer to “Triple meter setting” F-47.

Black plate (153,1)
Guidance screen
When the “ /SET” switch is pulled and held, the selection screen can be
displayed.
The displayed contents can be set or customized from the selection 3
screen. For details, refer to “Selection screen” F-34.
Clock screen
In addition to the clock, the outside temperature and average fuel

consumption are also displayed. You can select between analog and
digital formats. For details, refer to “Clock screen setting” F-48.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (154,1)
& Selection screen

Select an item by operating the “ ” or “ ” switch. When the “ /SET” switch is pulled and held, the setting screen for each menu can
be displayed.
Top menu Menu option Description Page

Date Date Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 3-36
Birthday Set a birthday. 3-37
Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 3-38
Return Return to the top menu. —
Display Brightness Adjust the brightness. +5 ↔ −5 3-40
Contrast Adjust the contrast. +5 ↔ −5 3-41
Screen Off Turn the screen on or off. On or Off 3-41
Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 3-42
Screen Setting Set and customize the top display informa- Avg Cons, Inst Cons, Range
Top Display tion contents. or Off 3-43
Cons Customize the fuel consumption information display. 3-44
Eco History Set and customize the time of logging fuel 30 min, 60 min or 120 min 3-45
consumption history.
Triple Meter Set and customize the triple meter. 3-47
Clock Select the clock format. Analog, Digital or Off 3-48
Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 3-49
Languages Select the display language. English or French 3-50

Black plate (155,1)
Top menu Menu option Description Page

Maintenance Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 3-51
Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-52
Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-52 3
Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-52
Turn on or off the self-check screen that is
On/Off activated when the ignition switch is turned On or Off 3-52
to the “ON” position.
Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 3-53
Driving History Set Register and overwrite the driving record. 3-54
Car Setting Hazard Warning Flasher Set the hazard warning flasher. On or Off 3-56
Defogger Set and customize the operation of the 15 minutes or Continuous 3-57
defogger.
Interior Light Set and customize the interior light off delay 10, 20, 30 seconds or Off 3-58
timer.
Auto Light Sensor Set and customize the sensitivity of the auto Low, Mid, High or Max
(models with auto on/off headlight sensor. 3-59
lights)
Return Return to top menu. —
Initialize Reset to Defaults Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 3-61
Lifetime Fuel Consumption Reset Clear logged lifetime fuel consumption data. Yes or No 3-62
Return — Return to the top menu. —
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (156,1)
& Date and time settings operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the
The items in the date and time settings “Date” item. Then, pull the “ /SET” switch
can be set. To change the items, operate toward you.
the “ ” or “ ” switch.
! Current date and time setting
NOTE 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
. The “Date” item must be set to ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
display the “Birthday”, “Anniversary” 36.
and notifications for vehicle mainte-
nance.
. The “Birthday” and “Anniversary”
items can be entered after the “Date”
item has been set.
3. Select the item to set by operating the
! Preparation for date setting “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ /
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” SET” switch toward you.
position and pull the “ /SET” switch
toward you for more than 2 seconds.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to

select the “Date” item, and then pull the
“ /SET” switch toward you.
4. Select a number by operating the “ ”

or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET”
2. After the selection screen is displayed, switch toward you.

Black plate (157,1)
seconds.
! Birthday setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
36. 3
5. After entering the date and time, select 3. Select the item to set by operating the
“Set” by operating the “ ” switch and “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ /
confirm the setting by pulling the “ /SET” SET” switch toward you.
switch toward you.

select the “Birthday” item, and then pull
the “ /SET” switch toward you.
4. Select numbers by operating the “ ”

6. The system will notify you that the or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET”
setting is complete for approximately 3 switch toward you.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (158,1)
seconds.
If a birthday is approaching, the following

screen will be displayed accompanied by
a beep when the ignition switch has been
turned to the “ON” position.
5. After entering the date by repeating On a birthday

step 4, select “Set” by operating the “ ” NOTE
switch and confirm the setting by pulling If “_ _” is selected for either the
the “ /SET” switch toward you. “Month” or “Day” item instead of
numbers, the birthday notification is
deactivated.
From 1 to 7 days prior to the birthday
! Anniversary setting
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
36.
6. The system will notify you that the

setting is complete for approximately 3

Black plate (159,1)
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select numbers by operating the “ ”

select the “Anniversary” item, and then or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET” 6. The system will notify you that the
pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. switch toward you. setting is complete for approximately 3
seconds.
If an anniversary is approaching, the

following screen will be displayed accom-
panied by a beep when the ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” position.
3. Select the item to set by operating the 5. After entering the date by repeating
“ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ / step 4, select “Set” by operating the “ ”
SET” switch toward you. switch and confirm the setting by pulling
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (160,1)
NOTE
If “_ _” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of
numbers, the anniversary notification
is deactivated.
! Clearing birthday or anniversary
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-36
and display “Birthday” or “Anniversary” on
the screen.
2. When “_ _” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of numbers,
From 1 to 7 days prior to the anniversary
the setting of “Birthday” or “Anniversary” is 2. After the selection screen is displayed,
cleared. operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the
“Display” item. Then, pull the “ /SET”
& Image quality and volume switch toward you.
settings
! Brightness setting
The items in the image quality and volume
settings can be set. To change the items, 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
operate the “ ” or “ ” switch. ing to “Preparation for image quality and
volume settings” F3-40.
! Preparation for image quality and
volume settings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
On an anniversary

Black plate (161,1)
toward you.
! Contrast setting
ing to “Preparation for image quality and
volume settings” F3-40. 3
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 3. Select a contrast level by operating the

select the “Brightness” item, and then pull “ ” or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting
the “ /SET” switch toward you. by pulling the “ /SET” switch toward you.
! Screen OFF setting

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to ing to “Preparation for image quality and
select the “Contrast” item, and then pull volume settings” F3-40.
3. Select a brightness level by operating

the “ ” or “ ” switch, and confirm the
setting by pulling the “ /SET” switch
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (162,1)
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. The screen is turned off. 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Screen OFF” item, and then select the “Volume” item, and then pull the
pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. Restoring the screen “ /SET” switch toward you.
When the “ ”, “ ” or “ /SET” switch is
pulled toward you after the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position, the screen
will be restored. The screen is restored
with the basic screen that was displayed
when the screen was turned off. While the
screen is off, a warning message will be
displayed if necessary, but other screens
are not displayed.
! Beep volume setting
ing to “Preparation for image quality and
3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more volume settings” F3-40. 3. Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
toward you.

Black plate (163,1)
4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or 6. The system will notify you that the 2. After the selection screen is displayed,
“ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET” setting is complete for approximately 3 operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the
switch toward you. seconds. “Screen Setting” item. Then, pull the “ /
SET” switch toward you.
& Screen settings
! Top display setting
The items in the screen settings can be
set. To change the items, operate the “ ” 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET” ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
switch toward you. F3-43.
! Preparation for screen settings
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

switch, and confirm the setting by pulling
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (164,1)
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Top Display” item, and then pull “ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET” setting is complete for approximately 3
the “ /SET” switch toward you. switch toward you. seconds.
! Fuel consumption screen setting

ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-43.
3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

Black plate (165,1)
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select the displayed configuration by 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “Cons” item, and then pull the operating the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then setting is complete for approximately 3
“ /SET” switch toward you. pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. seconds.
! Economy history setting

F3-43.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (166,1)
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select the time of the logged fuel 6. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
select the “Eco History” item, and then pull consumption history by operating the switch and confirm the setting by pulling
the “ /SET” switch toward you. “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ / the “ /SET” switch toward you.
3. Pull the “ /SET” switch once more. 7. The system will notify you that the
5. Select “Return” by operating the “ ” setting is complete for approximately 3
switch. seconds.

Black plate (167,1)

! Triple meter setting
F3-43.
3. Select the setting location (left, center 4. Select the preferred item by operating
or right) by operating the “ ” or “ ” the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull the
switch, and then pull the “ /SET” switch “ /SET” switch toward you.
toward you. If you also want to change the setting for
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.
select the “Triple Meter” item, and then NOTE
pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. The same item cannot be selected for
the left, center or right location.

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (168,1)

2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select a clock style by operating the

select the “Clock” item, and then pull the “ ” switches and then pull the “ /SET”
6. The system will notify you that the “ /SET” switch toward you. switch toward you.
seconds.
! Clock screen setting

F3-43.

Black plate (169,1)
6. The system will notify you that the 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
setting is complete for approximately 3 select the “Bypass Screen” item, and then “ ” or “ ” switch, and pull the “ /SET”
seconds. pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. switch toward you.
If you want to change setting for another
! Bypass screen setting item, repeat steps 3 and 4.
F3-43.
3. Select the item to set by operating the

“ ” or “ ” switches, and then pull the “ /
SET” switch toward you. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (170,1)
“ ” switch, and confirm the setting by

pulling the “ /SET” switch toward you.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select the preferred language by

select the “Languages” item, and then pull operating the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then
6. The system will notify you that the the “ /SET” switch toward you. pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
seconds.
! Language setting
F3-43.
3. The current language setting is dis- 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

played. Pull the “ /SET” switch toward switch, and confirm the setting by pulling
you to enter the language selection mode. the “ /SET” switch toward you.

Black plate (171,1)
6. The system will notify you that the 2. After the selection screen is displayed, 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
setting is complete for approximately 3 operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the select the “Engine Oil” item, and then pull
seconds. “Maintenance” item. Then, pull the “ / the “ /SET” switch toward you.
& Maintenance settings
! Engine oil setting
The items in the maintenance settings can
be set. To change the items, operate the 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
“ ” or “ ” switch toward you. ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-51.
! Preparation for maintenance set-
tings
position, and then pull the “ /SET” switch
3. Select the setting location (month, day,

year or distance) by operating the “ ” or
“ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET”
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (172,1)
switch toward you. 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or . When the distance announcement
“ ” switch and confirm the setting by reaches 0 km, the display will show
pulling the “ /SET” switch toward you. “0000” for the next 500 km. After
exceeding 500 km, “_ _ _ _” will be
displayed.
! Oil filter setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-51, but select the
“Oil Filter” item in step 2.
! Tires setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-51, but select the
“Tires” item in step 2.
4. Select a number by operating the “ ”
or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET” ! Maintenance schedule setting
switch toward you. 6. The system will notify you that the The setting procedure is the same as
If you also want to change the setting for setting is complete for approximately 3 “Engine oil setting” F3-51, but select the
another location, repeat steps 3 and 4. seconds. “Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.
! On/Off setting
NOTE 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
. The notification is displayed with ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
information of both date and distance tings” F3-51.
or either date or distance in accor-
dance with the setting
. When “_ _” is selected for either the
“Month”, “Day”, “Year” or “Distance”
item instead of numbers, the set noti-
fication is deactivated.
. If the notification continues for 15
days or more, the system displays “_
_” on the screen.

Black plate (173,1)
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the 6. The system will notify you that the
select the “On/Off” item, and then pull the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ / setting is complete for approximately 3
“ /SET” switch toward you. SET” switch toward you. seconds.
! Clear setting
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-51.
3. The current setting is displayed. Pull 5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”

the “ /SET” switch toward you to enter switch, and confirm the setting by pulling
the selection mode. the “ /SET” switch toward you.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (174,1)
& Driving history registration

The items in the driving history can be
registered. To change the items, operate
the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull the
“ /SET” switch toward you.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Confirm the setting by pulling the “ /

select the “Clear All Settings” item, and SET” switch toward you.
then pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
2. After the selection screen is displayed,

operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the
“Driving History” item. Then, pull the “ /

3. The system displays “No” first. To clear setting is complete for approximately 3
all maintenance settings, select “Yes” by seconds.
operating the “ ” switch.

Black plate (175,1)
registered directly without a notification.
3. Pull the “ /SET” switch toward you 5. Select one of the registration lines by
once more to enter the setting mode. operating the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then 7. The system will notify you that the
pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. registration is complete for approximately
2 seconds.
NOTE
The driving history can be registered
for the trip meter A or B.
& Car settings

The items in the car settings can be set.
To change the items, operate the “ ” or
“ ” switch, and then pull the “ /SET”
switch toward you.
4. The system will notify you of the place ! Preparation for car settings
to be selected for approximately 2 sec- 6. To overwrite the previous registration, 1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
onds. pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. When position, and then pull the “ /SET” switch
registration is performed the first time, it is
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (176,1)
toward you for more than 2 seconds. the selection mode.

2. After the selection screen is displayed, select the “Hazard Warning Flasher” item, 4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the and then pull the “ /SET” switch toward “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull the “ /
“Car Setting” item. Then, pull the “ /SET” you. SET” switch toward you.
switch toward you.
! Hazard warning flasher setting

ing to “Preparation for car settings” F3-55.


Black plate (177,1)
the “ /SET” switch toward you. the “ /SET” switch toward you.
! Defogger setting
6. The system will notify you that the 3. The current setting is displayed. Pull
setting is complete for approximately 3 the “ /SET” switch toward you to enter
seconds. the selection mode.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed for approxi-
mately 3 seconds. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.

4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
select the “Defogger” item, and then pull
ing the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (178,1)
the “ /SET” switch toward you. seconds.


5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” select the “Interior Light” item, and then
switch, and confirm the setting by pulling pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
! Interior light off delay timer setting

3. The current setting is displayed. Pull

6. The system will notify you that the the “ /SET” switch toward you to enter
setting is complete for approximately 3 the selection mode.

Black plate (179,1)
4. Select the preferred setting by operat- 6. The system will notify you that the ! Auto light sensor sensitivity setting
ing the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull setting is complete for approximately 3
the “ /SET” switch toward you. seconds. 1. Perform the preparation steps accord-

switch, and confirm the setting by pulling 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
the “ /SET” switch toward you. select the “Auto Light Sensor” item, and
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (180,1)
then pull the “ /SET” switch toward you. the “ /SET” switch toward you. seconds.

the selection mode. the “ /SET” switch toward you.
& Initialize
Items that have been set to your pre-
ference can be initialized. To select an
initialization menu, operate the “ ” or “ ”
switch as follows.
! Preparation for initialization
4. Select the preferred setting by operat- 6. The system will notify you that the
ing the “ ” or “ ” switch, and then pull setting is complete for approximately 3

Black plate (181,1)
2. After the selection screen is displayed, 2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to 4. Confirm the setting by pulling the “ /
operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to show the select the “Reset to Defaults” item, and SET” switch toward you.
“Initialize” item. Then, pull the “ /SET” then pull the “ /SET” switch toward you.
switch toward you.
! Reset to factory default settings

ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-
60.

3. The system displays “No” first. To setting is complete for approximately 3
return to the factory default settings, select seconds.
“Yes” by operating the “ ” switch.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (182,1)
! Lifetime fuel consumption resetting

ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-
60.
3. The system displays “No” first. To 5. Reconfirmation will be displayed. If

reset the lifetime fuel consumption, select you are sure you want to proceed, select
“Yes” by operating the “ ” switch. “Yes” by operating the “ ” switch.

select the “Lifetime Fuel Consumption
Resetting” item, and then pull the “ /
4. Confirm the setting by pulling the “ / 6. Confirm the setting again by pulling
SET” switch toward you. the “ /SET” switch toward you.

Black plate (183,1)
Light control switch & Headlights
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period 3
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the “ ” (off) position.
If the vehicle is left unattended
7. The system will notify you that the for a long time with the light
setting is complete for approximately 3 control switch set to a position To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
seconds. other than “ ” (off) position, the the end of the turn signal lever.
battery may be discharged.
“ ” position
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
NOTE parking lights, front side marker lights, rear
. Even if the key is removed from the side marker lights, tail lights and license
ignition switch, the lights can be illu- plate lights are on.
minated by operating the light control
switch from the “ ” (off) position to the “ ” position
“ ” or “ ” position. Instrument panel illumination, parking
. If the driver’s door is opened while lights, front side marker lights, rear side
the lights are illuminated and the key is marker lights, tail lights and license plate
removed from the ignition switch, the lights are on.
chirp sound informs the driver that the
lights are illuminated.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (184,1)
“ ” position: auto on/off headlights (if ! Sensor for the auto on/off head- & High/low beam change
equipped) lights (if equipped) (dimmer)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are automatically
on or off depending on the level of the
ambient light.
“ ” position
The headlights are all off.
NOTE
The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
lights can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer The sensor is on the instrument panel as To change from low beam to high beam,
for details. Also, for models with a multi shown in the illustration. push the turn signal lever forward. When
function display, the setting can be the headlights are on high beam, the high
changed using the display. For details, CAUTION beam indicator light “ ” on the combina-
refer to “Multi function display (Non-US If any object is placed on or near the
tion meter is also on.
vehicles only; if equipped)” F3-28. sensor, the sensor may not detect To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
the level of the ambient light cor- back to the center position.
rectly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.

Black plate (185,1)
& Headlight flasher & Daytime running light system level, the high beam headlights that
have illuminated at reduced brightness
WARNING turn off, and the low beam headlights
turn on alternatively. At this time, the
The brightness of the illumination of instrument panel illumination, front
the high beam headlights is reduced side marker lights, tail lights and 3
by the daytime running light system. license plate lights are also illuminated.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
The high beam headlights will automati-

cally illuminate at reduced brightness
when the following conditions are fulfilled.
. The engine is running.
CAUTION . The parking brake is fully released.
. The light control switch is in the
Do not hold the lever in the flashing ”AUTO” (if equipped), “ ” or off position.
position for more than just a few . For CVT models, the select lever is in a
seconds. position other than the “P” position.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever NOTE
toward you and then release it. The high . When the light switch is in the “ ”
beam will stay on for as long as you hold position, the instrument panel illumina-
the lever. The headlight flasher works tion, front side marker lights, tail lights
even though the lighting switch is in the and license plate lights are also illumi-
“ ” (off) position. nated.
When the headlights are on high beam, . For models with the auto on/off
the high beam indicator light “ ” on the headlights, while the light control
combination meter also illuminates. switch is in the “AUTO” position and
the system is activated to the auto-on
mode depending on the ambient light

Black plate (186,1)
Turn signal lever Illumination brightness con- To darken, turn the control dial downward.
trol NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-
celed even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position.
To activate the right turn signal, push the

turn signal lever up. To activate the left The illumination brightness of the instru-
turn signal, push the turn signal lever ment panel dims under the following
down. When the turn is finished, the lever conditions.
will return automatically. If the lever does . when the light switch is in the “ ” or
not return after cornering, return the lever “ ” position
to the neutral position by hand.
. when the light control switch is in the
To signal a lane change, push the turn “AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it nate automatically (models with auto on/
during the lane change. The turn signal off headlights: Refer to “Headlights” F3-
indicator lights will flash in the direction of 63.)
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position You can also adjust the illumination bright-
when you release it. ness for better visibility in the following
ways.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.

Black plate (187,1)
Headlight beam leveler (if Fog light switch (if equipped)

equipped)
& Automatic headlight beam
leveler (models with HID 3
headlights)
The HID headlights generate more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience too much glare if your
headlight beam height adjustment is high
when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load.
The automatic headlight beam leveler The indicator light on the combination
adjusts the headlight beam height auto- meter will illuminate when the front fog
matically and optimally according to the 1) Headlight switch lights are illuminated.
load being carried by the vehicle. 2) Fog light switch
The front fog lights will turn on when the
fog light switch is placed in the “ ”
position while the headlights are in the
following condition.
. while the headlight switch is in the “ ”
position
. for models with the auto on/off head-
lights, while the headlight switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights turn
on automatically
To turn off the front fog lights, turn the
switch back down to the “ ” position.

Black plate (188,1)
Wiper and washer . In freezing weather, be sure that Refer to “Windshield washer
the wiper blades are not frozen to fluid” F11-28.
the windshield or rear window Also, when driving the vehicle
WARNING before switching on the wipers. when there are freezing tempera-
Attempting to operate the wiper tures, use non-freezing type wi-
In freezing weather, do not use the with the blades frozen to the per blades.
windshield washer until the wind- window glass could cause not
shield is sufficiently warmed by the only the wiper blades to be . Do not clean the wiper blades
defroster. damaged but also the wiper mo- with gasoline or a solvent, such
tor to burn out. If the wiper as paint thinner or benzine. This
Otherwise the washer fluid can
blades are frozen to the window will cause deterioration of the
freeze on the windshield, blocking
glass, be sure to operate the wiper blades.
your view.
defroster, windshield wiper dei-
cer (if equipped) or rear window NOTE
CAUTION defogger before turning on the
. The wiper operates only when the
wiper.
. Do not operate the washer con- ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
tinuously for more than 10 sec- . If the wipers stop during opera- position.
onds, or when the washer fluid tion because of ice or some other . The front wiper motor is protected
tank is empty. This may cause obstruction on the window, the against overloads by a circuit breaker.
overheating of the washer motor. wiper motor could burn out even If the motor operates continuously
Check the washer fluid level if the wiper switch is turned off. If under an unusually heavy load, the
frequently, such as at fuel stops. this occurs, promptly stop the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the motor temporarily. If this happens, park
. Do not operate the wipers when ignition switch to the “LOCK” your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
the windshield or rear window is position and clean the window wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
dry. This may scratch the glass, glass to allow proper wiper op- mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
damage the wiper blades and eration. will reset itself, and the wipers will
cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wiper . Use clean water if windshield again operate normally.
washer fluid is unavailable. In . Clean your wiper blades and win-
on a dry windshield or rear
areas where water freezes in dow glass periodically with a washer
window, always use the wind-
winter, use SUBARU Windshield solution to prevent streaking, and to
shield washer.
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. remove accumulations of road salt or

Black plate (189,1)
road film. Operate the windshield & Windshield wiper and washer For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
washer for at least 1 second so that switches lever up. The wipers operate until you
washer solution will be sprinkled all release the lever.
over the windshield or rear window. The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position. ! Wiper intermittent time control
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the wiper ! Windshield wipers 3
blade results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
face of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water. When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
even after following this procedure, : Mist (for a single wipe)
ing interval of the wiper. The operating
replace the wiper blades with new interval can be adjusted in several steps
: Off from the shortest interval to the longest.
ones. For replacement instructions,
refer to “Replacement of wiper blades” : Intermittent
F11-30. : Low speed
: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper

control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “ ” position.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (190,1)
! Windshield washer NOTE & Rear window wiper and

washer switch – 5-door
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper

control lever toward you. The washer fluid The windshield washer fluid warning
sprays until you release the lever. The light illuminates when the washer fluid
wipers operate while you pull the lever. : Washer
eration)
(accompanied by wiper op-
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light illumi- : Continuous
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the : Intermittent
refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-
: Off
shield washer fluid” F11-28.
Washer (accompanied by wiper op-
: eration)
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob
switch to the “ ” position.
With the switch turned to the “ ” posi-

Black plate (191,1)
tion, the rear wiper will operate intermit- Mirrors & Auto-dimming mirror/com-
tently at intervals corresponding to the pass (if equipped)
vehicle speed. In this position, when you Always check that the inside and outside
move the select lever to the “R” position mirrors are properly adjusted before you
(CVT models) or the shift lever to the start driving.
reverse position (MT models), the rear 3
wiper will switch to continuous operation. & Inside mirror
When you move the select lever/shift lever
from the “R” (reverse) position to another
position, the rear wiper will return to
intermittent operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the “ ” position. The washer
fluid sprays until you release the knob. 1) LED
To wash the rear window when the rear 2) Switch
wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch 3) Sensor
4) Compass display
downward to the “ ” position. The washer
fluid sprays and the wiper operates until The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
you release the knob. The inside mirror has a day and night feature which automatically reduces glare
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the coming from headlights of vehicles behind
mirror toward you for the night position. you. It also contains a built-in compass.
Push it away for the day position. The . By pressing and holding the switch for
night position reduces glare from head- 3 seconds, the automatic dimming func-
lights. tion is toggled on or off. When the
automatic dimming function is on, the
LED indicator will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into reverse. This
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (192,1)
is to ensure good rearward visibility during glare from vehicle headlights behind you 3. Press the switch repeatedly until the
reversing. and automatically dim the mirror to elim- correct zone setting for your location is
. By pressing and releasing the switch inate glare and preserve your vision. For displayed.
for less than 3 seconds, the compass this reason, use care not to cover the 4. Releasing the button for 10 seconds
display is toggled on or off. When the sensors with stickers, or other similar will exit the zone setting mode.
compass is on, an illuminated compass items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean
reading will appear in the upper right using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an ! Compass calibration
corner of the mirror. applicator.
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
! Compass zone adjustment window, the compass needs to be cali-
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with brated.
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner 2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
directly on the mirror as that may cause km/h) or less until the display reads a
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror direction.
housing and damage the mirror. 3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
! Photosensors
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the switch for 9 seconds until a “C”
appears in the compass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
Compass calibration zones step 2 or step 3.
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration

zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the switch for 6
seconds until the zone selection comes
The mirror has a photosensor attached on up (a number will be displayed in the
the front and back sides. During nighttime mirror compass window).
driving, these sensors detect distracting

Black plate (193,1)
& Auto-dimming mirror/com- dimming function is on, the LED indicator ! Photosensors
pass with HomeLink® (if will illuminate.
equipped) Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward 3
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
nated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner The mirror has a photosensor attached on
directly on the mirror as that may cause both the front and back sides. During
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror nighttime driving, these sensors detect
1) HomeLink® button 1
2) HomeLink® button 2 housing and damage the mirror. distracting glare from vehicle headlights
3) LED behind you and automatically dim the
4) HomeLink® button 3 mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
5) Sensor your vision. For this reason, use care not
6) Automatic dimming on/off button to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
7) Compass display button similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
8) Compass display sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare cloth or an applicator.
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass
and HomeLink® wireless control system.
. By pressing the automatic dimming on/
off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (194,1)
! Compass zone adjustment ! Compass calibration www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali- Note the following information about this
brated. system.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8 If your vehicle is equipped with the
km/h) or less until the display reads a HomeLink® Wireless Control System, it
direction. complies with Part 15 of the Federal
3. You can also calibrate the compass by Communications Commission Rules in
driving your vehicle on your everyday the U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry
routine. The compass will be calibrated Canada in Canada. Its operation is subject
once it has tracked a complete circle. to the following two conditions:
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and (1) this device may not cause harmful
hold the compass display button for 9 interference, and (2) this device must
Compass calibration zones seconds until a “C” appears in the accept any interference received, includ-
compass window. ing interference that may cause undesired
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration 5. Calibrate the compass according to operation.
zones” map shown above to verify that step 2 or step 3.
the compass zone setting is correct for Changes and modifications to this system
your geographical location. by anyone other than an authorized
! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys- service facility could void authorization to
2. Press and hold the compass display tem
button for 3 seconds until the zone use this equipment.
The HomeLink® Wireless Control System
selection comes up (a number will be HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house are
can be used to activate remote control
displayed in the mirror compass window). registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
devices such as gate operators, garage
3. Press the compass display button door openers, door locks, home lighting trols, Inc.
repeatedly until the correct zone setting and security systems.
for your location is displayed. WARNING
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will There are three HomeLink® buttons on the
exit the zone setting mode. mirror, each of which can be programmed . When programming the
for operation of one desired device. For HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-
details on the device types which can be tem, you may be operating a
operated by this system, consult the garage door opener or other
HomeLink® website at: device. Make sure that people

Black plate (195,1)
and objects are out of the way of NOTE

the garage door or other device . After programming your HomeLink®
to prevent potential harm or Wireless Control System for the de-
damage. sired devices, retain the hand-held
. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire- transmitters for further programming
less Control System with a gar- or device testing in the event of a 3
age door opener that lacks the problem.
safety stop and reverse feature . It is recommended that you insert a
as required by applicable safety new battery in the hand-held transmit-
standards. A garage door opener ter of a device to ensure correct
which cannot detect an object, programming.
signaling the door to stop and
! Garage door opener programming in
reverse, does not meet these
the U.S.A. 1) HomeLink® button 1
safety standards. Using a garage
2) HomeLink® button 2
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious NOTE 3) HomeLink® button 3
injury or death. For more infor- When programming the HomeLink ® 2. Press and hold the two outer
mation, consult the HomeLink® Wireless Control System for a garage HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button
website at www.homelink.com or door opener, it is suggested that you 3) until the indicator light begins to flash
call 1-800-355-3515. park the vehicle outside the garage. (after approximately 20 seconds). Then
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door release both buttons.
opener from the outlet. 3. Hold the end of the garage door
CAUTION opener’s hand-held transmitter between
NOTE 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
When programming the HomeLink®
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
Wireless Control System to operate
already programmed for other devices, gram.
a garage door opener or an entrance
skip step 2 because it clears the 4. Simultaneously press and hold both
gate, unplug the device’s motor
memory of all three buttons. the hand-held transmitter button and the
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout. desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (196,1)
NOTE ! Programming rolling-code-protected tion manual.

Some gate operators and garage door garage door openers in the U.S.A.
openers may require you to replace If your garage door opener has a rolling
this programming step 4 with proce- code feature, program the HomeLink®
dures in “Programming for entrance Wireless Control System for it by following
gates and garage door openers in steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
Canada” F3-77. programming in the U.S.A.” F3-75. Then
5. Hold down both buttons until the continue with the following steps.
HomeLink® indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator NOTE
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be The assistance of a second person
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi- may make the programming quicker
cates successful programming of the new and easier.
frequency signal.)
1) Training button
6. Press and hold the programmed but-
ton and check the HomeLink® indicator 2. Press the training button on the
light. If the indicator light stays on con- garage door opener motor head unit
tinuously, your garage door should acti- (which activates the “training light” on the
vate and the programming is completed. unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
2 seconds and release the HomeLink®
seconds and then stays on continuously,
button that was programmed in the pre-
your garage door opener may be pro-
vious section. Press and release the
tected by a rolling code feature. In this
button a second time to complete the
case you need to perform the additional
programming procedure.
steps that are described in “Programming
rolling-code-protected garage door open-
ers in the U.S.A.” F3-76. 1. Locate the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-

Black plate (197,1)

NOTE 6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
Some garage door openers may re- and then rapidly after several seconds,
quire you to do the above press-hold- release both buttons.
release sequence a third time to com- 7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
plete the programming. garage door opener to the outlet.
4. The garage door opener should now 8. Test your entrance gate/garage door 3
recognize the HomeLink® Wireless Control opener by pressing the programmed
System and your garage door opener HomeLink® button.
should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pressed. ! Operating the HomeLink® Wireless
Control System
! Programming for entrance gates and Once programmed, the HomeLink® Wire-
garage door openers in Canada 1) HomeLink® button 1 less Control System can be used to
2) HomeLink® button 2 remote-control the devices to which its
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
3) HomeLink® button 3 buttons are programmed. To activate a
or garage door opener from the outlet.
device, simply press the appropriate but-
NOTE 2. Press and hold the two outer ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
HomeLink® buttons (button 1 and button ing that the signal is being transmitted.
If any of the HomeLink® buttons are
3) until the HomeLink® indicator light
already programmed for other devices,
begins to flash (after approximately 20 ! Programming other devices
skip step 2 because it clears the To program other devices such as door
seconds). Then release both buttons.
memory of all three buttons. locks, home lighting and security systems,
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit- contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 or call 1-800-355-3515.
mm) away from the HomeLink® button you ! Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
wish to program. button
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. 1. Press and hold the HomeLink® button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
the button until step 4 has been com-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
pleted.
until step 6 is complete.
2. When the HomeLink® indicator light
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (198,1)
begins to flash slowly (after approximately & Outside mirrors

20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches ! Convex mirror (passenger side)
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program. WARNING
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
Objects look smaller in a convex
mitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
mirror and farther away than when
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
4. When the indicator light begins to flash the convex mirror to judge the
rapidly, release both buttons. distance of vehicles behind you
The programming for the previous device when changing lanes. Use the inside
is now erased and the new device can be mirror (or glance backwards) to
operated by pressing the HomeLink® 1) HomeLink® button 1 determine the actual size and dis-
button. 2) HomeLink® button 2 tance of objects that you view in
3) HomeLink® button 3 convex mirror.
! Erasing HomeLink® button memory
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
NOTE (button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
. Performing this procedure erases light begins to flash (after approximately
the memory of all the preprogrammed 20 seconds).
buttons simultaneously. The memory 2. Release both buttons.
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the ! In case a problem occurs
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all If you cannot activate a device using the
programmed HomeLink® buttons be corresponding HomeLink® button after
erased for security purposes. programming, contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.

Black plate (199,1)
! Remote control mirror switch ! Power folding mirror switch (if mirror switch continuously, it may not
equipped) work. This is not a malfunction. Oper-
ate the switch again after waiting for a
short period of time.
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become 3
wobbly. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by switch operation. If the outside
mirrors are still wobbly, fold the mirrors
again and then unfold them by switch
operation.
: Select side to adjust

: Direction control The power folding mirror switch operates
The remote control mirrors operate only only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or or “ACC” position.
“ACC” position. To fold the outside mirrors, press the
1. Turn the control switch to the side that power folding mirror switch. To unfold the
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror, mirrors, press the switch again.
“R” is for the right mirror.
NOTE
2. Move the control switch in the direction
. When the temperature is low, the
you want to move the mirror.
outside mirrors may stop during switch
3. Return the control switch to the neutral operation. If that occurs, push the
position to prevent unintentional opera- switch again. When the outside mirrors
tion. do not work by switch operation, move
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu- them several times manually. This
ally. makes it possible to operate them by
switch operation.
. When you operate the power folding

Black plate (200,1)
Defogger and deicer window defogger. Some models are also

equipped with an outside mirror defogger
and/or windshield wiper deicer. The de-
fogger and deicer system is activated only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Climate control system type C and type D

To activate the defogger and deicer
system, press the control switch that is
located on the climate control panel. The
rear window defogger, outside mirror
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are
Climate control system type A and type B activated simultaneously. The indicator
light on the control switch illuminates while
the defogger and deicer system is acti-
vated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position.
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
The defogger and deicer system will
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped) automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and the
The vehicle is equipped with a rear outside mirrors have been cleared and the

Black plate (201,1)
windshield wiper blades have been deiced sives to clean the inner surface Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
completely before that time, press the of the rear window. They may
control switch to turn them off. If defrost- damage the conductors printed
ing, defogging or deicing is not complete, on the window. WARNING
you have to press the control switch to
turn them on again. . Do not adjust the steering wheel 3
NOTE tilt/telescopic position while driv-
For models with the automatic climate . Turn on the defogger and deicer ing. This may cause loss of
control system (type B, C and D), it is system if the wipers are frozen to the vehicle control and result in
possible to set the defogger and deicer windshield. personal injury.
system for the continuous operation mode . If the windshield is covered with
by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your . If the lever cannot be raised to
snow, remove the snow so that the the fixed position, adjust the
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for windshield wiper deicer works effec-
models with a multi function display, the steering wheel again. It is dan-
tively. gerous to drive without locking
setting can be changed using the display. . While the defogger and deicer sys-
For details, refer to “Multi function display the steering wheel. This may
tem is in the continuous operation cause loss of vehicle control
(Non-US vehicles only; if equipped)” F3- mode, if the vehicle speed remains at
28. and result in personal injury.
9 mph (15 km/h) or less for 15 minutes,
If the battery voltage drops below the the windshield wiper deicer automati-
permissible level, continuous operation of cally stops operating, though the rear
the defogger and deicer system is can- window defogger and outside mirror
celed and the system stops operating. defogger maintain continuous opera-
tion in this condition.
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system con-
tinuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (202,1)
Horn
1) Tilt adjustment
2) Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
“Front seats” F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.

Black plate (7,1)
Climate control
Ventilator control................................................. 4-2 Defrosting........................................................... 4-10

Center and side ventilators .................................. 4-2 Type A and B..................................................... 4-10
Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3 Type C............................................................... 4-10
Type A ................................................................ 4-3 Type D............................................................... 4-10
Type B ................................................................ 4-4 Operating tips for heater and air
Type C ................................................................ 4-5 conditioner ...................................................... 4-11
Type D ................................................................ 4-6 Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-11 4
Automatic climate control operation (type Efficient cooling after parking in direct
B, C and D) ....................................................... 4-7 sunlight ........................................................... 4-11
Type B ................................................................ 4-7 Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
Type C and D ...................................................... 4-7 circuit.............................................................. 4-11
Temperature sensors........................................... 4-8 Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-11
Manual climate control operation ...................... 4-8 Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
Airflow mode selection ........................................ 4-8 low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-11
Temperature control ............................................ 4-9 Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
Fan speed control .............................................. 4-10 is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-12
Air conditioner control ....................................... 4-10 Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12
Air inlet selection ............................................... 4-10 Air filtration system ........................................... 4-12
Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-12

Black plate (206,1)
4-2 Climate control
Ventilator control
& Center and side ventilators
Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Center ventilators To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
1) Open To open or close the ventilator, turn the
2) Close thumb-wheel up or down.

Black plate (207,1)
Climate control 4-3

1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
Climate control panel perature control” F4-9.)
2) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
& Type A conditioner control” F4-10.)
3) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-10.)
4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-10.)
5) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-8.) 4
6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-80.)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (208,1)
4-4 Climate control
& Type B 1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation (type B, C
and D)” F4-7 and/or “Temperature con-
trol” F4-9.)
conditioner control” F4-10.)
3) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Auto-
and D)” F4-7 and/or “Fan speed control”
F4-10.)
5) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
“Automatic climate control operation
(type B, C and D)” F4-7 and/or “Airflow
mode selection” F4-8.)
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.

Black plate (209,1)
Climate control 4-5
& Type C 1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” F4-8.)
2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-8.)
Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
5)
conditioner control” F4-10.) 4
7) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
trol” F4-9.)
8) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation (type B, C and D)”
F4-7.)
9) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control operation (type B, C and D)” F4-
7.)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (210,1)
4-6 Climate control
& Type D 1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

trol” F4-9.)
2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-8.)
4) DUAL mode button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control operation (type B, C and
D)” F4-7 and/or “Temperature control”
F4-9.)
conditioner control” F4-10.)
8) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-8.)
9) Temperature control dial (front passen-
ger’s side) (Refer to “Automatic climate
7 and/or “Temperature control” F4-9.)
10) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation (type B, C and D)”
F4-7.)
11) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
7.)

Black plate (211,1)
Climate control 4-7
Automatic climate control the AUTO mode is controlled automa- . If you operate any of the buttons on
tically. Any function not set to the the control panel other than the “OFF”
operation (type B, C and D) AUTO mode can be manually adjusted button, rear window defogger button
When this mode is selected, the fan as desired. and temperature control dial(s) during
speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control, . The controllable temperature range FULL AUTO mode operation, the
and air conditioner compressor operation may vary depending on the regional “FULL” indicator light on the control
are automatically controlled. To activate specifications of the vehicle. panel will turn off and the “AUTO”
this mode, perform the following. 3. To turn off the climate control system,
indicator light will remain illuminated. 4
You can then manually control the
turn the fan speed control dial to the “OFF”
NOTE position.
system as desired using the button
. Operate the automatic climate con- you operated. To change the system
back to the FULL AUTO mode, press
trol system when the engine is running. & Type C and D the “AUTO” button.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
setting the temperature much lower 1. Depress the “AUTO” button. The 3. To turn off the climate control system,
than the current outlet air temperature indicator light “FULL AUTO” on the display press the “OFF” button.
turns on the air conditioner compres- illuminates.
sor automatically and the “A/C” indi- 2. Set the preferred temperature using
cator light on the control panel illumi- the temperature control dial.
nates.
NOTE
& Type B . For type D, when the “DUAL” mode
button is pressed, separate tempera-
1. Turn the airflow mode selection dial ture settings for the driver’s side and
and fan speed control dial to the “AUTO” passenger’s side can be enabled
position. (DUAL mode). To cancel the DUAL
2. Set the preferred temperature using mode, press the “DUAL” mode button
the temperature control dial. again. The temperature setting for the
passenger’s side becomes the same as
NOTE the setting for the driver’s side.
. Each function can be individually . The controllable temperature range
set to the AUTO mode independently of may vary depending on the regional
the other functions. Any function set to specifications of the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (212,1)
4-8 Climate control
& Temperature sensors properly and become damaged, the sys- Manual climate control op-
tem may not be able to control the interior
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
eration
the sensors, observe the following pre- & Airflow mode selection
cautions.
– Do not subject the sensors to impact. To select the airflow mode:
– Keep water away from the sensors. Type A, B and C: Turn the airflow mode
selection dial.
– Do not cover the sensors.
Type D: Press the airflow mode selection
The sensors are located as follows. button.
– Solar sensor: beside the windshield To select the defrost mode:
defroster grille Type A and B: Turn the airflow mode
– Interior air temperature sensor: next to selection dial.
the steering column Type C and D: Press the defroster button.
– Outside temperature sensor: near the Airflow modes are as follows.
front bumper opening
1) Interior air temperature sensor

2) Solar sensor
The automatic climate control system (Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated

Black plate (213,1)
Climate control 4-9
both side windows to prevent fogging.) and both side outlets of the instrument
panel (Refer to “Defrosting” F4-10.)
& Temperature control

! Type A
Turn the temperature control dial over a
range from the blue side (cool) to red side 4
(warm) to regulate the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets.
! Type B, C and D
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred interior temperature. With the
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and
dial set to your preferred temperature, the
foot outlets (Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets, system automatically adjusts the tempera-
foot outlets and both side outlets of the ture of air supplied from the outlets so that
instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting” the preferred temperature is achieved and
F4-10.) maintained.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,
the system provides maximum cooling
performance. If the dial is turned fully
clockwise, the system provides maximum
heating performance.
NOTE
. For type D, when the “DUAL” mode
button is pressed, separate tempera-
ture settings for the driver’s side and
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of passenger’s side can be enabled
the instrument panel and some through (DUAL mode). To cancel the DUAL
windshield defroster outlets (A small mode, press the “DUAL” mode button
amount of air flows to the windshield and (Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets again. The temperature setting for the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (214,1)
4-10 Climate control
passenger’s side becomes the same as & Air inlet selection Defrosting
the setting for the driver’s side. Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
. The controllable temperature range selection button. & Type A and B
may vary depending on the regional
Select the “ ” or “ ” mode by turning the
specifications of the vehicle. ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
airflow mode selection dial to defrost or
recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
dehumidify the windshield and front door
& Fan speed control air inlet selection button to the ON position
windows.
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
The fan operates only when the ignition when driving on a dusty road.
switch is in the “ON” position. Select the & Type C
preferred fan speed by turning the fan OFF position (outside air): Outside air is Select the “ ” mode by pressing the
speed control dial. drawn into the passenger compartment. defroster button, or select the “ ” mode
Push the air inlet selection button to the by turning the airflow mode selection dial
& Air conditioner control OFF position when the interior has cooled to defrost or dehumidify the windshield
to a comfortable temperature and the road and front door windows.
The air conditioner operates only when is no longer dusty.
the engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the WARNING
& Type D
fan is in operation to turn on the air Select the “ ” mode by pressing the
conditioner. When the air conditioner is Continued operation in the ON posi- defroster button, or select the “ ” mode
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates. tion may fog up the windows. Switch by pressing the airflow mode selection
To turn off the air conditioner, press the to the OFF position as soon as the button to defrost or dehumidify the wind-
button again. outside conditions are no longer shield and front door windows.
dusty.
NOTE NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidify- . When the “ ” or “ ” mode is
ing in cold weather, turn on the air selected, the air conditioner compres-
conditioner. However, if the ambient sor operates automatically regardless
temperature decreases to approxi- of the position of the air conditioner
mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner button to defrost the windshield more
compressor will stop operating. quickly. However the indicator on the
air conditioner button will not illumi-
nate. At the same time, the air inlet

Black plate (215,1)
Climate control 4-11
selection is automatically set to the Operating tips for heater and heated interior. This results in quicker
outside air mode. cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
air conditioner windows closed during the operation of
For type A climate control system, in
this state: & Cleaning ventilation grille the air conditioner for maximum cooling
– You cannot stop the air condi- efficiency.
tioner compressor by pressing the
air conditioner button. & Lubrication oil circulation in
– You cannot select the recircula- the refrigerant circuit 4
tion mode by pressing the air inlet Operate the air conditioner compressor at
selection button. a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
. For type C and D climate control speeds) a few minutes each month during
system, after defrosting the windshield the off-season to circulate its oil.
by pressing the defroster button “ ”,
pressing the button again returns the & Checking air conditioning
system to the setting that had been system before summer sea-
selected before the defroster was acti- son
vated.
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions operation each spring. Have the air con-
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. ditioning system checked by your
Since the condenser is located in front of SUBARU dealer.
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired & Cooling and dehumidifying in
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions
& Efficient cooling after parking Under certain weather conditions (high
in direct sunlight relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with from the air outlets may be noticed. This
the windows open for a few minutes to condition is normal and does not indicate
allow outside air to circulate into the any problem with the air conditioning
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (216,1)
4-12 Climate control
system. Air filtration system mance if not properly maintained.
& Air conditioner compressor Replace the filter element according to the & Replacing an air filter
shut-off when engine is replacement schedule as follows. This
1. Remove the glove box.
heavily loaded schedule should be followed to maintain
(1) Open the glove box.
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
the air conditioner compressor is designed extremely dusty conditions, the filter
to temporarily shut off during air condi- should be replaced more frequently. It is
tioner operation whenever the accelerator recommended that you have your filter
is fully depressed such as during rapid checked or replaced by your SUBARU
acceleration or when driving on a steep dealer. For replacement, use only a
upgrade. genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
& Refrigerant for your climate Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000
control system km) whichever comes first
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
od of adding, changing or checking the CAUTION
refrigerant is different from the method for (2) Remove the damper shaft from the
CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU Contact your SUBARU dealer if the glove box.
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a following occurs, even if it is not yet
result of using the wrong refrigerant are time to change the filter:
not covered under warranty. . Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-

Black plate (217,1)
Climate control 4-13
doing this, be careful not to damage CAUTION

the hinge.
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
(3) Push in the stoppers located on

both sides of the glove box and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go. 2. Remove the air filter.
4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect

the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
6. Attach the service label to the driver’s
side door pillar.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally 3. Replace the air filter element with a
and remove the hinge portion. When new one.

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (9,1)
Audio
Antenna system .................................................. 5-3 When the following messages are displayed....... 5-20
Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-3 Auxiliary input jack............................................ 5-21
FM reception ....................................................... 5-3 Precautions to observe when handling a
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4 compact disc................................................... 5-22
Audio set ............................................................. 5-4 USB storage device / iPod® operations ........... 5-24
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5 Play file ............................................................. 5-24
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6 Connectable USB storage device ....................... 5-24
Power and audio controls .................................. 5-7 Connectable iPod® models................................. 5-24
Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-7 Connecting USB storage device / iPod® ............. 5-25 5
Sound controls and audio settings ...................... 5-7 How to play back ............................................... 5-26
FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-11 To select a track from the beginning .................. 5-26
FM selection ...................................................... 5-11 To select a chapter from the beginning when
AM selection ...................................................... 5-11 connecting iPod® ............................................. 5-26
Tuning ............................................................... 5-11 Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-26
HD RadioTM Technology (Digital AM and FM Repeating .......................................................... 5-26
Radio) (type B audio)........................................ 5-13 Random playback .............................................. 5-27
Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name) and SCAN (only when connecting USB storage
RT (Radio Text) ................................................ 5-14 device) (type A audio) ...................................... 5-28
Station preset .................................................... 5-15 Selecting category (only when connecting
iPod®) ............................................................. 5-28
CD player operation ........................................... 5-16
Display selection ............................................... 5-28
Play file.............................................................. 5-16
Folder selection (only when connecting USB
How to insert a CD ............................................. 5-16 storage device) ................................................ 5-29
How to play back a CD ....................................... 5-17 Setting the playing speed (only when the
To select a track from the beginning ................... 5-17 audiobook is playing) (type B audio) ................ 5-29
Fast-forwarding and rewinding ........................... 5-17 When the following messages are displayed....... 5-29
Repeating .......................................................... 5-18 Audio control buttons ....................................... 5-30
Random playback .............................................. 5-18 MODE button ..................................................... 5-30
Scan (type A audio)............................................ 5-19 “ ” and “ ” switch .......................................... 5-30
Display selection (type A audio).......................... 5-19 Volume control switch ....................................... 5-31
Folder selection ................................................. 5-20
How to eject a CD from the player ...................... 5-20

Black plate (10,1)
Audio
Bluetooth® audio ................................................ 5-31 Safety precautions ............................................. 5-36

Media format ...................................................... 5-32 Using the Hands-free system ............................. 5-37
Setting Bluetooth® audio .................................... 5-32 Bluetooth® setting ............................................. 5-46
Bluetooth® audio operation................................. 5-33 Screensaver (type B audio) .............................. 5-49
Hands-free system (if equipped) ....................... 5-34 Downloading pictures ........................................ 5-49
Tips for the Hands-free system ........................... 5-34 Selecting pictures .............................................. 5-49
Certification for the Hands-free system ............... 5-35 Erasing pictures ................................................ 5-49

Black plate (223,1)
Audio 5-3
Antenna system & FM reception

Although FM is normally static free,
& Roof antenna reception can be affected by the surround-
ing area, atmospheric conditions, station
CAUTION strength and transmitter distance. Build-
ings or other obstructions may cause
. Be sure to remove the antenna momentary static, flutter or station inter-
rod before entering garages, ference. If reception continues to be
parking towers and other loca- unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
tions with low ceilings. 5
. Remove the antenna rod before
washing your car at a car wash. If
the antenna rod is left attached, it
1) Unscrew
may scratch the roof.
2) Remove
. When reinstalling the removed
antenna rod, be sure to fully The roof antenna is installed in the center
tighten it. at the rear part of the roof.
The antenna rod can be removed by
unscrewing it from its base.

Black plate (224,1)
5-4 Audio
Installation of accessories Audio set

Always consult your SUBARU dealer Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
before installing a citizen band radio or of the following audio sets. Refer to the
other transmitting device in your vehicle. pages indicated in this section for operat-
Such devices may cause the electronic ing details.
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not NOTE
suited for the vehicle. If a cell phone is placed near the audio
set, it may cause the audio set to emit
noise when the phone receives calls.
This noise does not indicate an audio
set malfunction. Note that a cell phone
should be placed as far as possible
from the audio set.

Black plate (225,1)
Audio 5-5
& Type A audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-11
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-16
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-21
. USB storage device/iPod® operation: 5
refer to page 5-24
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to page 5-31
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-34
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (226,1)
5-6 Audio
& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to page
5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-11
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-16
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to page 5-21
. USB storage device/iPod® operation:
refer to page 5-24
. Bluetooth® audio: refer to page 5-31
. Hands-free system: refer to page 5-34

Black plate (227,1)
Audio 5-7
Power and audio controls mount speakers can be heard at ! Tone and balance control (type A
ear level (built in SRS FOCUS effect) audio)
& Power switch and volume (type B audio).
control (2) Ultra rich bass sound can be
obtained from standard door mount
speakers (built in SRS TruBass Type A audio
effect) (type B audio).
Type A and B audio . TruBass, FOCUS, SRS and “ ”
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Each brief press of the “TUNE/TRACK/
Inc. CH” dial changes the control modes in the
5
The dial is used for both power (ON/OFF) . TruBass and FOCUS technologies following sequence.
and volume control. The radio is turned are incorporated under license from
ON and OFF by pressing the dial, and the SRS Labs, Inc.
volume is controlled by turning the dial.
& Sound controls and audio

settings Choose the preferred level for each mode
by turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
NOTE The control function returns to the tune/
. SPEED VOLUME CONTROL (SVC) is track/channel control mode after approxi-
a function that automatically adjusts mately 5 seconds.
the volume according to the vehicle
speed. As the vehicle speed increases,
the audio volume automatically in-
creases to match the vehicle speed, in
order to create a pleasant listening
environment even as the driving noise
increases.
. For type B audio, SRS TruBass and
FOCUS are equipped.
. SRS Sound features:
(1) Sound originating from door
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (228,1)
5-8 Audio
! Other settings (type A audio) ! Audio settings (type B audio) First menu Second menu Third menu
Screen — —
OFF
Type A audio Sound Tone Bass
Mid
Each brief press of the “MENU” button Treble

changes the control modes in the follow- Balance Balance
ing sequence. Fader
SVC —
SRS Sound —
Screen Brightness —
1. Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to Contrast —
display “SETTING Menu”.
Screen Size —
Choose the preferred settings for each 2. Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
mode by turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” to select the preferred menu. You can Screen Saver Picture Select
dial. select the menu as shown in the following Picture Down-
chart. load
The control function returns to the tune/
track/channel control mode after approxi- Picture Erase
mately 5 seconds. BT Audio Pair Audio —
Setup Player
Select Audio —
Player
Set Passkey —
Delete Audio —
Player
Others HD ON/OFF —
Initialize —

Black plate (229,1)
Audio 5-9
3. Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial

to select the preferred setting for each
mode.
NOTE
Only “Screen OFF” can be displayed
while driving.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (230,1)
5-10 Audio
! Adjustable level of each mode
Mode Range of levels Default Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

(displayed) setting
Volume Volume control 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
AUX volume control 0 to 40 15 For less volume For more volume
Tone and balance Bass control −8 to +8 0 For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control −8 to +8 0 For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control −8 to +8 0 For less treble sound For more treble sound
Balance L9 to R9 0 Right channel attenuated Left channel attenuated
Fader R9 to F9 0 Front attenuated Rear attenuated
Other settings SPEED VOLUME OFF to 2 OFF For less auto volume change For more auto volume change
BEEP (Type A audio) OFF to ON ON OFF ON
SRS Sound (Type B audio) OFF to ON ON OFF ON
Brightness (Type B audio) 0 to 15 13 For less brightness For more brightness
Contrast (Type B audio) 0 to 15 8 For less contrast For more contrast
Screen size (Type B audio) Normal to Wide Wide Normal Wide
HD ON/OFF (Type B audio) OFF to ON ON ON OFF
Initialize (Type B audio) Cancel to Initialize Cancel Initialize Cancel

Black plate (231,1)
Audio 5-11
FM/AM radio operation & AM selection & Tuning

& FM selection ! Manual tuning
Type A audio
Type A and B audio Type A and B audio

Type B audio
Press the “FM” button when the radio is off

to turn on the radio. Press the “AM” button when the radio is off Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
Press the “FM” button when the radio is on to turn on the radio. wise to increase the tuning frequency and 5
to select the preferred reception mode. ! Type A audio turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counter-
Each time the “FM” button is briefly Press the “AM” button when the radio is on
clockwise to decrease it.
pressed the radio changes in the following to select AM reception starting from the Each time the dial is turned, the frequency
sequence starting from the last radio band last radio band and the last frequency interval can be changed between 10 kHz
that you selected. interval that you selected. in the AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM
mode.
Type A audio: ! Type B audio
! Stereo indicator
Each time the “AM” button is briefly
pressed the radio changes in the following The stereo indicator “ST” (type A audio)/
sequence starting from the last radio band “STEREO” (type B audio) will illuminate
that you selected. when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
Type B audio:
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (232,1)
5-12 Audio
! Seek tuning (SEEK) ! Scan tuning (SCAN) ! PTY (Program type) group tuning
Type A audio: (only FM reception)
Type A audio*1
Seek up Type A audio

Type B audio*2
*1: Press the button briefly. Type B audio

Seek down *2: Press and hold the button.
If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio Press the indicated button to change to
will switch to the scan mode. In this mode, the PTY selection mode. At this time, the
the radio scans through the radio band PTY group that you are currently listening
Type B audio: until a receivable station is found. The to (type A audio)/that you selected the last
radio will briefly stop at the station while time (type B audio) will be displayed for 10
displaying the frequency, after which seconds. In the PTY selection mode,
Seek up scanning will continue until the entire band “PTY” is displayed on the screen.
has been scanned.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel ! PTY (Program type) group selection
Seek down
the SCAN mode and to stop at any In the PTY selection mode, perform the
displayed channel. following procedures to change the PTY
If you press the “ ” or “ ” button briefly, Automatic tuning may not function prop- group by one step at a time.
the radio will automatically search for a erly if the station reception is weakened by
receivable station and stop at the first one distance from the station or proximity to Type A audio: Press the following but-
it finds. This function may not be available tall buildings and hills. tons.
when radio signals are weak. When this
PTY group up by
happens, perform manual tuning to select one step
the preferred station.
PTY group down by
one step

Black plate (233,1)
Audio 5-13
Type B audio: Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/ ! Seek in PTY (Program type) group & HD RadioTM Technology (Di-
CH” dial. gital AM and FM Radio) (type
Type A audio:
B audio)
Seek up
Seek down 5
Type B audio:
1) PTY group up by one step
2) PTY group down by one step Seek up
HD Radio Technology is fueling the digital
This operation only changes the display. It radio revolution in the United States and
does not change the station that is around the world.
currently being received. Seek down
The digital technology enables broadcas-
ters to offer new and unique FM content
In the PTY selection mode, when the via HD2 / HD3 channels, crystal-clear
preferred PTY group has been selected, sound and data services on both AM
pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ” and FM bands - all free, with no subscrip-
seeks within that PTY group. tion fee.
The control function returns to the normal HD Radio Technology manufactured un-
mode after approximately 10 seconds. der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-
tion. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio®
and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos
are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (234,1)
5-14 Audio
For more information, visit www.hdradio. . The “LIVE” indicator illuminates when received in an area where the analog
com. the “Ballgame” is received. signal can be properly received, or the
Press the button while receiving FM . The “STEREO” indicator illuminates system frequently switches the chan-
when an FM stereo broadcast is received. nels between the digital and analog
radio (except an analog broadcast). The signals. However, this does not indi-
next channel of the station that is being . The “PTY” indicator illuminates during
the PTY selection mode. cate a malfunction. If this frequent
received will play. switching between digital and analog
! Mode selection ! About HD Radio causes annoyance, set the radio to the
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial and NOTE analog mode (HD Radio off mode) that
select the HD Radio ON mode (hybrid . HD Radio Technology is a hybrid provides the same radio broadcasting
mode) or OFF mode (analog mode). broadcasting system that employs di- quality as a conventional radio.
! iTunes® tagging gital and analog signals.
To tag the received song, press and hold
. When the vehicle moves outside the & Displaying radio PS (Pro-
digital broadcasting area (that is nar- gram Service Name) and RT
the button. Connect an iPod® to rower than the analog broadcasting
store the tagged song to the iPod®. When (Radio Text)
area due to the FCC output require-
the iPod® is connected to iTunes®, you ments), the radio reception automati-
can purchase the tagged songs from the cally changes from the digital signal to Type A and B audio
Apple® iTunes Music Store. the analog signal. When the vehicle
For the models of iPod® that support reenters the digital broadcasting area,
iTunes® tagging, refer to the following the radio reception automatically ! Type A audio
website: www.hdradio.com/tagging.php? changes from the analog signal to the
id=itunes. If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or
digital signal. When in a digital mode
RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing
! HD Radio indicators the Logo will be in orange on the
the “TEXT” button changes the display
radio display.
Each indicator illuminates under the fol- among PS, RT and frequency. The default
. Depending on the broadcasting sta-
lowing conditions. setting is “PS”.
tion, a condition such as a sound delay,
. The indicator illuminates while a echo effect or skipping sound may
digital broadcast is received during the HD NOTE
occur. However, this does not indicate . The maximum number of characters
Radio ON mode. a malfunction.
. The “TAG” indicator illuminates when that can be displayed for PS is 8.
. Depending on the broadcasting . The maximum number of characters
you can operate the iTunes® tagging. area, the digital signal may not be that can be displayed for RT is 64.

Black plate (235,1)
Audio 5-15
. If RT is 13 characters or longer, memory. vice).

press and hold the “TEXT” button in . When you use Auto-store, the new
order to change the page. NOTE stations replace any stations pre-
viously stored.
! Type B audio . Up to six stations for each reception . Interrupting Auto-store: If you acci-
Press the “TEXT” button to show the next mode may be preset. dentally press the button, you can
page when the text is not fully displayed . If the connection between the radio cancel the Auto-store function before it
while the PSD (Program Service Data) or and battery is broken for any reason has been completed as follows.
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
RT (Radio Text) service is received. – switching to the other source
removal, all stations stored in the
NOTE preset buttons are cleared. If this
mode
– pressing the button
5
. When the HD Radio function is occurs, it is necessary to reset the
preset buttons. – switching to the other band
turned on, PSD provides additional – turning the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
information about the broadcast. Text ! Selecting preset stations dial
data such as “Title” and “Artist” is
1. Select the preferred reception mode. – pressing the “SCAN” button
displayed on the screen.
. When the HD Radio function is 2. Press the preferred preset button ! Displaying and selecting preset
turned off (HD Radio off mode), the (from to ) briefly. stations (type B audio)
radio text is displayed on the screen
while receiving the broadcasting sta- ! Auto-store (type B audio) 1. Press and hold the button during
tion with RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data AM/FM reception to display the radio
Using the Auto-store function, you can
System). screen.
automatically store 6 stations on the
current waveband (FM-AS or AM-AS) by 2. Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
to select the stations.
& Station preset pressing and holding the button.
Use Auto-store to quickly find the stron-
! How to preset stations gest stations, for example when traveling
1. Select the preferred reception mode. through different reception areas.
2. Select the preferred station. NOTE
3. Press and hold one of the preset . When the HD Radio function is
buttons (from to ) to store the turned on, Auto-store cannot be used
frequency. If the button is pressed briefly, while receiving a broadcasting station
the preceding selection will remain in the with SPS (Supplemental Program Ser-

Black plate (236,1)
5-16 Audio
CD player operation – Maximum number of files on a AAC (type A audio):

CD: 510 (type A audio)/999 (type B . Based on MPEG4 AAC
audio) . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
NOTE 22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
. Make sure to always insert a disc & Play file . Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320
with the label side up. If a disc is
NOTE . Number of channels: 1 to 2ch
inserted with the label side down, the
player displays “CHECK DISC”. Refer . Copyright protected MP3/WMA/AAC AAC (type B audio):
to “When the following messages are files will not be played by the system.
. Based on MPEG2 AAC and MPEG4
displayed” F5-20. The player will automatically skip to the
AAC
. If a disc is inserted during a radio next file (track).
. WMA9 Lossless, WMA9 Profes- . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24,
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
sional and WMA9 voice cannot be 22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8
broadcast.
. After the last song finishes, the disc played. . Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320
will automatically return to track 1 (the . Number of channels: 1 to 2ch
first track on the disc) and will auto- MP3:
matically play back. . Based on MPEG1, 2 and 2.5 Layer3 & How to insert a CD
. The player is designed to be able to . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32, 24, Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs, 22.05, 16, 12, 11.025, 8 while gripping the edge of the disc, then
but it may not be able to play certain . Bit rate (kbps): 8 to 320 insert it in to the slot (with the label side
ones. . Supports variable bit rates up) and the player will automatically pull
. Mini CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are the disc into position.
not supported, and if inserted, they will WMA (type A audio):
be immediately ejected. . Based on Windows Media Audio 9 NOTE
. CDs that can be played back are . Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32 DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE
accompanied by the following restric- DISC INSERTION SLOT AT THE SAME
. Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192
tions. TIME.
– Maximum number of folders: 255 WMA (type B audio):
– Maximum number of files in a . Based on Windows Media Audio 7, 8
folder: 255 and 9
. Sampling rate (kHz): 48, 44.1, 32
. Bit rate (kbps): 32 to 192

Black plate (237,1)
Audio 5-17
& How to play back a CD & To select a track from the & Fast-forwarding and rewind-
beginning ing
! When there is no CD inserted
Type A audio:
Properly insert a CD. Refer to “How to
insert a CD” F5-16.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start Type A and B audio
playback of the CD, beginning with the Fast-forward
first track.
! When CD is in the player Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial clock-
Each brief press of the button
wise to skip to the beginning of the next 5
track. Each time the dial is turned, the Rewind
changes the modes in the following indicated track number will increase.
sequence.
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial counter-
clockwise to skip to the beginning of the
current track. Each time the dial is turned, Type B audio:
the indicated track number will decrease.
*: For type A audio, “BT-A” is displayed. NOTE Fast-forward
When the CD mode is selected, the player With an MP3, WMA or AAC:
will start playback. . Skipping past the last track will take
you back to the first track in the folder. Rewind
. Skipping past the first track will take
you to the last track in the folder. Press and hold the “ ” button to fast-
forward the track. Release the button to
stop fast-forwarding.
Press and hold the “ ” button to rewind
the track. Release the button to stop
rewinding.
NOTE
. If you fast-forward to the end of the
last track, fast-forwarding will stop and
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (238,1)
5-18 Audio
the player will start playback beginning Type A audio: NOTE

with the first track. For an MP3, WMA or The repeat-play mode will be cancelled
AAC folder, the player will start play- if you perform any of the following
back beginning with the first track of steps.
the next folder. . Press the button.
. If you rewind to the beginning of the . Press the “SCAN” button (type A
first track, rewinding will stop and the Type B audio:
audio).
player will start playback. For an MP3,
WMA or AAC folder, the player will start
playback beginning with the first track & Random playback
of the current folder. To playback tracks at random, press the
following button (“RDM” button) while a
NOTE track is playing.
& Repeating . The “RPT” (type A audio)/“One
To repeat a track, briefly press the follow- PRT” (type B audio) indication refers
ing button (“RPT” button) while the track is to the repeat playback of a single track. Type A audio*1
playing. It repeats the track that is playing.
. The “F-RPT” (type A audio)/“Folder
Type B audio*2
Type A audio
RPT” (type B audio) indication refers to
the repeat playback of a folder. It
repeats the all of the tracks in the *1: Press and hold the button.
folder. It is possible to select the *2: Press the button briefly.
Type B audio
function when the MP3/WMA/AAC for- Each time you press the button, the mode
mat track is playing. changes in the following sequences.
Each time you briefly press the button, the
To cancel the track repeat-play mode,
mode changes in the following se- Type A audio:
briefly press the “RPT” button and select
quences.
CANCEL. The “RPT” indication will turn
off, and the normal playback mode will be
resumed.

Black plate (239,1)
Audio 5-19
Type B audio: NOTE equipment.

Random playback will be cancelled if . Turn the ignition switch to the
you perform any of the following steps. “LOCK” position.
. Press the button.
. Press the “SCAN” button (type A & Display selection (type A
audio). audio)
NOTE
. The “RDM” (type A audio)/“Track & Scan (type A audio)
RDM” (type B audio) indication refers Type A audio
to the random playback of the tracks. It 5
randomly repeats the tracks on the CD. Type A audio
It is possible to select the function If you press the “TEXT” button during
when formats other than the MP3/WMA/ playback, the display will change as
AAC format CD is playing. The scan mode lets you listen to the first shown in the following sequence.
. The “F-RDM” (type A audio)/“Folder 10 seconds of each track in succession. For CD-DA:
RDM” (type B audio) indication refers Press the “SCAN” button to start scanning
to the random playback in the folder. It upward beginning with the track following
randomly repeats the tracks in the the currently selected one.
folder. It is possible to select the After all tracks on the disk/folder have
function when an MP3/WMA/AAC for- been scanned, normal playback will be
mat track is playing. resumed. To cancel the scan mode, press For MP3/WMA/AAC:
. The “D-RDM” indication refers to the the “SCAN” button again.
random playback of a disc. It randomly
repeats the tracks on the CD. It is NOTE
possible to select the function when The scan mode will be cancelled if you
an MP3/WMA format track is playing. perform any of the following steps.
! Page (track/folder title) scroll
To cancel the random playback mode, . Press the “RPT” button.
. Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. If you press the “TEXT” button again and
press the “RDM” button again and select hold it, the title will be scrolled so you can
CANCEL. . Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“FOLDER/PTY/CAT” button. see all of it.
The “RDM” indication will turn off, and the
normal playback mode will be resumed. . Press the button.
. Turn off the power of the audio
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (240,1)
5-20 Audio
NOTE Type A audio: & When the following mes-

. For type A audio, the display is sages are displayed
designed to show titles as shown in To select the next
folder If one of the following messages is
the following items. displayed while operating the CD player,
– When playing a CD-DA: 256 char- To go back to the
previous folder determine the cause based on the follow-
acters ing information. If you cannot clear those
– When playing an MP3/WMA/AAC: messages, please contact your SUBARU
64 characters Type B audio: dealer.
– When playing an iPod ® : 255
characters ! When “PUSH EJECT” is displayed
To select the next
. If no operations are performed for 10 folder Press the button to eject the disc.
seconds, the screen that was displayed Check the disc for damage or deforma-
before pressing and holding the To go back to the tion, and also check that the correct disc is
“TEXT” button will be shown. previous folder inserted. Do not try to eject the disc
forcibly. Mini CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs)
are not supported, and if inserted, they will
& Folder selection & How to eject a CD from the be immediately ejected and this message
NOTE player will be displayed. If the disc cannot be
. Selecting folders in this way is When a disc is being played back or when ejected or this message remains dis-
possible only within a single disc. a disc is in the player, press the played, please contact your SUBARU
. Only MP3/WMA/AAC folders are re- button. The disc will be ejected. dealer.
cognized when an attempt to select the ! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed
next or previous folder is made. If no NOTE
Press the button to eject the disc.
appropriate folder exists on the disc, . Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD Check that the disc is not damaged or
pressing the “ ” or “ ” side of the sticking out. The CD may fall out due to scratched, and also check that the disc is
“FOLDER/PTY/CAT” button starts play- vibration. inserted correctly. This message may
back beginning with the first track. . If you do not remove the ejected appear when using some CD-RW discs.
Press the following buttons briefly. disc within approximately 15 seconds, Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch
a disc protection function will operate, CDs are not supported) and data format
automatically reloading the disc. In this are correct. This player can only play
case, the disc is not played. MP3, WMA and AAC data formats. If the
disc cannot be ejected or this message

Black plate (241,1)
Audio 5-21
remains displayed, please contact your Auxiliary input jack audio control panel to select the AUX
SUBARU dealer. mode. Refer to “When CD is in the player”
F5-17.
3. Play back the portable audio player.
Refer to the instruction manual for the
portable audio player.
NOTE
. The output sound of the portable
audio player is not loud, and the sound 5
via the vehicle’s speakers that are
connected to the vehicle audio set
may be very low. If you turn up the
volume of the audio set, the volume
becomes louder. However, when you
You can connect an external audio device change from one portable audio player
to the vehicle’s audio system and play to another one, the volume levels via
back audio via the vehicle’s speakers. the vehicle’s speakers may be signifi-
An auxiliary (AUX) input jack is present in cantly louder compared to the prior
the center console. A stereo mini pin plug device. To avoid a large volume differ-
(3.5ø) can be inserted in this jack. The ence, turn down the volume when you
connection cable is available at electrical change between portable audio
appliance or similar stores. players.
To use the AUX input jack: . In some cases, when the sound
1. Connect a portable audio player to the volume of the portable audio player is
AUX input jack. low, the sound quality may become
impaired when you turn up the volume
of the vehicle audio system. In this
Type A and B audio case, adjust the sound volume of the
portable audio player.
. In some cases, noise occurs be-
2. Press the “CD/AUX” button on the cause of a bad connection between the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (242,1)
5-22 Audio
portable player and the vehicle audio Precautions to observe when

system. Try cleaning the stereo jack
and audio plug.
handling a compact disc
. If the noise is not reduced, check for Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and
disconnection of the cord or a malfunc- CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the
tion of the portable player. following. Also, some compact discs
cannot be played.

Black plate (243,1)
Audio 5-23
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface

from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never 5
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, near heaters or in vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If

Black plate (244,1)
5-24 Audio
USB storage device / iPod® source other than the USB power & Connectable iPod® models
supply (for example, an AC power
operations adapter, etc.) cannot be operated. Model Firmware version
& Play file . A USB memory that is connected to
with video 1.3
the memory card reader or multi card
Refer to “Play file” F5-16. reader cannot be operated. classic 2.0.4
& Connectable USB storage . If the USB memory consists of two nano 1G 1.3.1
drives or more, the system will recog-
device nize only one of the drives after con- nano 2G 1.1.3
Mass storage class USB memory can be necting the USB memory. nano 3G 1.1.3
connected. USB storage devices that can . The contents stored on the USB nano 4G 1.0.4
be played back are accompanied by the memory may not be played in the same iPod®
following restrictions. order as they appear on a personal nano 5G 1.0.2
. Maximum directory layers: 8 layers computer. nano 6G 1.0
(including the ROOT) . A personal computer cannot be touch 1G 3.1.3
. Maximum number of files in a folder: used even if it is connected to the
system using a USB cable. touch 2G 3.1.3
255
. Maximum number of folders: 512 (type . If the USB memory has a security touch 3G 4.1
A audio)/255 (type B audio) (including the function, the contents stored on the touch 4G 4.1
ROOT) USB memory cannot be played by the
system. 1G 3.1.3
. Maximum number of files on the
device: 130,560 (type A audio)/2,500 . A USB memory and an iPod® cannot 3G 3.1.3
be connected to the system at the iPhone®
(type B audio) 3G S 3.1.3
same time.
4G 4.1
NOTE
. HUB class USB memory cannot be
played. CAUTION
. ATAPI subclass USB cannot be
played. Do not connect an iPod® other than
. For type A audio, High Speed USB the previously stated models. Doing
2.0 cannot be played. so may result in a malfunction or,
. A USB memory that is powered by a depending on conditions, cause a

Black plate (245,1)
Audio 5-25
fire. & Connecting USB storage de- . While an iPod® is connected, the
vice / iPod® iPod® cannot be operated using the
click wheel on the iPod® (except some
NOTE models).
WARNING
. iPod® is a registered trademark of . When using an iPod® by connecting
Apple Inc. Do not operate an iPod ® while it to in-vehicle equipment, the order of
. You are only permitted to personally driving. Doing so may distract your the list items displayed on the in-
copy and play copyright-free material attention from driving and could vehicle equipment may be different
or material that is legally permitted to lead to an accident. from that on the iPod®. However, this
be copied and played by using an does not indicate a malfunction.
iPod® and iTunes. Copyright infringe- . An iPod® battery that is connected 5
ment is prohibited by law. CAUTION to in-vehicle equipment will be charged
. To check the firmware version of an when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
iPod®, connect it to a computer and . If the data stored in an iPod® is or “ACC” position. However, activation
check the device manager. For further deleted while it is connected to of the iPod® may be delayed if the
information, see the User’s Guide for the in-vehicle system, the data battery charge of the iPod® is low.
the iPod®. cannot be recovered. . If an iPod® does not activate after
. To update the firmware version of an . Do not store an iPod® in the operation, disconnect the connection
iPod®, visit the Apple Inc. website. vehicle. If an iPod® is left in the cable from the iPod® and reset it. For
. Depending on the model and firm- vehicle for a long period of time, the resetting procedure, see the User’s
ware version of an iPod®, it may not it may be deformed, discolored Guide of the iPod®.
work properly or not operate at all. or damaged by high temperature. . If an iPod® and the connection cable
are connected improperly, the iPod®
cannot be powered on or will not be
NOTE recognized by in-vehicle equipment. In
. Even if a USB storage device or this case, disconnect the connection
iPod® is connected, it cannot be played cable from the iPod®, and then connect
unless the USB/iPod® mode is se- it again.
lected.
. Movies stored on a USB storage
device or an iPod® cannot be played
while the storage device or iPod® is
connected to the system.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (246,1)
5-26 Audio
Type B audio: from the beginning” F5-17.
& Fast-forwarding and rewind-

ing
Fast-forwarding and rewinding are oper-
When the USB/iPod® mode is selected, ated in the same way as for a CD. For
the player will start playback of the USB details, refer to “Fast-forwarding and
storage device/iPod®. rewinding” F5-17.
NOTE
NOTE When connecting iPod®:
. Depending on the number of files . When the end of a track is reached
stored on the iPod® and the firmware while fast-forwarding, fast-forwarding
The USB connector is located in the version, the iPod® may not activate ends and play begins from the begin-
center console. Use the connector to smoothly after operation or not work ning of the next track.
connect a USB storage device/iPod®. properly. . When the beginning of a track is
. Do not disconnect the connector reached while rewinding, rewinding
& How to play back from the iPod® during iPod® operation. ends and play begins from the begin-
1. Connect a USB storage device/iPod®. ning of the track.
& To select a track from the
2. Press the button. Each time you beginning
briefly press the button, the mode
Select a track in the same way as for a
& Repeating
changes in the following sequence.
CD. For details, refer to “To select a track ! When connecting USB storage de-
Type A audio: from the beginning” F5-17. vice
Repeating is operated in the same way as
& To select a chapter from the for a CD. For details, refer to “Repeating”
beginning when connecting F5-18.
iPod®
When playing podcasts or audiobooks,
select a chapter in the same way as for a
*: Only when a Media Hub is connected. CD. For details, refer to “To select a track

Black plate (247,1)
Audio 5-27
! When connecting iPod® press the “RPT” button. When connecting iPod® (type A audio):
Type A audio
& Random playback
Type A audio*1 When connecting iPod® (type B audio):

Type B audio
Each time you briefly press the “RPT” Type B audio*2

button, the mode changes in the following 5
sequence. *1: Press and hold the button.
*2: Press the button briefly.
NOTE
Type A audio: . The “FOLDER RDM” indication re-
To playback tracks at random, press the fers to the random playback in the
“RDM” button while a track is playing. folders. It randomly repeats all of the
Type B audio: Each time you press the button, the mode tracks in the folder.
changes in the following sequence. . The “ALL RDM” indication refers to
the random playback on the entire USB
When connecting USB storage device storage device. It randomly repeats all
(type A audio): of the tracks on the USB storage
device.
NOTE . The “ALBUM RDM” indication refers
to the shuffle playback of the album. It
. The “ALL RPT” indication refers to sequentially plays back all of the tracks
the repeat playback of all tracks on the on the album.
entire iPod®. When connecting USB storage device . The “SONG RDM” indication refers
. The “SONG RPT” (type A audio)/ (type B audio): to the shuffle playback on the entire
“ONE RPT” (type B audio) indication iPod®. It randomly repeats all of the
refers to the repeat playback of a single tracks on the iPod®.
track. It repeats the track that is play- . When an iPod® is connected, the
ing. files are played back at random by the
. When an audiobook is playing, the shuffle function of the iPod®. There-
mode does not change even if you
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (248,1)
5-28 Audio
fore, iPod® operation may be different & Selecting category (only Type B audio:
depending on the model of the con- when connecting iPod®)
nected iPod®.
. When an audiobook or a podcast is When the button is pressed briefly,
playing, the mode does not change the iPod® menu is displayed.
even if you press the “RDM” button. Each time you turn the “TUNE/TRACK/
To cancel the random playback mode, CH” dial clockwise, the displayed category
press the “RDM” button and select CAN- changes in the following sequence. Each
CEL. The “RDM” indication will turn off, time you turn the dial counterclockwise,
and the normal playback mode will re- the displayed category changes in the
sume. opposite sequence.
Type A audio:
& SCAN (only when connecting To select the category, press the dial. To
USB storage device) (type A close the iPod® menu, press and hold the
audio) button. To return to the previous
screen, briefly press the button.
“SCAN” button & Display selection

If you press the button during
Scan is operated in the same way as for a playback, the display will change as
CD. For details, refer to “Scan (type A shown in the following sequence.
audio)” F5-19.
NOTE
When an iPod ® is connected, you
cannot select the SCAN mode.
! Page scroll
Refer to “Page (track/folder title) scroll”
F5-19.

Black plate (249,1)
Audio 5-29
! When “No song” is displayed (type
& Folder selection (only when ! When “CHECK DEVICE” is dis-
B audio)
connecting USB storage de- played
vice) This message is displayed when no
This message is displayed under the
playable audio files are in the connected
Refer to “Folder selection” F5-20. following conditions.
USB storage device/iPod®. Connect a
. When there is a short in the USB bus USB storage device/iPod® that has play-
NOTE . When an unsupported device (for ex- able audio files stored in it.
When an iPod ® is connected, you ample a USB mouse) is connected
cannot select a folder. . When an unsupported iPod® is con-
nected
& Setting the playing speed . When a connected iPod® is frozen 5
(only when the audiobook is . When a transmission malfunction oc-
playing) (type B audio) curs
Each time you briefly press the . When an iPod® confirmation malfunc-
button (the “RPT” button) while the audio- tion occurs
book is playing, the playing speed . When a HUB class USB storage
changes in the following sequence. device is connected
Disconnect the USB storage device/iPod®
and check it.
! When “NO USB” is displayed (type
B audio)
This message is displayed under the
following conditions.
& When the following mes- . No USB storage devices/iPod® are
sages are displayed connected.
If one of the following messages is . An incompatible USB storage device/
displayed while connecting the USB sto- iPod® is connected.
rage device/iPod®, determine the cause
based on the following information. If you Connect a supported USB storage device/
cannot clear those messages, please iPod®.
contact your SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (250,1)
5-30 Audio
Audio control buttons & MODE button ! Models with Hands-free system
Press and hold this button if you wish to
immediately cut the volume to zero.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
If you press and hold the button again, the
original sound volume will return and
“MUTE” turns off.
& “ ” and “ ” switch
The “MODE” button is used to select the

These buttons are located on the spokes preferred audio mode. Each time it is
of the steering wheel. They allow the pressed, the mode changes to the next
driver to control audio functions without one in the following sequence:
taking his/her hands off the steering
wheel.
! With radio mode selected

Press the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side
*1: The frequency last received in the selected
briefly to skip to a preset channel. Press
waveband will be displayed.
and hold the switch to the “ ” or “ ” side
*2: Only when a CD is in the player. to seek the next receivable station and
*3: Only when the device is connected. stop at it.
That station’s frequency will be indicated
on the audio display.

Black plate (251,1)
Audio 5-31
! With CD mode selected
& Volume control switch Bluetooth® audio
Press the switch to the “ ” side briefly to
skip forward in the track order. Press the
switch to the “ ” side briefly to skip NOTE
backward in the track order. For models with the genuine SUBARU
The track number will be shown on the navigation system, refer to the Owner’s
audio display. Manual supplement for the navigation
system.
When the MP3/WMA/AAC format track is
playing, press and hold the switch to the
“ ” side to select the next folder. Press 5
and hold the switch to the “ ” side to go
back to the previous folder.
! With USB/iPod® mode selected
Press the switch to the “ ” side to skip Press the switch to the “+” side to increase
forward in the track order. Press the switch the volume. Press the switch to the “−”
to the “ ” side to skip backward in the side to reduce the volume.
track order. The track number will be A number indicating the volume will be
shown on the audio display. shown on the audio display.
NOTE
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
registered trademarks of Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
This function enables you to play back
audio sources from Bluetooth® audio
devices. You need to register the Blue-
tooth® audio device in the system before
using it.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (252,1)
5-32 Audio
NOTE . AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control NOTE

. The Bluetooth® audio function may Profile) You cannot set Bluetooth® audio while
not operate properly under the follow- driving.
ing conditions. & Setting Bluetooth® audio
– The device is turned off. ! Registering (pairing) device
– The battery of the device has run NOTE
down. “MENU” button Only one device can be registered.
– The device is not connected to (type A audio)
the system. 1. Select the following menu.
– The device is behind the seat or – “PAIR AUDIO” (type A audio)
in the glove box. – “Pair Audio Player” (type B audio)
“TUNE/TRACK/CH”
– A metal material is covering or dial If a device is already registered, “MEM-
touching the device. ORY FULL” is displayed and the mode
. Depending on the type of device that changes to the Bluetooth® audio setting
is used, operation and sound volume Type A audio: mode.
may be different from normal use of 1. Select the “BT-A SETUP” menu by 2. After the passkey is shown on the
those devices. pressing the “MENU” button. For details, display, input the passkey into the device.
. The sound quality may degrade due refer to “Other settings (type A audio)” F5- – If you input the correct passkey,
to the influence of the device that is 8. “PAIRED” is displayed and the regis-
connected to the system or the circum- 2. Perform the following procedure by tration procedure is finished.
stances of the Bluetooth network. operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial – If you input an incorrect passkey,
. When another Bluetooth® device is while “BT-A” is displayed. “FAILED” is displayed, the registration
simultaneously connected, noise may procedure was not successful and the
be heard. Type B audio: mode changes to the Bluetooth®
1. Select the “BT Audio Setup” menu by audio setting mode.
& Media format operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. For
Bluetooth® audio devices cannot be details, refer to “Audio settings (type B NOTE
connected if they are not compatible with audio)” F5-8.
After the ignition switch is turned to the
the following Bluetooth® profiles. 2. Perform the following procedure by
“LOCK” position, the registered device
. A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
is not automatically connected to the
Profile) while “BT Audio” is displayed.
system even if the ignition switch is

Black plate (253,1)
Audio 5-33
turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position. ! Deleting device ! Repeating

! Selecting device 1. Select the following menu. Repeating is operated in the same way as
– “DELETE AUDIO” (type A audio) for a CD. Refer to “Repeating” F5-18.
1. Select the following menu. Each time you briefly press the
– “Delete Audio Player” (type B
– “SELECT AUDIO” (type A audio) button (type A audio)/ button (the
audio)
– “Select Audio Player” (type B audio) “RPT” button) (type B audio), the mode
If no devices are registered, “EMPTY” is changes in the following sequence.
If no devices are registered, “EMPTY” is displayed and the mode changes to the
displayed and the mode changes to the Bluetooth® audio setting mode.
Bluetooth® audio setting mode.
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. 5
– “DELETED” is displayed and the
– If the device is connected, “SE- mode changes to the Bluetooth®
LECTED” is displayed and the select- audio setting mode.
ing procedure is finished.
! Random playback
– If the device cannot be connected,
“FAILED” is displayed and the select-
& Bluetooth® audio operation Random playback is operated in the same
ing procedure was not successful. NOTE way as for a CD. Refer to “Random
Depending on the connected device, it playback” F5-18. Each time you press
! Setting passkey may not activate as per the following and hold the button (type A audio)/
items or not work smoothly. press the button (the “RDM” button)
1. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu. briefly (type B audio), the mode changes
– After the currently set passkey is ! How to play back in the following sequence.
displayed, a new passkey can be
entered. Press the button and select the “BT-
A” (type A audio)/“BT Audio” (type B
2. Input the new passkey by operating
audio) mode.
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. ! To select a track from its beginning
– The new passkey is displayed, the Select a track in the same way as for a ! Display selection (type A audio)
passkey is changed and the mode CD. Refer to “To select a track from the
changes to the Bluetooth® audio beginning” F5-17. Select an item to be displayed using the
setting mode. same way as for a CD. Refer to “Display
selection (type A audio)” F5-19. Each
time you briefly press the button, the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (254,1)
5-34 Audio
indication changes in the following se- Hands-free system (if & Tips for the Hands-free sys-
quence. tem
equipped)
! Bluetooth®
NOTE It is possible to connect a cell phone to the
. For models with the genuine in-vehicle equipment through the Blue-
SUBARU navigation system, refer to tooth® format (wireless) to make a phone
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the call from the in-vehicle equipment or take
! Folder selection navigation system. an incoming phone call.
Select a folder in the same way as for a . When selling your vehicle, make Since the Bluetooth® format is wireless, a
CD. Refer to “Folder selection” F5-20. sure that you initialize the Hands-free connection between the in-vehicle equip-
system to prevent personal data from ment and the cell phone can be made
being improperly accessed. without placing them in close proximity of
The Hands-free system operates while the each other. The cell phone can be used
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” with it left in the breast pocket or bag.
position. NOTE
. The Hands-free system may not
operate properly under the following
conditions.
– The cell phone is turned off.
– The cell phone is not in the
phone call area.
– The battery of the cell phone has
run down.
– The cell phone is not connected
to the Hands-free system.
– The cell phone is behind the seat
or in the glove box.
– A metal material covers or
touches the cell phone.
. Depending on the type of cell phone

Black plate (255,1)
Audio 5-35
that is used, the screen on the cell undesirable echo sound. & Certification for the Hands-
phone may remain illuminated while . Speak clearly and loudly. free system
the ignition switch is in the “ON” . Your voice may be difficult to be
position. If this occurs, turn the illumi- heard by the party under the following CAUTION
nation off by adjusting the cell phone conditions.
settings. – Driving on a rough road FCC WARNING
. Depending on the setting of the cell – Driving at a high speed Changes or modifications not ex-
phone, the dial lock function may be – Driving with a window open pressly approved by the party re-
activated after making a call. Deacti-
– When air from the ventilator sponsible for compliance could void
vate the automatic dial lock function of
the cell phone before using the Hands-
blows directly towards the micro- the user’s authority to operate the 5
phone equipment.
free system.
– When the sound coming from the
. Depending on the type of cell phone ventilator is loud
that is used, operation and the sound NOTE
– When the cell phone is too close
volume may be different from those of This device complies with Part 15 of
to the microphone
cell phones currently used. the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
. The sound quality may degrade due
. When the ignition switch is turned to to the influence of the cell phone that is
Rules. Operation is subject to the
the “LOCK” position during a call, the connected to the system or the circum-
following two conditions: (1) this de-
call may be disconnected or continued vice may not cause harmful interfer-
stances of the Bluetooth network.
on the cell phone depending on the ence, and (2) this device must accept
type of cell phone that is used. Note . When another Bluetooth® device is any interference received, including
that operation of the cell phone may be simultaneously connected, noise may interference that may cause undesired
necessary if the call is continued on the be heard in the voice coming from the operation.
cell phone. hands-free phone.
. Do not speak at the same time as the ! Corresponding profiles for the cell NOTE
other party during a call. If you and the phone This equipment has been tested and
party speak at the same time, it may be . HFP (Hands Free Profile): Ver. 1.0 found to comply with the limits for a
difficult for the other party to hear your Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
voice and vice versa. This is normal. . OPP (Object Push Profile): Ver. 1.1
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
. The receiver sound volume should designed to provide reasonable protec-
be set as low as possible. Otherwise, tion against harmful interference in a
the party you are calling may notice an residential installation. This equipment
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (256,1)
5-36 Audio
may cause harmful interference to to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio

radio communications, if it is not frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
installed and used in accordance with equipment has very low levels of RF
the instructions. However, there is no energy that it deemed to comply with-
guarantee that interference will not out maximum permissive exposure
occur in a particular installation. If this evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable
equipment does cause harmful inter- that it should be installed and operated
ference to radio or television reception, keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or
which can be determined by turning the more away from person’s body (ex-
equipment off and on, the user is cluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
encouraged to try to correct the inter- and ankles).
ference by one or more of the following . This transmitter must not be co-
measures. located or operated in conjunction with
. Reorient or relocate the receiving any other antenna or transmitter.
! Paraguay models
antenna.
. Increase the separation between the ! Mexico models . Vendor: Tokyo Motors S.A.
equipment and receiver. . Vendor address: Avda. Eusebio Ayala
. Connect the equipment into an out- 4649 kg 5 1/2 Asuncion, Paraguay
let on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected. & Safety precautions
. Consult the dealer or an experi-
enced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING
. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon- . For safety reasons, avoid operat-
sible for compliance could void the ing a cell phone while driving.
user’s authority to operate the equip- . Do not make a phone call while
ment. driving. When you have an in-
. This equipment complies with FCC/ coming call, stop the vehicle in a
IC radiation exposure limits set forth safe location before taking the
for an uncontrolled environment and incoming phone call. When you
meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) have to absolutely take a phone
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C call, tell the caller “I’ll call you

Black plate (257,1)
Audio 5-37
back”. And then call the caller tions are hereinafter referred to & Using the Hands-free system
back after stopping the vehicle in as “other radio stations.”) Before
a safe location. using this equipment, be sure to ! Turning on/off the Hands-free mode
check to see if “other radio
stations” are being operated in
CAUTION the vicinity. If there is detrimental
radio interference from this
. Do not leave a cell phone in the equipment to “other radio sta-
vehicle. The temperature in the tions,” move the equipment to
vehicle may become extremely
high and cause a malfunction of
another location as soon as
possible to avoid radio interfer-
5
the cell phone. ence. The frequency band used
. When using a cell phone, be by this equipment is in the 2.4
careful not to get it close to the GHz zone. The FH-SS modulation
in-vehicle equipment. Getting it is employed as a modulation
too close to the in-vehicle equip- method. The expected inflicting
ment may result in deterioration interference distance is less than 1) OFF hook switch
in tone quality or a poor connect- 33 ft (10 m). This equipment uses 2) ON hook switch
ing condition. a full band and can avoid a band 3) Talk switch
. In the frequency band used by used by a movable body identifi- To turn on the Hands-free mode, press the
this equipment, along with indus- cation device. OFF hook switch . To turn off the
trial, scientific and medical Hands-free mode, press the ON hook
equipment such as a microwave switch .
oven, radio stations (a license is
! Preparation for using the Hands-
required) to be used by the
free system
production line in the factory to
identify movable bodies, specific Before using the Hands-free system, it is
small power radio stations (a necessary to register a cell phone in the
license is not required) and ama- system. Perform the following procedure
teur radio stations (a license is to register a cell phone.
required) are being operated. 1. Press the OFF hook switch .
(These three types of radio sta-
2. Select “ENGLISH”/“FRANÇAIS” by
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (258,1)
5-38 Audio
operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. ! Menu list of the Hands-free system

– Then “WELCOME!” will be dis-
played.
3. Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial or
the talk switch .
4. Select the “RECORD NAME” menu.
5. Say the name to be registered.
– After “CAR M_MEDIA” (type A
audio)/“CAR MULTIMEDIA” (type B
audio) is displayed, a pass key is
displayed.
7. Input the displayed pass key into the
cell phone while the following message is Turn the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial to select
displayed. a menu, and then press the dial to enter
– “PKY: ****” (type A audio) the selected menu.
– “PASS KEY: ****” (type B audio)
NOTE
. If you input the correct pass key,
“PAIRED” is displayed and the regis-
tration procedure is finished.
. If you input an incorrect pass key,
“FAILED” is displayed and the registra-
tion procedure was not successful.
. Up to 5 cell phones can be regis-
tered.
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ACC” or “ON” position, the regis-
tered cell phone may be automatically
connected to the system.

Black plate (259,1)
Audio 5-39
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page

PHONE BOOK* ADD ENTRY BY VOICE Adding a new number by voice 5-42
BY PHONE Adding a new number by cell phone 5-42
MANUAL INPUT Adding a new number by inputting manually 5-42
CALL HISTORY Adding a new number from the call history 5-43
GO BACK
LIST NAMES — Showing the list of the names registered in the phonebook 5-43
CHANGE NAME — Changing a name registered in the phonebook 5-44 5
SET SPD DIAL/SET — Registering a speed dial 5-44
SPEED DIAL
DELETE ENTRY — Deleting phonebook data 5-44
DEL SPD DIAL/DE- — Deleting a registered speed dial 5-44
LETE SPEED DIAL
GO BACK —
REDIAL DIAL — Redialing 5-45
STORE — Adding a new number stored in the outgoing call history 5-43
memory
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the outgoing call history memory 5-44
GO BACK —
CALLBACK DIAL — Dialing a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-45
STORE — Adding a new number stored in the incoming call history 5-43
memory
DELETE — Deleting a number stored in the incoming call history memory 5-45
GO BACK —
*: If a cell phone is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not indicated.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (260,1)
5-40 Audio
First menu Second menu Third menu Details Page

SETUP SECURITY SET PIN Setting a PIN code 5-46
PHBK LOCK*1/
PHONE BOOK Locking the phonebook 5-46
LOCK*1
PHBK UNLOCK*1/
PHONE BOOK UN- Unlocking the phonebook 5-46
LOCK*1
GO BACK
PHONE SETUP PAIR PHONE Registering a new cell phone*2 5-37
SELECT PHONE Selecting a cell phone to be used 5-47
CHANGE NAME Changing the registered name of the cell phone 5-47
LIST PHONES Showing the list of the registered cell phones 5-47
SET PASSKEY Changing the pass key 5-48
DELETE Deleting the registered cell phone 5-48
GO BACK
SYSTEM SETUP GUIDANCE VOL/
GUIDANCE VOLUME Setting the volume of the voice guidance 5-48
INITIALIZE Initialization 5-48

SEL LANGUAGE/SE- Selecting the language (using the Hands-free system) 5-48
LECT LANGUAGE
GO BACK
GO BACK —
*1: If a PIN code is not registered, the menu described in the chart is not available.
*2: Up to 5 cell phones can be registered.

Black plate (261,1)
Audio 5-41
! Voice command system The commands available for the voice

phone book add ajouter l’entrée
command system are listed in the follow- 20 entry dans le registre
NOTE ing chart.
Press the talk switch and say 21 phone book modifier le nom
“Help” to listen to the help guidance. Command change name dans le registre
English Français 22 phone book delete supprimer l’entrée

entry du registre
1 0 (zero, oh) 0 (zéro) phone book list lister les noms du
23 names registre
2 1 (one) 1 (un)
configurer compo-
3 2 (two) 2 (deux)
24 phone book set
speed dial sition abrégée pour 5
4 3 (three) 3 (trois) le registre
5 4 (four) 4 (quatre) phone book delete supprimer compo-
25 speed dial sition abrégée pour
6 5 (five) 5 (cinq) le registre
7 6 (six) 6 (six)
26 phone book unlock déverrouiller
gistre
le re-
8 7 (seven) 7 (sept)
9 8 (eight) 8 (huit) 27 cancel annuler
1) OFF hook switch 28 help aide
10 9 (nine) 9 (neuf)
2) ON hook switch
3) Talk switch 11 * (star) * (étoile) 29 repeat répéter
12 # (pound) # (carré, dièse) 30 go back retourner

To turn on the voice command system,
press the talk switch briefly. To turn off 13 + (plus) + (plus) 31 mute sourdine
the voice command system, wait for 5 32 dial composer
14 callback rappel
seconds without using the voice command
15 redial recomposer 33 previous précédent
system.
composer par nu- 34 delete supprimer
16 dial by number méro 35 store enregistrer
17 dial by name composer par nom 36 confirm confirmer
18 phonebook registre réglages du télé-
37 phone setup phone
19 setup réglages
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (262,1)
5-42 Audio
38 security sécurité
! Updating phonebook data 3. Transfer the data from the cell phone.
For details about transferring the data,
jumeler le télé- NOTE refer to the instruction manual of the cell
39 pair phone phone The maximum number of phonebook phone.
40 change name modifier le nom entries that can be registered in the 4. Perform either of the following proce-
phonebook is 50. dures.
41 select phone sélectionner le tél-
éphone ! Registering by voice – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
lister les télé- by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
42 list phones phones 1. Select the “BY VOICE” menu. dial.
2. Press the talk switch . – Press the talk switch .
43 set pass key configurer le
passe-partout 3. Say the phone number to be regis- 5. Say the name (voice tag) to be
44 add entry ajouter l’entrée
tered. registered.
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. 6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
45 delete entry supprimer l’entrée
5. Perform either of the following proce- – Then “STORED” is displayed and
46 delete speed dial supprimer compo- dures. the mode changes to the registering
sition abrégée
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu speed dial mode. Refer to “Registering
47 by voice vocalement by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” speed dial” F5-43.
48 by phone par téléphone dial.
– Press the talk switch . ! Registering by inputting manually
49 call history historique d’appels
6. Say the name (voice tag) to be 1. Select the “MANUAL INPUT” menu by
configurer compo-
50 set speed dial sition abrégée
registered. operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. 2. Input the phone number to be regis-
51 incoming entrant
– Then “STORED” is displayed and tered.
52 outgoing sortant the mode changes to the registering 3. Perform either of the following proce-
53 list names lister les noms speed dial mode. Refer to “Registering dures.
speed dial” F5-43. – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
54 set PIN configurer NIP
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
55 phone book lock
verrouiller le regis- ! Registering by phone dial.
tre
1. Select the “BY PHONE” menu. – Press the talk switch .
2. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. 4. Say the name (voice tag) to be
– Then “TRANSFER” is displayed. registered.

Black plate (263,1)
Audio 5-43
5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. speed dial” F5-43. – Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
– Then “STORED” is displayed and by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
the mode changes to the registering ! Registering from redial dial.
speed dial mode. Refer to “Registering 1. Select the “REDIAL” menu. – Press the talk switch .
speed dial” F5-43. 2. Select the phone number by operating 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. registered.
NOTE 3. Select the “STORE” menu. 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
While inputting the phone numbers, if 4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. – Then “STORED” is displayed and
“GO BACK” (type A audio)/“BS” (type 5. Perform either of the following proce-
the mode changes to the registering
B audio) is chosen using the “TUNE/ dures.
speed dial mode. Refer to “Registering 5
TRACK/CH” dial, the character that was speed dial” F5-43.
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu
input last is deleted. by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” ! Registering speed dial
! Registering from call history dial.
– Press the talk switch . 1. After registering phonebook data, se-
1. Select the “CALL HISTORY” menu. 6. Say the name (voice tag) to be lect the “SPEED DIAL” menu.
2. Select “OUTGOING” or “INCOMING” registered. 2. Press the preset button (from to
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. 7. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. ) to which you want to register the
3. Select the phone number by operating phone number.
– Then “STORED” is displayed and
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. the mode changes to the registering
4. Perform either of the following proce- speed dial mode. Refer to “Registering NOTE
dures. speed dial” F5-43. If the number to be used is already
– Select the “RECORD NAME” menu registered in speed dial, “OVER-
by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” ! Registering from call back WRITE?” will be displayed.
dial. 1. Select the “CALL BACK” menu.
– Press the talk switch . ! List names function
2. Select the phone number by operating
5. Say the name (voice tag) to be the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. The voice tags registered in the phone-
registered. book are spoken by using the list names
3. Select the “STORE” menu.
6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. function. To use the list names function,
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. perform the following procedure.
– Then “STORED” is displayed and
the mode changes to the registering 5. Perform either of the following proce-
dures. 1. Select the “LIST NAMES” menu.
speed dial mode. Refer to “Registering
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (264,1)
5-44 Audio
2. Select the registered data by perform- ! Changing voice tag phone number.
ing either of the following procedures.
1. Select the “CHANGE NAME” menu.
– Press the talk switch . ! Deleting the phonebook data
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” 2. Select the phone number by perform-
ing either of the following procedures. 1. Select the “DELETE ENTRY” menu.
dial.
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” 2. Select the phone number by perform-
3. After “SELECTED” is displayed, you ing either of the following procedures.
dial.
can select the following menus. – Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
– Press the talk switch and say
. “DIAL” to make a phone call the voice tag. dial.
. “CHANGE NAME” to change the name 3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu (only – Press the talk switch and say
(voice tag) after saying the voice tag). the voice tag.
. “SET SPD DIAL”/“SET SPEED DIAL” – Then the selected phone number/ 3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
to set the speed dial name is displayed. – Then “DELETED” is displayed and
. “DELETE ENTRY” to delete the name 4. Press the talk switch . the selected phonebook data is de-
(voice tag) from the phonebook 5. Say the new voice tag. leted.
. “GO BACK” to go back to the menu 6. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. ! Deleting the speed dial
mode – Then “CHANGED” is displayed.
1. Select the “DEL SPD DIAL”/“DELETE
NOTE ! Set speed dial SPEED DIAL” menu.
. After “LIST NAMES” is selected, if 2. Press the preset button (from to
the OFF hook switch is pushed, the 1. Select the “SET SPD DIAL”/“SET
) to which you want to delete the
selected number is called. SPEED DIAL” menu.
speed dial.
. After “LIST NAMES” is selected, if 2. Select the phone number by perform-
no operation is performed, the mem- ing either of the following procedures.
– Then “DELETED” is displayed and
ories are displayed and voice tags are – Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
the selected speed dial is deleted.
spoken. After all memories/voice tags dial.
are displayed/spoken, “END OF LIST” – Press the talk switch and say ! Deleting the redial data
is displayed and the mode changes to the voice tag.
the “PHONE BOOK” menu mode. 3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu (only 1. Select the “REDIAL” menu.
after saying the voice tag). 2. Select the phone number by operating
4. Press the preset button (from to the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
) to which you want to register the 3. Select the “DELETE” menu.

Black plate (265,1)
Audio 5-45
4. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. 5. Say the preferred phone number to be ! Callback
– Then “DELETED” is displayed and called.
1. Select the “CALL BACK” menu.
the selected redial data is deleted. 6. Select the “DIAL” menu.
2. Press the OFF hook switch .
! Deleting the callback data 3. Select the preferred number by turning
! Making a phone call from speed dial
1. Select the “CALLBACK” menu. It is possible to select a phone number 4. Perform either of the following proce-
2. Select the phone number by operating from speed dial registered with the in- dures.
the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. vehicle equipment to make a phone call.
– Press the OFF hook switch .
3. Select the “DELETE” menu. – Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial,
1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
then select the “DIAL” menu.
5
2. Press the preset button (from to
– Then “DELETED” is displayed and ) to which the preferred number is
the selected callback data is deleted. registered. ! Making a phone call from list name
3. Press the OFF hook switch . It is possible to select a phone number
! Making a phone call from the list name registered with the in-
! Making a phone call by saying name vehicle equipment to make a phone call.
NOTE For details, refer to “List names function”
1. Select the top menu (phone menu). When a preset button for which num- F5-43.
2. Press the talk switch . bers are not registered is pressed, an
error message is indicated on the audio ! Top redial
3. Say “DIAL BY NAME”.
screen. 1. Select the top menu (phone menu).
4. Press the talk switch again.
5. Say the preferred name (voice tag) to ! Redial 2. Press the OFF hook switch and
be called. load the outgoing call history.
1. Select the “REDIAL” menu. 3. Select the “DIAL” menu.
6. Select the “DIAL” menu.
2. Press the OFF hook switch .
! Making a phone call by saying 3. Select the preferred number by turning ! Taking a phone call and declining
number the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. an incoming call
4. Perform either of the following proce- To take a phone call: Press the OFF
1. Select the top menu (phone menu). dures. hook switch .
2. Press the talk switch . – Press the OFF hook switch .
3. Say “DIAL BY NUMBER”. – Press the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial, To put an incoming call on hold (only if
4. Press the talk switch again. then select the “DIAL” menu. the cell phone has this function): Press the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (266,1)
5-46 Audio
ON hook switch briefly. ! Adjustable level of each volume – Press the talk switch and say
the number.
To decline an incoming call (only if the
cell phone has this function): Press and Volume Range Initial setting 5. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
hold the ON hook switch . Phone call 0 to 14 7
! Locking the phonebook
! Ending a call Voice 0 to 14 7
1. Select the “PHBK LOCK”/“PHONE-
Press the ON hook switch . Voice guidance 0 to 6 3 BOOK LOCK” menu.
! Volume control – Then “CURRENT PIN?” is dis-
& Bluetooth® setting played.
! Security setting 2. Input the PIN code by performing
either of the following procedures.
After selecting the “SECURITY” menu, – Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
perform the following procedures. dial.
! Setting PIN code – Press the talk switch and say
The PIN code is a 4-digit number and is the number.
used when locking the phonebook. 3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu.
– If the inputted PIN code is correct,
1. Select the “SET PIN” menu. “LOCKED” is displayed and the pho-
– Then “CURRENT PIN?” is dis- nebook is locked.
played.
2. Input the current PIN code by perform- NOTE
You can adjust the phone call volume, the ing either of the following procedures.
voice volume and the voice guidance While the phonebook is locked, if the
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH”
volume. Refer to “Volume control switch” dial.
operation restricted menu is selected,
F5-31. “PHBK LOCK” is displayed.
the number. ! Unlocking the phonebook
1. Select the “PHBK UNLOCK”/“PHONE-
4. Input the new PIN code by performing BOOK UNLOCK” menu.
– Then “CURRENT PIN?” is dis-
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” played.
dial.

Black plate (267,1)
Audio 5-47
NOTE mode. ! List phones function
If the phonebook is not locked, “UN- 2. Select the cell phone by performing The cell phone voice tags saved in the cell
LOCK” is displayed and the mode either of the following procedures. phone list are spoken by using the list
changes to the security mode. – Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” phones function.
2. Input the PIN code by performing dial.
– Press the talk switch and say 1. Select the “LIST PHONES” menu.
the voice tag. – If no cell phones are registered,
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” “EMPTY” is displayed and the mode
dial. 3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu (only
after saying the voice tag). changes to the “PHONE SETUP”
the number. – “SELECTED” is displayed, the se- mode. 5
lected cell phone is connected to the 2. Registered cell phones are displayed
3. Select the “CONFIRM” menu. in the saved order. While displayed, if the
in-vehicle equipment and the mode
– If the inputted PIN code is correct, “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial is turned, the
changes to the “PHONE SETUP”
“UNLOCKED” is displayed and the next registered cell phone is displayed.
mode.
phonebook is unlocked. Press the ON hook button to close the
! Changing the voice tag of the cell Hands-free menu.
! Phone setup phone 3. Select a cell phone by performing
After selecting the “PHONE SETUP” either of the following procedures.
menu, perform the following procedures. 1. Select the “CHANGE NAME” menu.
– If no cell phones are registered,
! Setting pair phone dial.
“EMPTY” is displayed and the mode
changes to the “PHONE SETUP” – Press the talk switch .
Refer to “Preparation for using the Hands-
free system” F5-37. mode. 4. After “SELECTED” is displayed, you
2. Select the cell phone by performing can select the following menus.
! Selecting phone either of the following procedures. . “SELECT PHONE” to connect the
To select the registered cell phone for – Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” selected cell phone
connecting to the in-vehicle equipment, dial. . “CHANGE NAME” to change the voice
perform the following procedure. – Press the talk switch and say tag
1. Select the “SELECT PHONE” menu. the voice tag. . “DELETE” to delete the selected cell
– If no cell phones are registered, 3. Register the voice tag. For details, phone from the list
“EMPTY” is displayed and the mode refer to “Preparation for using the Hands- . “GO BACK” to go back to the “PHONE
changes to the “PHONE SETUP” free system” F5-37. SETUP” mode
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (268,1)
5-48 Audio
! Setting passkey ! System setup operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.

After selecting the “SYSTEM SETUP”
1. Select the “SET PASSKEY” menu. menu, perform the following procedures.
– After the currently set passkey is Select the following menus by operating
displayed, a new passkey can be the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
entered.
2. Input the new passkey by performing ! Setting guidance volume
either of the following procedures. To set the guidance volume, perform the
– Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” following procedure.
dial.
1. Select the “GUIDANCE VOL”/“GUI-
DANCE VOLUME” menu.
the passkey.
2. Set the guidance volume by operating
– The new passkey is displayed, the
passkey is changed and the mode ! Initializing the registered data
changes to the “PHONE SETUP”
mode. To initialize the registered data, perform
the following procedure.
! Deleting registered cell phone from 1. Select the “INITIALIZE” menu.
the list
1. Select the “DELETE” menu. – First “PLEASE WAIT”, then “INITI-
2. Select a cell phone to be deleted by ALIZED” is displayed. The registered
performing either of the following proce- data is initialized and the mode
dures. changes to the last mode.
dial. ! Selecting language
– Press the talk switch and say To select the language, perform the
the voice tag. following procedure.
1. Select the “SEL LANGUAGE”/“SE-
– “DELETED” is displayed, the data is LECT LANGUAGE” menu.
deleted and the mode changes to the
“PHONE SETUP” mode. 2. Select the preferred language by

Black plate (269,1)
Audio 5-49
Screensaver (type B audio) . Connect a USB storage device or an 4. Select “Wide” or “Normal” by operating
iPod® the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
If the following operations are not per-
formed for more than 30 seconds while NOTE
NOTE
the audio is ON, the screensaver will be The screensaver is not displayed under
the following conditions. . JPEG files that are 10 MB or less can
displayed. be saved.
. Operate any button or dial . While the ignition switch is in the
. If the file name is too long, the file
. Shift the shift lever/select lever to the “LOCK” position
may not be saved.
“R” position . While the audio is OFF
. Up to two JPEG files can be saved in
. While the screen is OFF
. A cell phone registered in the Hands-
. While talking on a cell phone regis-
the in-vehicle equipment. 5
free system is called . If the aspect ratio of the displayed
tered in the Hands-free system
picture is 16:9, “Wide” cannot be
If one of the following operations is . While setting the audio
selected.
performed, the screensaver turns off and . While seek tuning, PTY group tun-
. If the aspect ratio of the displayed
the operation screen will be displayed. ing, scan tuning or auto-storing while
picture is 4:3, “Normal” cannot be
. A cell phone registered in the Hands- the FM/AM radio is on.
selected.
free system is called . While the rear view camera is being
used & Selecting pictures
If one of the following operations is
1. Select the “Picture Select” menu by
performed, the screensaver turns off. & Downloading pictures operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. For
However, the operation screen will not
be displayed.
Perform the following procedure to down- details, refer to “Audio settings (type B
. Operate any button or any dial in a
load a picture to be used as screensaver. audio)” F5-8.
condition other than the following condi- 1. Connect a USB storage device. Refer – If no pictures are saved, “No Data”
tions to “Connecting USB storage device / is displayed. Press the button to
– Pressing the button while a iPod®” F5-25. return to the “Screen Saver” mode.
mode other than the CD mode is 2. Select the “Picture Download” menu 2. Select the preferred picture by operat-
selected by operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. ing the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
– Pressing the volume control buttons For details, refer to “Audio settings (type B
of the audio control buttons audio)” F5-8. & Erasing pictures
– Pressing the power switch 3. Select the preferred JPEG file by 1. Select the “Picture Erase” menu by
. Insert a CD (except reloading a CD) operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. operating the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial. For
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (270,1)
5-50 Audio
details, refer to “Audio settings (type B

audio)” F5-8.
– If no pictures are saved, “No Data”
is displayed. Press the button to
return to the “Screen Saver” mode.
2. Select the preferred picture by operat-
ing the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial.
3. Operate the “TUNE/TRACK/CH” dial
to select “OK” to erase the picture or
“Cancel” to cancel the operation.

Black plate (11,1)
Interior equipment
Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2 Floor mat (if equipped)........................................ 6-9

Dome light .......................................................... 6-2 Shopping bag hook (5-door)............................. 6-10
Cargo area light (5-door models) ......................... 6-2 Cargo area cover (5-door – if equipped).......... 6-10
Map lights ........................................................... 6-3 Using the cover ................................................. 6-10
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4 To remove the cover housing ............................. 6-11
Vanity mirror ....................................................... 6-4 Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 6-11
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-4 To install the cover housing ............................... 6-12
Glove box ........................................................... 6-5 Cargo tie-down hooks (5-door – if
Center console.................................................... 6-5 equipped) ........................................................ 6-12
Cup holders ......................................................... 6-6 Under-floor storage compartment (if
Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-6 equipped) ........................................................ 6-13 6
Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-7 Rear view camera (if equipped) ........................ 6-13
Use with a cigarette lighter (if equipped) .............. 6-8 How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-14
Ashtray (if equipped) .......................................... 6-9 Viewing range on the screen .............................. 6-15
Help line............................................................ 6-16

Black plate (274,1)
6-2 Interior equipment
Interior lights . The doors or the rear gate (5-door) are & Cargo area light (5-door
unlocked using the remote keyless entry models)
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the transmitter.
lights are turned off to avoid battery . The ignition switch is turned from the
discharge. “ACC” position to the “LOCK” position.
& Dome light The automatically illuminated dome light

remains on for several seconds and then
gradually turns off after all doors and the
rear gate (5-door) are closed.
While the light is illuminated, if any of the
following operations are performed, the
dome light turns off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to “ACC” or “ON” position.
. All doors and the rear gate (5-door) are 1) DOOR
locked using the remote keyless entry 2) OFF
transmitter. DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear
gate is opened. The light remains illumi-
The setting of the period for which the light
nated for several seconds and gradually
1) ON remains on (OFF delay timer) can be
turns off after the rear gate is closed.
2) DOOR changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
3) OFF your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for OFF: The light remains off.
models with a multi function display, the
The dome light switch has the following
setting can be changed using the display.
three positions.
For details, refer to “Multi function display
ON: The light remains on continuously. (Non-US vehicles only; if equipped)” F3-
OFF: The light remains off. 28.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate (5-
door) is opened.

Black plate (275,1)
Interior equipment 6-3
& Map lights When leaving the vehicle, make sure the following operations are performed, the
lights are turned off to avoid battery map lights turn off immediately.
discharge. . The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to the “ACC” or “ON”
NOTE position.
For the type A map lights, although the . All doors and the rear gate (5-door) are
light switches are in the ON position, locked using the remote keyless entry
the lights are automatically turned off transmitter.
after approximately 30 seconds of
illumination to prevent the vehicle The setting of the period for which the
battery from discharging. For details, lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can be
refer to “Battery drainage prevention changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
function” F2-5. your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for 6
models with a multi function display, the
! Automatic illumination (models setting can be changed using the display.
Type A with moonroof) For details, refer to “Multi function display
The map lights illuminate automatically in (Non-US vehicles only; if equipped)” F3-
the following cases. 28.
. Any of the doors other than the rear
gate is opened. (The map lights do not
illuminate when only the rear gate is
opened.)
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated map lights
Type B
remain on for several seconds and then
gradually turn off after all doors are
To turn on the map light, push the switch. closed.
To turn it off, push the switch again.
While the lights are on, if any of the

Black plate (276,1)
Sun visors & Vanity mirror Storage compartment

CAUTION
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid . Always keep the storage com-
being temporarily blinded by the partment closed while driving to
glare of bright light. reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the

sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

Black plate (277,1)
& Glove box & Center console

The center console box provides a sto-
rage space.
6
For some models, the armrest is adjus-
1) Lock table. Slide the armrest to the desired
2) Unlock position.
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To 1) Paper holder
close it, push the lid firmly upward. 2) Pen holder
3) Card holder
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
The top of the console can be used as an
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
armrest.
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.

Black plate (278,1)
Cup holders Bottle holders
CAUTION CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup . Do not pick up a bottle from the
holder or put a cup in the holder bottle holder or put a bottle in the
while you are driving, as this may holder while you are driving, as
distract you and lead to an this may distract you and lead to
accident. an accident.
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev- . When placing a beverage in a
erages, if hot, might scald you door pocket, make sure it is
and/or your passengers. Spilled capped. Otherwise, the beverage
beverages may also damage up- Front passenger’s cup holder could spill when opening/closing
holstery or carpets. A dual cup holder is built into the center the door or while driving and, if
. When a cup in the rear passen- console. the beverage is hot, it could scald
ger’s cup holder contains a bev- you and/or your passengers.
erage, do not fold down the rear
seatback. Otherwise, the bever-
age could spill and, if the bev-
erage is hot, it could scald you
and/or your passengers.
Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped)

The door pocket equipped on each door
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

Black plate (279,1)
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles Accessory power outlets below the climate control dials and in the
and other items. center console. Electrical power (12V DC)
from the battery is available at any of the
outlets when the ignition switch is in either
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120W. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
outlets simultaneously, the total power
6
consumed by them must not exceed
120W.
Power outlet below the climate control
dials
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlets.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not
in use.
Power outlet in the center console
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12V DC.
Accessory power outlets are provided
The maximum power rating of an
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (280,1)
appliance that can be connected do, do not use the electrical . The electrical power socket is
is 120W. Do not use an appliance appliance while driving. originally designed to use a gen-
which exceeds the indicated wat- uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
tage for each outlet. plug. Do not use a non-genuine
When using appliances con- & Use with a cigarette lighter (if cigarette lighter plug in the sock-
nected to two outlets simulta- equipped) et. Doing so may cause a short-
neously, the total power con- To use the accessory power outlet as a circuit and overheating, resulting
sumed by them must not exceed cigarette lighter socket, purchase the in a fire.
120W. Overloading the accessory cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional . If the socket is ever used for a
power outlet can cause a short accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is plug-in accessory such as a cell
circuit. Do not use double adap- available from your SUBARU dealer. phone, that may damage the
ters or more than one electrical The cigarette lighter operates only when portion of the socket’s internal
appliance. the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” mechanism that causes a cigar-
. If the plug on your electric appli- position. ette lighter plug to “pop out”
ance is either too loose or too To use the cigarette lighter, push in the after its lighter element is heated.
tight for the accessory power knob and wait a few moments. It will Therefore, do not place a cigar-
outlet, this can result in a poor automatically spring up when ready for ette lighter plug in a socket that
contact or cause the plug to get use. has been used, even once, to
stuck. Only use plugs that fit power a plug-in accessory. Doing
properly. WARNING so may cause the plug to stick
and overheat, creating a potential
. Use of an electric appliance in the fire hazard.
To avoid being burned, never grasp
accessory power outlet for a long
the lighter by the end with the
period of time while the engine is
heating element. Doing so could
not running can cause battery
result in injury and could also
discharge.
damage the heating element.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will CAUTION
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accel- . Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
erator and brake pedals. If they because it will overheat.

Black plate (281,1)
Ashtray (if equipped) Floor mat (if equipped)
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep 6
the ashtray open, the fire of the The portable ashtray can be installed in
cigarette may spread to another each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
cigarette butt and start a fire. locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
. Do not put flammable material in holders” F6-6. For the locations of the side floor.
the ashtray. bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders” F6- The floor mat should be properly secured
6. using the built-in grommets, by placing the
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray. When using the ashtray, open the lid of the grommets over the pins and pushing them
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the downward.
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (282,1)
Shopping bag hook (5-door) Cargo area cover (5-door – if

equipped)
CAUTION The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
Do not hang items on the shopping
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
detachable to make room for additional
more.
cargo.
& Using the cover
CAUTION
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat designed with
grommets in the correct loca-
tions.
. Make sure the driver’s floor mat
is placed back in its proper
location and correctly secured A shopping bag hook is attached to each
on its retaining pins. Also, do side of the cargo area.
not use more than one floor mat. To extend the cover, pull the end of the
If the floor mat slips forward and cover out of the housing, then insert its
interferes with the movement of hooks into the catches as shown. To
the pedals during driving, it rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
could cause an accident. it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.

Black plate (283,1)
WARNING & To remove the cover housing & Stowage of the cargo area
1. Rewind the cover. cover
Do not place anything on the ex- The cargo area cover can be stowed in
tended cover. Putting excessive under the cargo floor.
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
6
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover.
Scratches on the stays could cause 2. Push the cover housing to the right
leakage of gas from the stays, which side and shorten it.
may result in their inability to hold 3. Take it off the retainer. 1. Raise and fold the rear end of the
the rear gate open. cargo floor board.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (284,1)
2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo & To install the cover housing Cargo tie-down hooks
area end.
1. Shorten the cover housing. (5-door – if equipped)
3. Put the cargo floor board back while

hanging two retaining straps on the hooks 2. Insert both ends of the cover housing
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-
that are located on the rear wall of cargo into the recesses of the retainers.
down hooks so that cargo can be secured
area. with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the front tie-down hooks, turn
them down out of the storing recesses.
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
The maximum load capacity is 22
lbs (10 kg) per hook.

Black plate (285,1)
Under-floor storage compart- driving to reduce the risk of Rear view camera (if
ment (if equipped) injury in the event of a sudden equipped)
stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
4-door models A rear view camera is attached to the

For 4-door models, the storage compart- trunk lid or rear gate. When the ignition
ments are located under the floor of the switch is “ON” and the shift lever (MT
trunk. They can be used to store small models) or select lever (CVT models) is
items. set to “R”, the rear view camera auto-
matically displays the rear view image
NOTE behind the vehicle on one of the following
. The shape of the storage compart- displays.
ment may be different depending on . Navigation display (if equipped)
the model. . Multifunction display (if equipped)
. When storing a flat tire, put the . Type B audio display (if equipped)
storage tray in the trunk.
WARNING
CAUTION
. Since the rear view camera uses
. Always keep the lids closed while a wide-angle lens, the image on
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (286,1)
the monitor is different from the device, do not subject it to strong cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
actual view in terms of distance. impacts. Otherwise, malfunction, detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
. Since the range of the image on fire or electric shock may occur. dry cloth.
the monitor is limited, you should . If mud or snow sticks to or is . When waxing the vehicle, be careful
always check the rear view and frozen on the camera, you must not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
the surrounding area with your be very careful when removing it. comes in contact with the camera,
eyes and mirrors, and move Otherwise, damage to the camera moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
backward at a slow speed. Mov- may cause a fire or electric neutral detergent to remove the wax.
ing backward only by checking shock. Pour water or lukewarm . The camera lens has a hard coating
the rear view image from the water over the camera to remove to help prevent scratches. However,
camera could cause an accident. mud and ice, and wipe it with a when washing the vehicle or cleaning
soft, dry cloth. the camera lens, be careful not to
. Do not disassemble or modify the scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
camera, switch or wiring. If . Do not put a flame close to the washing brush directly on the camera
smoke comes out or you smell camera or wiring. Otherwise, da- lens. The image quality of the rear view
a strange odor, stop using the mage or fire may occur. camera may deteriorate.
rear view camera immediately. . When replacing the fuse, be sure . Strong light shined on the camera
Contact your SUBARU dealer to use a fuse with the specified lens may develop vertical lines around
for an inspection. Continued use rating. Use of a fuse with a the light source. This is not a malfunc-
may result in accident, fire or different rating may result in a tion.
electric shock. malfunction. . Under fluorescent light, the display
. If the rear view camera is used for may flicker. However, this is not a
a long time while the engine is malfunction.
CAUTION . The image of the rear view camera
not operated, the battery may
. If your vehicle is washed with a become completely discharged. may be slightly different from the
high-pressure washer, do not actual color of the objects.
allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry of water in the NOTE & How to use the rear view
camera lens may result in con- . Do not wipe the camera with alcohol, camera
densation, malfunction, fire or benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove When the shift lever/select lever is set to
electric shock. “R”, the rear view camera automatically
. Since the camera is a precision contamination, wipe the camera with a
displays the rear view image from the

Black plate (287,1)
vehicle. When the lever is set to other the camera lens (occasionally, there
positions, the image before setting to “R” are vertical lines on the screen).
is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”. & Viewing range on the screen
2. Set the shift lever/select lever to “R”.
CAUTION
NOTE The range that can be viewed with
. For models with the genuine the rear view camera is limited.
SUBARU navigation system, the image Always be sure to check with your
of the rear view camera has priority eyes when moving backward and
over other screen displays. However, proceed slowly.
while the navigation system is acti- 6
vated, the image of the rear view Range of view
camera is not displayed.
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
side view mirror.
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rear view camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place. Range of view
– An object (such as raindrops, Image from camera
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the The area from the rear end of the bumper
view of the rear view camera sticks can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
to the lens of the camera. bumper and areas just under the bumper
– Strong light shined directly on cannot be viewed.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (288,1)
Also, the image from the rear view camera wide projection on its upper part such as a the help lines together with the rear view
looks shorter than the actual distance. sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec- image.
tion cannot be seen on the screen.
CAUTION
& Help line
. When moving backward, always
The help line (distance marker and vehicle check the back with your eyes
width line) is a guide to help you realize without relying on the help lines.
the actual distance from the screen image.
. The actual position may be dif-
ferent from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
Range of view
when the vehicle is inclined
against the road, the indication
is different from the actual posi-
tion.
! Difference between screen image

1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line) and actual road
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line) The distance markers show the distance
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper for a level road when the vehicle is not
(green horizontal line) loaded. It may be different from the actual
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper distance depending on the loading condi-
(yellow horizontal line) tions or road conditions.
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
Image from camera 6) Vehicle centerline
The area above the camera cannot be
When the shift lever/select lever is set to
viewed. If there is an object that has a
position “R”, the monitor screen displays

Black plate (289,1)
! When there is an upward slope at the ! When there is a downward slope at ! Feature of distance marker
back the back
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
1) 3 feet (1 m) 1) 3 feet (1 m) 2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance on the screen looks farther The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance. than the actual distance. The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
NOTE close behind, distance cannot be correctly
When cargo is loaded, the rear view displayed.
distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance as in an
upward slope.

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (13,1)
Starting and operating
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3 Shift lock function ............................................. 7-22

Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3 Driving tips........................................................ 7-23
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-4 Power steering................................................... 7-23
State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-7 Braking ............................................................... 7-24
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8 Braking tips....................................................... 7-24
Starting the engine.............................................. 7-8 Brake system .................................................... 7-25
MT models .......................................................... 7-8 Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-25
CVT models ........................................................ 7-9 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-26
Stopping the engine........................................... 7-10 ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-26
Remote engine start system (dealer ABS warning light.............................................. 7-26
option).............................................................. 7-10 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Starting your vehicle .......................................... 7-11 system ............................................................. 7-27
Remote start safety features ............................... 7-11 Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-27 7
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-28
start................................................................. 7-12 Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-29
Remote start confirmation transmitter Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch ................ 7-30
feature ............................................................. 7-12 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start (U.S.-spec. models)......................................... 7-31
shutdown......................................................... 7-13 Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-32
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the
vehicle ............................................................. 7-13 Parking brake .................................................... 7-32
Service mode ..................................................... 7-14 Parking tips ....................................................... 7-33
Remote transmitter program ............................... 7-14 Hill start assist system...................................... 7-34
System maintenance .......................................... 7-14 To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist
system ............................................................ 7-35
Manual transmission.......................................... 7-16 Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF
Shifting speeds .................................................. 7-17 indicator light .................................................. 7-37
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-17 Cruise control (if equipped) .............................. 7-37
Continuously variable transmission ................. 7-18 To set cruise control .......................................... 7-37
Select lever ........................................................ 7-19 To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-38
Selection of manual mode (if equipped) .............. 7-20 To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-39
Selection of “L” (if equipped).............................. 7-21

Black plate (14,1)
Starting and operating
To change the cruising speed ............................. 7-39 Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-40
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 7-40

Black plate (295,1)
Starting and operating 7-3
Fuel nozzle. Under no circumstances should system performance may deteriorate and
leaded gasoline be used because it will the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
damage the emission control system and function indicator light may turn on. If this
CAUTION may impair driveability and fuel economy. happens, return to your authorized
! Gasoline for California-certified SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
Use of a fuel which is low in quality determined that the condition is caused
LEV
or use of an inappropriate fuel by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
additive may cause engine damage. If your vehicle was certified to California’s be covered by your warranty.
low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
indicated on the underhood tune-up label, ! Gasoline for cleaner air
& Fuel requirements it is designed to optimize engine and Your use of gasoline with detergent
emission performance with gasoline that additives will help prevent deposits from
The engine is designed to operate using
meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali- forming in your engine and fuel system.
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in This helps keep your engine in tune and
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
! Fuel octane rating
any other state than California, your
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
7
This octane rating is the average of the Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out- for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
Research Octane and Motor Octane side California is permitted to have higher high quality fuel with the proper detergent
numbers and is commonly referred to as sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor- and other additives, you should never
the Anti Knock Index (AKI). mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter need to add any fuel system cleaning
Using a gasoline with a lower octane and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or agents to your fuel tank.
rating can cause persistent and heavy smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
a different brand of unleaded gasoline Many gasolines are now blended with
knocking, which can damage the engine. materials called oxygenates. Use of these
Do not be concerned if your vehicle having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related before returning fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service. (Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with (ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
the specified octane rating and your ! MMT your vehicle, but should contain no more
vehicle knocks heavily or persistently. Some gasoline contains an octane-en- than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
! Unleaded gasoline hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- proper operation of your SUBARU.
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler you use such fuels, your emission control
now producing reformulated gasolines,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (296,1)
7-4 Starting and operating
which are designed to reduce vehicle problems which result from the use of
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of improper fuel are not covered under the
reformulated gasoline. SUBARU Limited Warranty.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, CAUTION
you should ask your service station
operators if their gasolines contain deter- Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
gents and oxygenates and if they have surfaces of the vehicle. Because
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- fuel may damage the paint, be sure
sions. to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
As additional guidance, only use fuels
is not covered under the SUBARU
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
Limited Warranty.
following description.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified & Fuel filler lid and cap
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is ! Refueling
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline. Only one person should be involved in
Methanol can be used in your vehicle refueling. Do not allow others to approach
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
mixture AND if it is accompanied by pipe while refueling is in progress.
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol- Be sure to observe any other precautions
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to that are posted at the service station.
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are 1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
experienced and you suspect they may be release lever up. The lever is on the floor
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso- at the left of the driver’s seat.
line before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability

Black plate (297,1)
WARNING slowly counterclockwise.
Before opening the fuel filler cap, WARNING

first touch the vehicle body or a
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
metal portion of the fuel pump or
mable. Before refueling, always
similar object to discharge any
first stop the engine and close all
static electricity that may be present
vehicle doors and windows.
on your body. If your body is carry-
Make sure that there are no
ing an electrostatic charge, there is
lighted cigarettes, open flames
a possibility that an electric spark
or electrical sparks in the adja-
could ignite the fuel, which could
cent area. Only handle fuel out-
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
doors. Quickly wipe up any
static electric charge, do not get
spilled fuel.
back into the vehicle while refueling 3. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
is in progress. . When opening the cap, grasp it inside the fuel filler lid. 7
firmly and turn it slowly to the
left. Do not remove the cap WARNING
quickly. Fuel may be under pres-
sure and spray out of the fuel . When refueling, insert the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot nozzle securely into the fuel filler
weather. If you hear a hissing pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
sound while you are removing fully inserted, its automatic stop-
the cap, wait for the sound to ping mechanism may not func-
stop and then slowly open the tion, causing fuel to overflow the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying tank and creating a fire hazard.
out and creating a fire hazard.
1) Open
2) Close
2. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (298,1)
. Stop refueling when the auto- dicator light” F3-12. whenever the low fuel warning
matic stop mechanism on the light illuminates. Engine misfires
fuel nozzle activates. If you con- CAUTION as a result of an empty tank
tinue to add fuel, temperature could cause damage to the en-
changes or other conditions . Never add any cleaning agents to gine.
may cause fuel to overflow from the fuel tank. The addition of a
the tank and create a fire hazard. cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler . After refueling, turn the cap to the
pump automatically stops. Do not add any right until it clicks to ensure that
more fuel. it is fully tightened. If the cap is
5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise not securely tightened, fuel may
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain leak out while the vehicle is being
not to catch the tether under the cap while driven or fuel spillage could
tightening. occur in the event of an accident,
6. Close the fuel filler lid completely. creating a fire hazard.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, . Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the surfaces of the vehicle. Because
painted surface could be damaged. fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
NOTE quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of . Always use a genuine SUBARU
the vehicle. fuel filler cap. If you use the
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened wrong cap, it may not fit or have
until it clicks or if the tether is caught proper venting and your fuel tank
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE and emission control system
warning light/malfunction indicator may be damaged. It could also
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in- . Immediately put fuel in the tank

Black plate (299,1)
State emission testing (U.S. inspect your vehicle’s emission control . A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
system. If your vehicle does not pass this the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
only) test, some states may deny renewal of properly operating (light is illuminated or is
your vehicle’s registration. not working due to a burned out bulb) or
WARNING there is one or more diagnostic trouble
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
that monitors the performance of the
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model
engine’s emission control system. Certi- . A state emission inspection may reject
must NEVER be performed on a (not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
fied emission inspectors will inspect the
single two-wheel dynamometer. At-
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
tempting to do so will result in READY” is greater than one. If the
part of the state emission inspection
uncontrolled vehicle movement and vehicle’s battery has been recently re-
process. The OBDII system is designed
may cause an accident or injuries to placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
to detect engine and transmission pro-
persons nearby. inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII not ready for the emission test. Under this
inspections apply to all 1996 model year condition, the vehicle driver should be 7
CAUTION instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
days to reset the readiness monitors and
. At state inspection time, remem- Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
return for an emission re-inspection.
ber to tell your inspection or bia have implemented emission inspec-
service station in advance not to tion of the OBDII system. . Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle . The inspection of the OBDII system should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
on a two-wheel dynamometer. consists of a visual operational check of service.
Otherwise, serious transmission the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal- Some states still use dynamometers in
damage will result. function indicator light (MIL) and an their emission inspection program. A
. Resultant vehicle damage due to examination of the OBDII system with an dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
improper testing is not covered electronic scan tool. testing device that allows your vehicle’s
under the SUBARU Limited War- . A vehicle passes the OBDII system wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
ranty and is the responsibility of inspection if proper operation of the one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
the state inspection program or “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob- on a dynamometer, tell your emission
its contractors or licensees. served, there are no stored diagnostic inspector not to place your SUBARU
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
California and a number of federal states monitors are all complete. ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to sion damage will result.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (300,1)
The U.S. Environmental Protection Preparing to drive Starting the engine

Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing You should perform the following checks
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU and adjustments every day before you CAUTION
AWD vehicles from the portion of the start driving.
testing program that involves a two-wheel Do not operate the starter motor
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
dynamometer. There are some states that continuously for more than 10 sec-
lights are clean and unobstructed.
use four-wheel dynamometers in their onds. If the engine fails to start after
2. Check the appearance and condition operating the starter for 5 to 10
testing program. When properly used, this
of the tires. Also check tires for proper seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
inflation. more before trying again.
AWD vehicle.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
Under no circumstances should the rear leaks.
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor 4. Check that the hood, trunk (4-door) NOTE
should the driveshaft be disconnected for and rear gate (5-door) are fully closed. It may be difficult to start the engine
state emission testing. 5. Check the adjustment of the seat. when the battery has been discon-
6. Check the adjustment of the inside nected and reconnected (for mainte-
and outside mirrors. nance or other purposes). This diffi-
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your culty is caused by the electronically
passengers have fastened their seatbelts. controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
8. Check the operation of the warning ignition switch in the “ON” position
and indicator lights when the ignition for approximately 10 seconds before
switch is turned to the “ON” position. starting the engine.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
& MT models
NOTE 1. Apply the parking brake.
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
washer fluid and other fluid levels cessories.
should be checked daily, weekly or at 3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
fuel stops. and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting

Black plate (301,1)
the engine. the ignition switch again to the “OFF” If the engine does not start, try the
The starter motor will only operate when position. After waiting for 10 seconds following.
the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the or longer, turn the ignition switch to the (1) Turn the ignition switch to the
floor. “START” position without depressing “OFF” position and wait for at least
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” the accelerator pedal. 10 seconds. After checking that the
position and check the operation of the (4) If the engine still refuses to start, parking brake is firmly set, turn the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to contact your nearest SUBARU dealer ignition switch to the “START” position
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-9. for assistance. while depressing the accelerator pedal
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator slightly (approximately a quarter of the
position without depressing the accelera- lights have turned off after the engine has full stroke). Release the accelerator
tor pedal. Release the key immediately started. The fuel injection system auto- pedal as soon as the engine starts.
after the engine has started. matically lowers the idle speed as the (2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
If the engine does not start, try the engine warms up. the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
following. position and wait for at least 10
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the & CVT models seconds. Then fully depress the accel- 7
erator pedal and turn the ignition
“OFF” position and wait for at least 1. Apply the parking brake. switch to the “START” position. If the
10 seconds. After checking that the 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- engine starts, quickly release the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the cessories. accelerator pedal.
ignition switch to the “START” position
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N” (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
while depressing the accelerator pedal
position (preferably the “P” position). the ignition switch again to the “OFF”
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator The starter motor will only operate when position. After waiting for 10 seconds
pedal as soon as the engine starts. the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position. or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” “START” position without depressing
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
position and check the operation of the the accelerator pedal.
the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
position and wait for at least 10 warning and indicator lights. Refer to (4) If the engine still refuses to start,
seconds. Then fully depress the accel- “Warning and indicator lights” F3-9. contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
erator pedal and turn the ignition 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” for assistance.
switch to the “START” position. If the position without depressing the accelera- 6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
engine starts, quickly release the tor pedal. Release the key immediately lights have turned off after the engine has
accelerator pedal. after the engine has started. started. The fuel injection system auto-
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn matically lowers the idle speed as the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (302,1)
engine warms up. Stopping the engine Remote engine start system
While the engine is warming up, make (dealer option)
The ignition switch should be turned off
sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
“N” position and that the parking brake is
engine is idling. WARNING
applied.
WARNING . Do not remote start a vehicle in
CAUTION
an enclosed environment (e.g.
Do not stop the engine when the closed garage). Prolonged opera-
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving. This will cause tion of a motor vehicle in an
vehicle is moving, shift the select
loss of power to the power steering enclosed environment can cause
lever into the “N” position. Do not
and the brake booster, making steer- a harmful build-up of Carbon
attempt to place the select lever of a
ing and braking more difficult. It Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
moving vehicle into the “P” posi-
could also result in accidental acti- harmful to your health. Exposure
tion.
vation of the “LOCK” position on the to high levels of Carbon Monox-
ignition switch, causing the steering ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
wheel to lock. ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly start-
ing the engine.

Black plate (303,1)
tions before starting, and if all safety transmitter is within the operating range of
parameters are correct, the engine will the system.
start within 5 seconds. Upon successful
engine start, the remote start confirmation & Remote start safety features
transmitter button will flash twice every 5 For safety and security reasons, the
seconds* and the vehicle will honk the system will fail to start and honk the horn
horn and flash the side marker lights, tail twice or shut down the engine during
lights and the parking lights once, then the remote start operation if any of the
lights will illuminate and remain illumi- following occur:
nated, indicating that the engine is run-
ning. While the vehicle is operating via the . Any of the doors or the trunk / rear gate
remote engine start function, the power are open / opened (*the vehicle’s horn will
window features will be disabled. Also, the honk six times and the side marker lights,
system has a timer and will shut down tail lights and the parking lights will flash
six times indicating that a vehicle door or
& Starting your vehicle after 15 minutes if you do not operate the
trunk / rear gate was open when the 7
vehicle. Press and hold the “ ” button for
NOTE 2 seconds to turn the engine off. The remote engine start system was acti-
All vehicle doors, the engine hood and remote start confirmation transmitter but- vated).
trunk / rear gate must be closed prior to ton will flash three times* indicating that . The brake pedal is depressed
activating the remote engine start sys- the engine has shut down. If the starter . The key was already in the ignition
tem. Any open entry point will prevent cranks but does not start or starts and switch
starting or cause the system to shut stalls, the remote engine start system will . The engine hood is opened
down. power off and then attempt to start the . The remote start system “Service
The remote engine start function is acti- engine an additional three times unless mode” is engaged
vated by pressing the “ ” button twice the remote engine start system deter- . The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
within 3 seconds on your remote engine mines that a vehicle malfunction is pre- reached a level over 3,500 RPM
start transmitter. Upon successful activa- venting the system from starting. If the . The alarm is triggered by opening a
tion the remote start confirming transmitter engine does not start after additional door or the rear gate.
button will flash once* and the vehicle will attempts, the remote engine start system
will abort and return to a non-activate . The select lever is not in the “P”
honk the horn and flash the side marker position (CVT models)
lights, tail lights and parking lights once. state.
The system will check certain precondi- *: Provided that the remote engine start In addition to the items above, if the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (304,1)
vehicle’s engine management system remote keyless entry transmitter will dis-
determines there is a safety risk due to a arm the alarm system. Refer to “Alarm
vehicle related problem, the vehicle will system” F2-12.
shut down and the vehicle’s horn will honk 2. Enter the vehicle.
three times. 3. The engine will shut down when any
NOTE door or trunk/rear gate is opened.
4. Insert the key into the ignition switch
. If the alarm system is armed at the
and turn to the “START” position to restart
time of remote engine start activation
the engine.
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed & Remote start confirmation
throughout the remote start run cycle. transmitter feature
. If the alarm system is disarmed at Your remote engine start transmitter is
the time of remote engine start activa- equipped with a unique bidirectional con-
tion (the security indicator light on the firmation feature. This feature will allow
combination meter is not flashing), the the transmitter’s backlit button to display
alarm system will remain disarmed the status of the system under the condi-
throughout the remote start run cycle. tion that the vehicle and transmitter are
within the operational range of the system.
& Entering the vehicle while it Typical transmitter button flash sequences
are outlined in the following chart.
is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior
to activating the remote engine start
system) and the engine will turn off.
Inserting the key into the ignition switch
and turning it to the “ON” position or
pressing the unlock button “ ” on the

Black plate (305,1)
Transmitter flash sequence Feature description

& Entering the vehicle follow-
ing remote engine start shut-
Flashes when button is
pressed Indicates that the system is transmitting an RF signal. down
Indicates that the transmitter did not receive the remote start An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
Two long flashes following re- activation confirmation from the vehicle system. The transmitter opened by the remote keyless entry
mote start activation (transmit- will automatically send one additional remote start activation
ter button is pressed two times transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
within 3 seconds) attempt. This usually occurs when the operational range is at its ately following remote engine start shut-
limit or has been exceeded.
down.
One flash following remote Indicates that the engine is running via remote start. If the
start activation (transmitter transmitter is moved outside of the operating range of the
button is pressed two times system, this sequence will timeout after the normal 15-minute & Pre-heating or pre-cooling
within 3 seconds) vehicle run cycle. the interior of the vehicle
Indicates that the engine is running via remote start. If the Models with automatic climate control
2 flashes every 5 seconds transmitter is removed outside of the operating range of the system:
system, this sequence will timeout after the normal 15-minute
vehicle run cycle. After the system starts the engine, the 7
Indicates that the engine has turned off due to a remote start automatic climate control system will
3 flashes system 15-minute timeout, vehicle safety parameter or normal activate the “FULL AUTO” mode and heat
shutdown. or cool the interior to the predetermined
median (room) temperature. No pre-
setting of controls is necessary.
Models with manual climate control
system:
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-
perature controls to the desired setting
and operation. After the system starts the
engine, the heater or air conditioning will
activate and heat or cool the interior to
your setting.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (306,1)
& Service mode & Remote transmitter program one time.

In service mode, the remote engine start New transmitters can be programmed to 7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
function is temporarily disabled to prevent the remote engine start system in the transmitters (the system will accept up to
the system from unexpectedly starting the event that a transmitter is lost, stolen, eight transmitters).
engine while being serviced. damaged or additional transmitters are 8. The system will exit the transmitter
To engage or disengage service mode: desired (the system will accept up to eight learn mode if the key is turned to the
1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle transmitters). New remote engine start “LOCK” position, the door is closed or
doors and the trunk/rear gate. transmitters can be programmed accord- after 2 minutes.
2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P” ing to the following procedure.
position (CVT models) 1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s & System maintenance
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal door must remain opened throughout the NOTE
entire process).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
position 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal. replaced, discharged or disconnected,
5. Press and release the remote engine 3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then it will be necessary to start the vehicle
start transmitter “ ” button three times. “LOCK”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”, back a minimum of one time using the key
The system will honk the vehicle’s horn to “ON” then “LOCK”, then back to “ON” prior to activating the remote engine
each time the button is pressed. again and leave the ignition “ON” through- start system. This is required to allow
out the programming process. the vehicle electronic systems to re-
6. The system will pause for 1 second
then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to 4. The system will flash the side marker synchronize.
indicate that the service mode has been lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn three times, indicating that ! Changing the batteries
engaged or honk one time to indicate that
the service mode has been disengaged. the system has entered the transmitter
learn mode. CAUTION
5. Press and release the “ ” button on
NOTE the transmitter that you want to program. . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
When taking your vehicle in for service, or in the remote engine start
6. The system will flash the side marker transmitter when replacing the
it is recommended that you inform the lights, tail lights and parking lights and
service personnel that your vehicle is battery.
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
equipped with a remote engine start system has learned the transmitter. Upon . Be careful not to damage the
system. successful programming, the remote start printed circuit board in the re-
confirmation transmitter button will flash mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.

Black plate (307,1)
. Be careful not to allow children to

touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo- 3. Remove the circuit board from the
The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
CR-2032) supplied in your remote engine cated on the back side lower left corner of bottom half of the case and remove the 7
start transmitter should last approximately the transmitter. batteries and replace with new ones. Be
one year, depending on usage. When the 2. Carefully pry the remote engine start sure to observe the (+) sign on the old
batteries begin to weaken, you will notice transmitter halves apart using a small flat- batteries before removing them to ensure
a decrease in range (distance from the head screwdriver. that the new batteries are inserted prop-
vehicle that your remote control operates). erly (battery “+” should be pointed away
Follow the instructions below to change from the transmitter circuit board on both
the remote engine start transmitter bat- batteries).
teries. 4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system.
NOTE
. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (308,1)
ference, and (2) this device must Manual transmission WARNING

accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause . Do not drive the vehicle with the
undesired operation. clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
Changes or modifications not ex- clutch pedal is depressed) or
pressly approved by the party respon- with the shift lever in the neutral
sible for compliance could void the position. Engine braking has no
user’s authority to operate the equip- effect in either of these condi-
ment and void warranty. tions and the risk of an accident
. To comply with the FCC RF expo- is consequently increased.
sure compliance requirements, no . Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,
change to the antenna or the device is release the clutch pedal) sud-
permitted. Any change to the antenna denly when starting the vehicle.
or the device could result in the device By doing so the vehicle might
exceeding the RF exposure require- unexpectedly accelerate or the
ments and void user’s authority to The manual transmission is a fully syn- transmission could malfunction.
operate the device. chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re-
verse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift CAUTION
lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to
reverse gear, first return the shift lever to Shift into reverse ONLY when the
the neutral position then shift into reverse vehicle has completely stopped. It
gear. may cause damage to the transmis-
sion to try shifting into reverse when
To change gears, fully depress the clutch the vehicle is moving.
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.

Black plate (309,1)

mph (km/h)
& Shifting speeds Except XV CROSSTREK
& Driving tips
Gear XV CROSSTREK
! Recommended shifting speeds models models Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
The best compromise between fuel econ- 1st 30 (48) 28 (46) hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
omy and vehicle performance during 2nd 55 (89) 53 (86) upgrade. Either of those actions may
normal driving is ensured by shifting up cause clutch damage.
at the speeds listed in the following table. 3rd 80 (130) 78 (126)
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
Shift up mph (km/h) shift lever. This may cause wear on the
WARNING transmission components.
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40) When shifting down a gear, ensure When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
that the vehicle is not travelling at a speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
3rd to 4th 40 (64) speed exceeding the Maximum Al- or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
4th to 5th 45 (72) lowable Speed for the gear which is lower gear before the engine starts to
about to be selected. Failure to labor. 7
! Maximum allowable speeds observe this precaution can lead to
On steep downgrades, downshift the
engine over-revving and this in turn
The following table shows the maximum transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as
can result in engine damage.
speeds that are possible with each differ- necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will In addition, sudden application of speed and to extend brake pad life.
enter the red area if these speeds are engine brakes when the vehicle is In this way, the engine provides a braking
exceeded. travelling on a slippery surface can effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
With the exception of cases where sudden lead to wheel locking; as a conse- the brakes while descending a hill, they
acceleration is required, the vehicle quence, control of the vehicle may may overheat and not work properly.
should not be driven with the tachometer’s be lost and the risk of an accident
needle inside the red area. Failure to increased. The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
observe this precaution can lead to when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
excessive engine wear and poor fuel rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
NOTE phenomenon is not an indication of a
economy.
Never exceed the posted speed limit. problem in your vehicle.

Black plate (310,1)
Continuously variable trans- . Avoid shifting from one of the long, steep hill, the engine speed or the
forward driving positions into the vehicle speed may automatically be
mission
“R” position or vice versa until reduced. This is not a malfunction. This
The continuously variable transmission is the vehicle has completely phenomenon results from the engine
electronically controlled and provides an stopped. Such shifting may control function maintaining the cool-
infinite number of forward speeds and 1 cause damage to the transmis- ing performance of the vehicle. The
reverse speed. For some models, it also sion. engine and vehicle speed will return to
has a manual mode or an “L” position. . When parking the vehicle, first a normal speed when the engine is able
securely apply the parking brake to maintain the optimum cooling per-
WARNING and then place the select lever in formance after the heavy load de-
the “P” position. Avoid parking creases. Driving under a heavy load
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” for a long time with the select must be performed with extreme care.
position into the “D” or “R” position lever in any other position as Do not try to pass a vehicle in front
while depressing the accelerator doing so could result in a dead when driving on an uphill slope while
pedal. This may cause the vehicle battery. towing.
to jump forward or backward. . The continuously variable transmis-
sion is a chain type system that
NOTE provides superior transmission effi-
CAUTION . Immediately after transmission fluid ciency for maximum fuel economy. At
is replaced, you may feel that the times, depending on varying driving
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position conditions, a chain operating sound
only after the vehicle is comple- transmission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation may be heard that is characteristic of
tely stopped. Shifting while the this type of system.
vehicle is moving may cause of data which the on-board computer
damage to the transmission. has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
. Do not race the engine for more most appropriate times for the current
than 5 seconds in any position condition of your vehicle. Optimized
except the “N” or “P” position shifting will be restored as the vehicle
when the brake is applied or continues to be driven for a while.
when chocks are used in the . When driving a CVT model under
wheels. This may cause the continuous heavy load conditions such
transmission fluid to overheat. as when towing a camper or climbing a

Black plate (311,1)
& Select lever shift while pressing the select lever When the ignition switch has been turned
button in. to the “LOCK” position, movement of the
: Shift while pressing the select lever select lever from the “N” to “R” position is
button in. possible for a limited time period by
: Shift without pressing the select depressing the brake pedal, and then it
lever button. becomes impossible. For details, refer to
The select lever has four positions, “P”, “Shift lock function” F7-22.
“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “L” or “M” ! N (Neutral)
gate. This position is for restarting a stalled
! P (Park) engine. In this position, the transmission is
neutral, meaning that the wheels and
This position is for parking the vehicle and transmission are not locked. Therefore,
starting the engine. In this position, the the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
transmission is mechanically locked to
1) Select lever button prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or foot brake is applied.
7
When you park the vehicle, first apply the Avoid coasting with the transmission in
parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P” neutral. Engine braking has no effect in
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only this condition.
the mechanical friction of the transmis-
sion. WARNING
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
Do not drive the vehicle with the
other position, you should depress the
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
brake pedal fully then move the select
position. Engine braking has no
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
effect in this condition and the risk
lurching when it is started.
of an accident is consequently in-
! R (Reverse) creased.
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
1) Models with “L” position shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
2) Models with manual mode vehicle completely then move the lever to NOTE
the “R” position while pressing the select If the select lever is in the “N” position
: With the brake pedal depressed,
lever button in. when you stop the engine for parking,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (312,1)
you may not subsequently be able to manual mode, refer to “Selection of

move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If manual mode” F7-20. Once the vehicle
this happens, turn the ignition switch to speed stabilizes, the transmission will
the “ON” position. You will then be able switch from the manual mode back to
to move the select lever to the “P” the “D” position for normal driving.
position.
& Selection of manual mode (if
! D (Drive)
equipped)
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically and con-
tinuously into a suitable gear according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
you require. Also, while driving up and
down a hill, the transmission assists and 1) Upshift indicator
controls the driving performance and 2) Downshift indicator
engine braking while corresponding to 3) Gear position indicator
the road grade. When the manual mode is selected, the
When more acceleration is required in the gear position indicator and upshift indica-
“D” position, depress the accelerator tor and/or downshift indicator on the
pedal fully to the floor and hold that combination meter illuminate.
position. The transmission will automati- The gear position indicator shows the
cally downshift. When you release the With the vehicle either moving or station- currently selected gear in the 1st-to-6th-
pedal, the transmission will return to the ary, move the select lever from the “D” gear range. The upshift and downshift
original gear position. position to the “M” position to select the indicators show when a gear shift is
manual mode. possible. When the upshift indicator “ ”
For models with manual mode, if one of
the shift paddles behind the steering illuminates, upshifting is possible. When
wheel is operated while driving in the “D” the downshift indicator “ ” illuminates,
position, the transmission will temporarily downshifting is possible. When both in-
switch to the manual mode. In this mode, dicators illuminate, upshifting and down-
you can shift into any gear position using shifting are both possible. When the
the shift paddles. For details about the vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
signals), the downshift indicator turns off.

Black plate (313,1)
Gearshifts can be performed using the NOTE & Selection of “L” (if equipped)
shift paddle behind the steering wheel. Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
a downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating “L” is for using engine braking when going 7
To upshift to the next higher gear position, the shift paddle twice in rapid succes- down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated sion. the selector lever from the “D” position to
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear . The transmission automatically se- the “L” position.
position, pull the shift paddle that has “–” lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
indicated on it. moving.
. If the temperature of the transmis-
To deselect the manual mode, return the sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
select lever to the “D” position from the “M” OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi-
position. nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe location
CAUTION
and let the engine idle until the warning
Do not place or hang anything on light turns off.
the shift paddles. Doing so may
result in accidental gear shifting.
When selected, the indicator “L” will

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (314,1)
! Shift lock release using the shift

illuminate on the combination meter. ! Shift lock release
lock release button
To deselect “L”, move the selector lever to If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
Perform the following procedure to release
the “D” position. the ignition switch back to the “ON”
the shift lock.
position then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the select lever button 1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
& Shift lock function engine.
pressed and brake pedal depressed.
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever. If the select lever does not move after
. The select lever cannot be operated performing the above procedure, perform
unless the ignition switch is turned to the the following steps.
“ON” position and the brake pedal is . When the select lever cannot be
depressed. shifted from “P” to “N”:
. The select lever cannot be moved from Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
the “P” position to any other position lock release button” F7-22.
before the brake pedal is depressed. . When the select lever cannot be
Depress the brake pedal first, and then shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
operate the select lever. Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn tion switch in the “ACC” position, move the
the ignition switch from the “ACC” position select lever to the “P” position with the
to the “LOCK” position and remove the select lever button pressed and brake 2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
key from the ignition switch. pedal depressed. with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to
. If the ignition switch is turned to the remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock
“LOCK” position while the select lever is in If you must perform the above procedure, release button is located under the shift
the “N” position, the select lever may not the shift lock system (or the vehicle control lock cover.
be moved to the “P” position after a period system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
of time. Therefore, move the select lever SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
to the “P” position with the brake pedal as possible.
depressed soon after the ignition switch is If the select lever does not move after
turned to the “LOCK” position. performing the above procedure, refer to
“Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” F7-22.

Black plate (315,1)
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary Power steering

position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
malfunction.
3. While depressing the brake pedal,

insert a screwdriver into the hole, press 7
the shift lock release button using a Power steering warning light
screwdriver, and then move the select 1) U.S.-spec. models
lever. 2) Except U.S.-spec. models
If the select lever does not move after The vehicle is equipped with an electric
performing the above procedure, the shift power steering system. When the ignition
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con- switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection power steering warning light on the
as soon as possible. combination meter illuminates to inform
the driver that the warning system is
& Driving tips functioning properly. Then, if the engine
. Always apply the foot or parking brake started, the warning light turns off to inform
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or the driver that the steering power assist is
“R” position. operational.
. Always apply the parking brake when
CAUTION
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the mechanical friction When the power steering warning
of the transmission.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (316,1)
light is illuminated, there may be if the power steering is operated in a Braking

more resistance when the steering non-standard way which causes power
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to assist limitation to occur too fre- & Braking tips
the nearest SUBARU dealer and quently, this may result in a malfunc-
have the vehicle inspected immedi- tion of the power steering control WARNING
ately. system.
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
NOTE dangerous overheating of the
If the steering wheel is operated in the brakes and needless wear on the
following ways, the power steering brake pads and linings.
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
! When the brakes get wet
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from When driving in rain or after washing the
overheating. vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
. The steering wheel is operated fre- result, brake stopping distance will be
quently and turned sharply while the longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low at a safe speed while lightly depressing
speeds, such as while frequently turn- the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
ing the steering wheel during parallel ! Use of engine braking
parking. Remember to make use of engine braking
. The steering wheel remains in the in addition to foot braking. When descend-
fully turned position for a long period ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
of time. the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
At this time, there will be more resis-
caused by overheated brake pads. To
tance when steering. However this is
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to
not a malfunction. Normal steering
get stronger engine braking.
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and ! Braking when a tire is punctured
the power steering control system has Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
an opportunity to cool down. However, when a tire is punctured. This could cause

Black plate (317,1)
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep ! Brake assist system cate any malfunctions, and the brake
driving straight ahead while gradually assist system is operating properly.
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal
road to a safe place. is applied by lighter force and gener-
Do not be overconfident about the ates a greater braking force.
& Brake system brake assist. It is not a system that . You might hear an ABS operating
brings more braking ability to the noise from the engine compartment.
! Two separate circuits vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
Your vehicle has two separate circuit ity. Always use the utmost care
brake systems. Each circuit works diag- when driving regarding vehicle & Disc brake pad wear warning
onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of speed and safe distance. indicators
the brake system should fail, the other half
of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer CAUTION
to the floor than usual and you will need to
When you need to brake suddenly,
7
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the continue depressing the brake pedal
vehicle. strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not It assists the brake power when the driver
turn off the engine while driving because cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
that will turn off the brake booster, result- and the brake power is insufficient.
ing in poor braking power. Brake assist generates the brake power The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
The brakes will continue to work even according to the speed at which the driver tors on the disc brakes give a warning
when the brake booster completely stops depresses the brake pedal. noise when the brake pads are worn.
functioning. If this happens, however, you If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
will have to depress the pedal much NOTE
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
harder than normal and the braking dis- When you depress the brake pedal
mediately have your vehicle checked by
tance will increase. strongly or suddenly, the following
your SUBARU dealer.
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-

Black plate (318,1)
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- vehicles. from the engine compartment. This is
. When driving on badly surfaced caused by an automatic functional test of
tem) the ABS system being carried out and
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of over deep newly fallen snow, does not indicate any abnormal condition.
wheels which may occur during sudden stopping distances may be long-
braking or braking on slippery road sur- er for a vehicle with the ABS & ABS warning light
faces. This helps prevent the loss of system than one without. When Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-16.
steering control and directional stability driving under these conditions,
caused by wheel lock-up. therefore, reduce your speed and
leave ample distance from other
When the ABS system is operating, you vehicles.
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal . When tire chains are installed,
when the ABS operates. stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS
The ABS system will not operate when the system than one without. Be sure
vehicle speed is below approximately 6 to reduce your speed and main-
mph (10 km/h). tain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front.
WARNING . When you feel the ABS system
Always use the utmost care in operating, you should maintain
driving – overconfidence because constant brake pedal pressure.
you are driving a vehicle with the Do not pump the brake pedal
ABS system could easily lead to a since doing so may defeat the
serious accident. operation of the ABS system.
CAUTION & ABS system self-check

Just after the vehicle is started, you may
. The ABS system does not always feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
decrease stopping distance. You to when the ABS operates, and you may
should always maintain a safe also hear the sound of the ABS working
following distance from other

Black plate (319,1)
Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system warning light illuminate simultaneously,
malfunctions take the following steps.
tribution (EBD) system
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
The EBD system maximizes the effective- flat location.
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear 2. Shut down the engine, apply the
brakes to supply a greater proportion of parking brake, and then restart it.
the braking force. It functions by adjusting 3. Release the parking brake. If both
the distribution of braking force to the rear warning lights turn off, the EBD system
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to
loading condition and speed. the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
The EBD system is an integral part of the system inspected.
ABS system and uses some of the ABS 4. If both warning lights illuminate again
system’s components to perform its func- and remain illuminated after the engine
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak- has been restarted, shut down the engine
ing force. If any of the ABS components again, apply the parking brake, and check
7
used by the EBD system malfunction, the If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system, the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”
EBD system also stops working. the system stops working and the brake F11-15.
system warning light and ABS warning 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
light illuminate simultaneously. “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
and does not indicate a malfunction. nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
the brake system warning light and ABS
system inspected.
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving. 6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
conventional braking system will still func-
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
tion. However, the rear wheels will be
more prone to locking when the brakes
are applied harder than usual and the WARNING
vehicle’s motion may therefore become
somewhat harder to control. . Driving with the brake system
If the brake system warning light and ABS warning light illuminated is dan-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (320,1)
gerous. This indicates your brake Vehicle Dynamics Control that full vehicle control will be
system may not be working system maintained at all times and under
properly. If the light remains all conditions, its activation
illuminated, have the brakes in- should be seen as a sign that
spected by a SUBARU dealer WARNING the speed of the vehicle should
immediately. be reduced considerably.
. If at all in doubt about whether Always use the utmost care in . Whenever suspension compo-
the brakes are operating prop- driving – overconfidence because nents, steering components, or
erly, do not drive the vehicle. you are driving a vehicle with the an axle are removed from a
Have your vehicle towed to the Vehicle Dynamics Control system vehicle, have an inspection of
nearest SUBARU dealer for re- could easily lead to a serious acci- that system performed by an
pair. dent. authorized SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
CAUTION be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
. Even if your vehicle is equipped trol system is operating properly:
with Vehicle Dynamics Control – All four wheels should be
system, winter tires should be fitted with tires of the same
used when driving on snow-cov- size, type, and brand. Further-
ered or icy roads; in addition, more, the amount of wear
vehicle speed should be reduced should be the same for all
considerably. Simply having a four tires.
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
– Keep the tire pressure at the
tem does not guarantee that the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle will be able to avoid
vehicle placard attached to
accidents in any situation.
the driver’s side door pillar.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
– Use only the specified tem-
namics Control system is an
porary spare tire to replace a
indication that the road being
flat tire. With a temporary
travelled on has a slippery sur-
spare tire, the effectiveness
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
namics Control is no guarantee

Black plate (321,1)
trol system is reduced and maintain traction and directional control. stable than it feels to the driver. The
this should be taken into ac- Activation of this function is shown by Vehicle Dynamics Control System may
count when driving the vehi- flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control therefore operate. Such operation does
cle in such a condition. operation indicator light. not indicate a system malfunction.
. If non-matching tires are used, – on gravel-covered or rutted
. Skid Suppression Function roads
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
The skid suppression function is designed – on unfinished roads
system may not operate cor-
to help maintain directional stability by – when the vehicle is towing a
rectly.
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide trailer (trailer towing permitted with
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sideways during steering operations. Acti-
system helps prevent unstable XV CROSSTREK models only)
vation of this function is shown by flashing
vehicle motion such as skidding – when the vehicle is fitted with
the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
using control of the brakes and snow tires or winter tires
indicator light.
engine power. Do not turn off the . Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
NOTE Control system will cause operation of
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
the steering wheel to feel slightly 7
tem unless it is absolutely ne- . The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
cessary. If you must turn off the tem may be considered normal when different compared to that for normal
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys- the following conditions occur. conditions.
tem, drive very carefully accord- – Slight twitching of the brake . It is always important to reduce
ing to the road surface condition. pedal is felt. speed when approaching a corner,
– The vehicle or steering wheel even if your vehicle is equipped with
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding shakes to a small degree. the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
on a slippery road surface and/or during – An operating sound from the . Always turn off the engine before
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, engine compartment is heard replacing a tire. Failure to do so may
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system briefly when starting the engine render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
adjusts the engine’s output and the and when driving off after starting system unable to operate correctly.
wheels’ respective braking forces to help the engine.
maintain traction and directional control.
– The brake pedal seems to jolt & Vehicle Dynamics Control
. Traction Control Function when driving off after starting the system monitor
The traction control function is designed to engine. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on . In the circumstances shown in the ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to following list, the vehicle may be less tion indicator light” F3-19 and “Vehicle
– CONTINUED –
北米Model "A1140BE-B" EDITED: 2015/ 12/ 9

Black plate (322,1)
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” F3- Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
21. Control OFF indicator light turns off.
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
& Vehicle Dynamics Control deactivated, traction and stability en-
OFF switch hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is unavailable. Therefore
you should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem will be activated automatically
Indicator light when the engine is started.
Pressing the switch to deactivate the . If the switch is held down for 30
Vehicle Dynamics Control system can seconds or longer, the indicator light
facilitate the following operations. turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
. a standing start on a steeply sloping system is activated, and the system
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or ignores any further pressing of the
otherwise slippery surface switch. To make the switch usable
. extrication of the vehicle when its again, turn the ignition switch to the
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow “LOCK” position and restart the en-
gine.
When the switch is pressed during engine . When the switch is pressed to
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
OFF indicator light “ ” on the combination trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics formance is comparable with that of a
Control system will be deactivated and the vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
vehicle will behave like a model not Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
trol system. When the switch is pressed system except when absolutely neces-
again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics sary.

Black plate (323,1)
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics Tire pressure monitoring WARNING

Control system is deactivated, compo-
nents of the brake control system may
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
If the low tire pressure warning light
still activate. When the brake control models) illuminates while driving, never
system is activated, the Vehicle Dy- brake suddenly and keep driving
namics Control operation indicator straight ahead while gradually redu-
light flashes. cing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the tire
placard on the door pillar on the 7
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- very short distance, the tires get
vides the driver with a warning message warm and their pressures increase
by sending a signal from a sensor that is accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
installed in each wheel when tire pressure cool thoroughly before adjusting
is severely low. their pressures to the standard
The tire pressure monitoring system will values shown on the tire placard.
activate only when the vehicle is driven at Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-21.
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, The tire pressure monitoring system
this system may not react immediately to a does not function when the vehicle
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, is stationary. After adjusting the tire
a blow-out caused by running over a pressures, increase the vehicle
sharp object). speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)
to start the TPMS re-checking of the
tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (324,1)
low pressure threshold, the low tire CAUTION Parking your vehicle
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later. . Do not place metal film or any & Parking brake
If this light still illuminates while metal parts in the cargo area/ To set the parking brake, depress the
driving after adjusting the tire pres- trunk. This may cause poor re- brake pedal firmly and hold it down until
sure, a tire may have significant ception of the signals from the the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.
damage and a fast leak that causes tire pressure sensors, and the
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have tire pressure monitoring system
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire will not function properly.
as soon as possible. . FCC WARNING
When a spare tire is mounted or a Changes or modifications not
wheel rim is replaced without the expressly approved by the party
original pressure sensor/transmitter responsible for compliance
being transferred, the low tire pres- could void the user’s authority
sure warning light will illuminate to operate the equipment.
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all NOTE
four road wheels. Contact your This device complies with Part 15 of
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC To release the parking brake, pull the lever
for tire and sensor replacement and/ Rules. Operation is subject to the up slightly, press the release button, then
or system resetting. following two conditions: (1) this de- lower the lever while keeping the button
Do not inject any tire liquid or vice may not cause harmful interfer- pressed.
aerosol tire sealant into the tires, ence, and (2) this device must accept When the parking brake is set while the
as this may cause a malfunction of any interference received, including engine is running, the parking brake
the tire pressure sensors. If the light interference that may cause undesired warning light illuminates. After starting
illuminates steadily after blinking for operation. the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
approximately one minute, promptly has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
contact a SUBARU dealer to have Refer to “Parking brake warning” F3-17.
the system inspected.

Black plate (325,1)
CAUTION WARNING
Never drive while the parking brake . Never leave unattended children
is set because this will cause un- or pets in the vehicle. They could
necessary wear on the brake lin- accidentally injure themselves or
ings. Before starting to drive, always others through inadvertent op-
make sure that the parking brake eration of the vehicle. Also, on
has been fully released. hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
& Parking tips cause severe or possibly fatal
When parking your vehicle, always per- injuries to people.
form the following items. . Do not park the vehicle over
When parking on a hill, always turn the flammable materials such as dry
. Apply the parking brake firmly. 7
steering wheel. When the vehicle is grass, waste paper or rags, as
. For MT models, put the shift lever in the headed up the hill, the front wheels should
“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a they may burn easily if they come
be turned away from the curb. near hot engine or exhaust sys-
downgrade.
tem parts.
. For CVT models, put the select lever in
the “P” (Park) position. . Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
Never rely on the mechanical friction of engine exhaust gas enters the
the transmission alone to hold the vehicle. passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under-
When facing downhill, the front wheels spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
should be turned into the curb. optional), pay attention to blocks
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (326,1)
and other obstructions on the Hill start assist system

ground when parking. The under-
spoilers could be damaged by con-
tact with them. CAUTION
The Hill start assist system is a
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents when
the vehicle is parked on a slope, be
sure to firmly set the parking brake.
When setting the parking brake,
make sure that the vehicle remains
stationary when the clutch pedal
(MT models) or brake pedal (CVT
models) is released.
The Hill start assist system is a device to

make the following vehicle operations
easier.
1) Starting forward facing uphill

2) Starting backward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT
models)
B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)
In both these cases, the Hill start assist
system operates under the following con-

Black plate (327,1)
ditions. Hill start assist OFF indicator light is

. when the clutch pedal is depressed illuminated
while the brake pedal is also depressed When using the Hill start assist system, a
(MT models) braking effect may be felt even after the
. when the vehicle has stopped with the brake pedal has been released. However,
brake pedal depressed (CVT models) this braking effect should disappear once
Braking power is maintained temporarily the clutch pedal is released.
(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill NOTE
start assist system after the brake pedal is
released. The driver is therefore able to A slight jolt may be felt when the
start the vehicle in the same way as on a vehicle begins to move forward after
level grade, just using the clutch pedal being reversed.
(MT models only) and accelerator pedal
(all models). & To activate/deactivate the Hill 7
start assist system
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by CAUTION
depressing the brake pedal again. While the Hill start assist system is
The Hill start assist system may not deactivated, when starting on an
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill uphill grade, braking power is not
start assist system does not operate in the maintained if the brake pedal is
following cases. released. Start on an uphill grade
by using the parking brake.
. when starting backward facing uphill You can activate/deactivate the Hill start
. when starting forward facing downhill assist system according to the following
. while the parking brake is applied procedure.
. while the ignition switch is in the “ACC” NOTE
or “LOCK” position
If you make an error when performing
. while the Hill start assist warning light/
any steps in the following procedure,
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (328,1)
place the ignition switch in the “LOCK” “ / ” illuminates.

position once and then start over
again.
! To deactivate
1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe
location and apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
3. Restart the engine.
Hill start assist OFF indicator light
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch 7. Within 2 seconds after releasing the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch,
5. Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
OFF switch and hold it until the Vehicle switch once again. Then the Hill start
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light “ ” assist OFF indicator light illuminates.
on the combination meter illuminates for
8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
several seconds and then turns off.
position. The hill start assist system has
6. Within 5 seconds after the Vehicle now been deactivated.
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
turns off, release the Vehicle Dynamics
4. Confirm the following items. Control OFF switch. NOTE
. The ABS warning light “ / ” While the Hill start assist system is
turns off. deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control indicator light illuminates continuously.
warning light “ ” turns off.
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ! To activate
indicator light “ ” turns off. When the procedure to deactivate the Hill
. The Brake system warning light start assist system is performed again, the

Black plate (329,1)
system is activated. When the Hill start Cruise control (if equipped) & To set cruise control
assist system is activated, the Hill start
assist OFF indicator light turns off. Cruise control enables you to maintain a
& Hill start assist warning light/ constant vehicle speed without holding
Hill start assist OFF indicator your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
light mph (40 km/h) or more.
Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill
start assist OFF indicator light” F3-18. WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade Cruise control main button 7
. driving on slippery or winding 1. Press the cruise control main button.
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
. towing a trailer
NOTE
Make sure the cruise control system is
turned off when the cruise control is
not in use to avoid unintentionally
setting of the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator light

The cruise control indicator light on the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (330,1)
combination meter will illuminate. & To temporarily cancel the

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the cruise control
vehicle reaches the desired speed. The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways.
Cruise control set indicator light

At this time, the cruise control set indicator
light is illuminated in the combination
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the meter.
“SET” side and release it. Then release The vehicle will maintain the desired . Press the “CANCEL” button.
the accelerator pedal. speed.
. Depress the brake pedal.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in- . Depress the clutch pedal (MT models
creased while driving with the cruise only).
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi- WARNING
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle will return to and For CVT models, do not place the
maintain the previous cruising speed. select lever in the “N” position while
driving. If the select lever is shifted
into the “N” position, cruise control
can be canceled but the engine
brake will no longer work. This
could result in an accident.

Black plate (331,1)
The cruise control set indicator light in the & To turn off the cruise control U.S.-spec. models
combination meter turns off when the There are two ways to turn off the cruise When the difference between the actual
cruise control is canceled. control: vehicle speed and the set speed is less
. Press the cruise control main button than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
again. be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
by pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or “RES” side quickly.
“LOCK” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped). Except U.S. spec. models
When the difference between the actual
& To change the cruising speed vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/ increased 1 km/h each time by pressing
SET” switch) the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side
quickly. 7
! To increase the speed (by accel-
To resume the cruise control after it has erator pedal)
been temporarily canceled and with vehi- 1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32 accelerate the vehicle to the desired
km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET” speed.
switch to the “RES” side to return to the
original cruising speed automatically. 2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed
The cruise control set indicator light in the is set and the vehicle will keep running at
combination meter will automatically illu- that speed without depressing the accel-
minate at this time. erator pedal.
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” NOTE

side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
. U.S.-spec. models
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment If the difference between the actual
will be memorized and treated as the new vehicle speed when the switch is
set speed. pressed and the speed last time you
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (332,1)
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the ! To decrease the speed (by the than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph “RES/SET” switch) lowered 1 km/h each time by pressing the
(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET” side
cruise control system regards this quickly.
operation as that intended to decrease ! To decrease the speed (by brake
the vehicle speed. pedal)
. Except U.S. spec. models
If the difference between the actual 1. Depress the brake pedal to release
vehicle speed when the switch is cruise control temporarily.
pressed and the speed last time you 2. When the speed decreases to the
set is less than 4.4 km/h, the vehicle desired speed, press the “RES/SET”
speed will be lowered by 1 km/h. This switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
occurs because the cruise control desired speed is set and the vehicle will
system regards this operation as that keep running at that speed without de-
intended to decrease the vehicle pressing the accelerator pedal.
speed. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches & Cruise control indicator light
the desired speed. Then, release the Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment F3-22.
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed. & Cruise control set indicator
U.S.-spec. models
light
When the difference between the actual Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
vehicle speed and the set speed is less F3-22.
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side quickly.
Except U.S. spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less

Black plate (15,1)
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-11
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Roof rail (if equipped) ........................................ 8-14
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Roof molding and crossbar (5-door models — if
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4 equipped) ........................................................ 8-14
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-4 Trailer hitch (dealer option)............................... 8-16
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-17
Except XV CROSSTREK models .......................... 8-6 When not towing a trailer ................................... 8-18
XV CROSSTREK models ..................................... 8-6 Trailer towing (XV CROSSTREK models) ........ 8-18
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8 Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-18
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8 Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-18
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9 Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-22
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10 Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-22 8
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10 Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-24
Tire chains ......................................................... 8-11

Black plate (336,1)
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
The following suggestions will help to save
km) fuel.
The performance and long life of your . Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
tion. Always accelerate gently until you Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first
reach the desired speed. Then try to carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
maintain that speed for as long as and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm possible.
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid . Always properly maintain the en-
racing the engine. gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct . Never run the engine in a closed
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency.
tire wear and fuel consumption. . Avoid remaining in a parked
The same break-in procedures should be . Use the air conditioner only when vehicle for a lengthy time while
applied to an overhauled engine, newly necessary. the engine is running. If that is
mounted engine or when brake pads or . Keep the front and rear wheels in unavoidable, then use the venti-
brake linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo. . Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that

Black plate (337,1)
Driving tips 8-3
exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter firing or incomplete combustion), have
vehicle, have t he probl em your vehicle checked and repaired by an
checked and corrected as soon authorized SUBARU dealer.
as possible. If you must drive . Do not apply undercoating or rust
under these conditions, drive prevention treatment to the heat shield of
only with all windows fully open. catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
. Keep the trunk lid (4-door) or rear tem.
gate (5-door) closed while driving . Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
to prevent exhaust gas from level.
entering the vehicle.
WARNING
NOTE . Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
Due to the expansion and contraction or park the vehicle anywhere
of the metals used in the manufacture near flammable materials (e.g.,
of the exhaust system, you may hear a The catalytic converter is installed in the grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
crackling sound coming from the ex- exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to
operates at very high tempera-
8
haust system for a short time after the reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
engine has been shut off. This sound is gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust. tures.
normal. . Keep everyone and flammable
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver- materials away from the exhaust
ter: pipe while the engine is running.
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small The exhaust gas is very hot.
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-

Black plate (338,1)
8-4 Driving tips
Periodic inspections Driving in foreign countries Driving tips for AWD models
To keep your vehicle in the best condition When planning to use your vehicle in
at all times, always have the recom- another country: WARNING
mended maintenance services listed in . Confirm the availability of the correct
the maintenance schedule in the “War- . Always maintain a safe driving
fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3.
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per- speed according to the road and
. Comply with all regulations and re- weather conditions in order to
formed at the specified time or mileage quirements of each country.
intervals. avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing a tire, you must
use a tire that is of the same size,
circumference, construction,
brand (tread pattern), speed sym-
bol and load index as the original
tires listed on the tire placard.
Using tires of other sizes, cir-
cumferences or constructions
may result in severe mechanical
damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride,
handling, braking, speedometer/
odometer calibration, and clear-
ance between the body and tires.
It also may be dangerous and

Black plate (339,1)
Driving tips 8-5
lead to loss of vehicle control. conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
. You must install four tires that are There is little difference in handling,
of the same size, circumferences, however, during extremely sharp turns or
construction, manufacturer, sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
brand (tread pattern), degree of down a slope or turning corners, be sure
wear, speed symbol and load to reduce your speed and maintain an
index. Mixing tires of other sizes, ample distance from other vehicles.
circumferences or constructions . Always check the cold tire pressure
may result in severe mechanical before starting to drive. The recom-
damage to the drive train of your mended tire pressure is provided on the
vehicle and may affect ride, tire placard, which is located under the
handling, braking and speed- door latch on the driver’s side.
ometer/odometer calibration. It . There are some precautions that you
also may be dangerous and lead All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine must observe when towing your vehicle.
to loss of vehicle control. power to all four wheels. AWD models For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
provide better traction when driving on F9-12.
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and 8
CAUTION when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
By shifting power between the front and
If you use a temporary spare tire to rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the provide added traction during acceleration
original temporary spare tire stored and added engine braking force during
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may deceleration.
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drive train of your vehicle. Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging
the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind.
. An AWD model is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery

Black plate (340,1)
8-6 Driving tips
Off road driving result in damage not eligible for repair such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
under warranty. wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
If you do take your SUBARU off road, you
WARNING should review the common sense precau- . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
tions in the next section (applicable to the sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
. Always maintain a safe driving over rough terrain.
speed according to the road and XV CROSSTREK models) for general
guidance. But please keep in mind that . Slow down and employ extra caution at
weather conditions in order to all times. When driving off-road, you will
avoid having an accident on a your vehicle’s off-road capabilities are
more limited than those of the XV not have the benefit of marked traffic
sharp turn, during sudden brak- lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
ing or under other similar condi- CROSSTREK models.
Never attempt to drive through pools and the like.
tions.
puddles, or roads flooded with water. . Do not drive across steep slopes.
. Always use the utmost care in Instead, drive either straight up or straight
driving – overconfidence be- Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto down the slopes. A vehicle can much
cause you are driving an All- more easily tip over sideways than it can
Wheel Drive model could easily electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall. end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
lead to a serious accident. down slopes that are too steep.
& XV CROSSTREK models . Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
cially at higher speeds.
& Except XV CROSSTREK Because of the AWD feature and higher
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
models ground clearance, your SUBARU can be
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven- driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But
please keep in mind that an AWD wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain with your fingers and thumbs on the
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed SUBARU is a passenger car and is
neither a conventional off-road vehicle outside of the rim.
primarily for on-road use. The AWD . If driving through water, such as when
feature gives it some limited off-road nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take
your SUBARU off-road, certain common crossing shallow streams, first check the
capabilities in situations in which the depth of the water and the bottom of the
driving surface is relatively level, obstruc- sense precautions such as those in the
following list should be taken: stream bed for firmness and ensure that
tion-free and otherwise similar to on-road the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
driving conditions. Operating it under other . Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts. and cross the stream without stopping.
than those conditions could subject the The water should be shallow enough that
vehicle to excessive stress which might . Carry some emergency equipment, it does not reach the vehicle’s under-

Black plate (341,1)
Driving tips 8-7
carriage. Water entering the engine air piled higher than the seatbacks. During not using common sense precautions
intake or the exhaust pipe or water sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo such as those listed above is not eligible
splashing onto electrical parts may da- could be thrown around in the vehicle and for warranty coverage.
mage your vehicle and may cause it to cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
stall. Never attempt to drive through the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s
rushing water; regardless of its depth, it center of gravity and make it more prone
can wash away the ground from under to tip over.
your tires, resulting in possible loss of . If you must rock the vehicle to free it
traction and even vehicle rollover. from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
. Always check your brakes for effec- pedal slightly and move the shift lever/
tiveness immediately after driving in sand, select lever back and forth between “1”/
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat engine. For the best possible traction,
that process several times to dry out the avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
brake discs and brake pads. free the vehicle.
. Do not drive or park over or near . Never equip your vehicle with tires
flammable materials such as dry grass or larger than those specified in this manual. 8
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
exhaust system is very hot while the road driving. Suspension components are
engine is running and right after engine particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
stops. This could create a fire hazard. need to be washed thoroughly.
. After driving through tall grass, mud, . Frequent driving of an AWD model
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there under hard-driving conditions such as
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, rough roads or off roads will necessitate
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the more frequent replacement of engine oil,
underbody. Clear off any such matter from brake fluid and transmission oil than that
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with specified in the maintenance schedule
these materials trapped or adhering to the described in the “Warranty and Mainte-
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or nance Booklet”.
fire could occur.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the Remember that damage done to your
vehicle and make certain that it is not SUBARU while operating it off-road and

Black plate (342,1)
8-8 Driving tips
Winter driving SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- side temperature. If the concen-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% tration is inappropriate, sprayed
& Operation during cold surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- washer fluid may freeze on the
weather perature varies according to how much it windshield and obstruct your
is diluted, as indicated in the following view, and the fluid may freeze in
Carry some emergency equipment, such table. the reservoir tank.
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables. Washer Fluid Con-
. State or local regulations on
centration Freezing Temperature volatile organic compounds may
Check the battery and cables. Cold restrict the use of methanol, a
temperatures reduce battery capacity. 30% 10.48F (−128C) common windshield washer anti-
The battery must be in good condition to 50% −48F (−208C) freeze additive. Washer fluids
provide enough power for cold winter containing non-methanol anti-
starts. 100% −498F (−458C)
freeze agents should be used
It normally takes longer to start the engine In order to prevent freezing of washer only if they provide cold weather
in very cold weather conditions. Use an fluid, check the freezing temperatures in protection without damaging
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity the table above when adjusting the fluid your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil concentration to the outside temperature. or washer system.
will make it harder to start the engine. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
Keep the door locks from freezing by a different concentration from the one ! Before driving your vehicle
squirting them with deicer or glycerin. used previously, purge the old fluid from Before entering the vehicle, remove any
the piping between the reservoir tank and snow or ice from your shoes because that
Forcing a frozen door open may damage washer nozzles by operating the washer could make the pedals slippery and
or separate the rubber weather strips for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if driving dangerous.
around the door. If the door is frozen, the concentration of the fluid remaining in
use hot water to melt the ice, and after- the piping is too low for the outside While warming up the vehicle before
wards thoroughly wipe the water away. temperature, it may freeze and block the driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
nozzles. brake pedal, and all other controls operate
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
smoothly.
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes CAUTION Clear away ice and snow that has
because they may damage the paint of accumulated under the fenders to avoid
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
the vehicle. making steering difficult. During severe
tration appropriately for the out-

Black plate (343,1)
Driving tips 8-9
winter driving, stop when and where it is WARNING to avoid the need for sudden braking.
safe to do so and check under the fenders To supplement the foot brake, use the
periodically. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust engine brake effectively to control the
! Parking in cold weather gases under your vehicle. Keep vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and when necessary.)
Do not use the parking brake when
from around your vehicle if you park Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
parking for long periods in cold weather
the vehicle in snow with the engine vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
since it could freeze in that position.
running. leading to loss of vehicle control.
Instead, you should observe the following
tips. An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for MT ! Refueling in cold weather hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
models, or the select lever in “P” for CVT To help prevent moisture from forming in mance on snowy and icy roads. For
models. the fuel system and the risk of its freezing, information on braking on slippery sur-
2. Use tire stops under the tires to use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
prevent the vehicle from moving. tank is recommended during cold weather. System)” F7-26 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Use only additives that are specifically Control system” F7-28.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or designed for this purpose. When an
when it snows, raise the wiper blades off antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts WARNING 8
the glass to prevent damage to them. longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty. Do not use the cruise control on
When the vehicle has been left parked slippery roads such as snowy or icy
after use on roads heavily covered with If your SUBARU is not going to be used roads. This may cause loss of
snow, or has been left parked during a for an extended period, it is best to have vehicle control.
snowstorm, icing may develop on the the fuel tank filled to capacity.
brake system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow or ice & Driving on snowy and icy
buildup on the suspension, disc brakes roads
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle. To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
being careful not to damage the disc speed driving, and sharp turning when
brakes and brake hoses and ABS har- driving on snowy or icy roads.
ness. Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (344,1)
8-10 Driving tips
CAUTION despite wiper operation, use the defroster NOTE

with the airflow control dial in “ ” and the When the season requiring non-freez-
Avoid prolonged continuous driving temperature control dial set for maximum ing type wiper blades is over, replace
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the warmth. After the windshield gets warmed them with standard wiper blades.
engine’s intake system and may enough to melt the frozen snow on it,
hinder the airflow, which could re- wash it away using the windshield washer.
Refer to “Windshield washer” F3-70. & Corrosion protection
sult in engine shutdown or even
breakdown. Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
! Wiper operation when snowing

wiper from working effectively. If snow is & Snow tires
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
Before driving in cold weather, make sure a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard WARNING
the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield or rear window. warning flasher to alert other drivers. . When replacing original tires with
If the front wiper blades are frozen to the We recommend use of non-freezing type winter (snow) tires, make sure
windshield, use the defroster with the wiper blades (winter blades) during the you use only tires of the same
airflow control dial in the “ ” position seasons you could have snow and freez- size, circumference, construc-
and the temperature control dial set for ing temperatures. Blades of this type give tion, brand (tread pattern), speed
maximum warmth until the wiper blades superior wiping performance in snowy symbol and load index as the
are completely thawed out. For details, conditions. Be sure to use blades that original tires listed on the tire
refer to “Defrosting” F4-10. are suitable for your vehicle. placard. Using tires of other sizes
and constructions may affect
If your vehicle is equipped with a wind- CAUTION speedometer/odometer calibra-
shield wiper deicer, it is helpful to thaw the tion and clearance between the
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog- During high-speed driving, non- body and tires. It also may be
ger and deicer” F3-80. freezing type wiper blades may not dangerous and lead to loss of
perform as well as standard wiper vehicle control.
If the rear wiper blade is frozen to the rear blades. If this happens, reduce the
window, use the rear window defogger. . You must install four winter tires
vehicle speed. that are of the same size, circum-
Refer to “Defogger and deicer” F3-80.
ference, construction, manufac-
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts turer, brand (tread pattern), de-
to stick on the surface of the windshield gree of wear, speed symbol and

Black plate (345,1)
Driving tips 8-11
load index. Mixing tires of other clearance between the tire and vehicle warranty.
sizes or constructions may result body.
Make certain that any traction device
in severe mechanical damage to
Remember to drive with care at all times you use is an SAE class S device, and
the drive train of your vehicle and
regardless of the type of tires on your use it on the front wheels only. Always
may affect ride, handling, braking
vehicle. use the utmost care when driving with
and speedometer/odometer cali-
a traction device. Overconfidence be-
bration. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle con- & Tire chains cause you are using a traction device
could easily lead to a serious accident.
trol.
CAUTION
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires & Rocking the vehicle
Tire chains cannot be used on your
since it may cause dangerous vehicle because of the lack of If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
handling characteristics and lead clearance between the tires and snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
to an accident. vehicle body. erator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season “1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
tires” as original equipment, which are NOTE engine. For the best possible traction, 8
designed to provide an adequate measure When tire chains cannot be used, use avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
of traction, handling and braking perfor- of another type of traction device (such free the vehicle.
mance in year-round driving. In winter, it as spring chains) may be acceptable if When the road surface is extremely
may be possible to enhance performance use on your vehicle is recommended slippery, you can obtain better traction by
through use of tires designed specifically by the device manufacturer, taking into starting the vehicle with the transmission
for winter driving conditions. account tire size and road conditions. in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT
When you choose to install winter tires on Follow the device manufacturer’s in- models).
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire structions, especially regarding max-
size and type. You must install four winter If your vehicle is a CVT model, for
imum vehicle speed.
tires that are of the same size, construc- information about holding the transmission
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
tion, brand and load range and you should drive slowly, readjust or remove the
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires manual mode” F7-20.
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
since this may result in dangerous hand- and do not spin your wheels. Damage
ling characteristics. When you choose a caused to your vehicle by use of a
tire, make sure that there is enough traction device is not covered under

Black plate (346,1)
8-12 Driving tips
Loading your vehicle WARNING

ious injury.
. When you carry something inside

WARNING the vehicle, secure it whenever CAUTION
you can to prevent it from being
. Never allow passengers to ride Do not carry spray cans, containers
thrown around inside the vehicle with flammable or corrosive liquids
on a folded rear seatback, in the
during sudden stops, sharp turns or any other dangerous items inside
trunk or in the cargo area. Doing
or in an accident. the vehicle.
so may result in serious injury.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
. Never stack luggage or other
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cargo higher than the top of the NOTE
cle’s center of gravity and make it
seatback because it could tumble
more prone to tip over. For better fuel economy, do not carry
forward and injure passengers in
. Secure lengthy items properly to unneeded cargo.
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo prevent them from shooting for-
low, as close to the floor as ward and causing serious injury & Vehicle capacity weight
possible. during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the rear
shelf behind the rear seatback
(for 4-door) or the extended car-
go area cover (for 5-door). Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-

Black plate (347,1)
Driving tips 8-13
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross weight.

Vehicle Weight Rating and In addition, the total weight applied to
Gross Axle Weight Rating) each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
The load capacity of your vehicle is distributed throughout the vehicle.
determined by weight, not by available If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
cargo space. The maximum load you can should confirm that GVW and front and
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
The certification label attached to the rear GAWs are within the GVWR and 8
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
side door pillar. It includes the total weight driver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR vehicle scale, found at a commercial
of the driver and all passengers and their weighing station.
belongings, any optional equipment such (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must Do not use replacement tires with a lower
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer. never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the load range than the originals because they
combined total of weight of the vehicle, may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
optional equipment and trailer tongue range than the originals do not increase
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de- the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
pending on the situation. The GVWR
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire
assembly) plus the vehicle capacity
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (348,1)
8-14 Driving tips
& Roof rail (if equipped) roof rails must be used together & Roof molding and crossbar
with the roof rack and any appro- (5-door models — if
priate carrying attachment that equipped)
may be needed. The roof rails
must never be used alone to
carry cargo. Otherwise, damage
to the roof or paint, or a danger-
ous road hazard due to loss of
cargo could result.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
1) Roof rack load on the roof, thus affecting driving
characteristics.
Luggage can be carried on the roof after
securing the roof rack to the roof rails. Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
When installing the roof rack on the roof cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind CAUTION
rails, follow the manufacturer’s instruc- effects will be increased.
tions. The roof rails are designed to carry . For cargo carrying purposes, the
loads (luggage and roof rack) of not more roof molding must be used to-
than 150 lbs (68 kg). gether with a roof crossbar kit
and the appropriate carrying at-
CAUTION tachment. Otherwise, damage to
the roof or paint or a dangerous
. When using the roof rack, make road hazard due to loss of cargo
sure that the total carrying load could result.
of the roof rack and luggage does . When using the roof crossbar kit,
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Over- make sure that the total weight of
loading may cause damage to the crossbars, carrying attach-
the vehicle. ment and cargo does not exceed
. For cargo carrying purposes, the the maximum load limit. Over-

Black plate (349,1)
Driving tips 8-15
loading may cause damage to ! Installing carrying attachments on ! Removal and installation of the
the vehicle and create a safety the crossbars crossbars
hazard. When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
Cargo can be carried after securing the carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
installing the appropriate carrying attach- tions and make sure that the attachment is
ment. When installing the roof crossbar securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. attachments designed specifically for the
When you carry cargo on the roof using crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
the roof crossbar kit and a carrying designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-
attachment, never exceed the maximum ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg).
load limit as explained below. You should Before operating the vehicle, make sure
also be careful that your vehicle does not that the cargo is properly secured on the
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating attachment.
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle Each of the two roof moldings has two
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
NOTE mounting points for crossbars. Each 8
about loading cargo into or onto your Remember that the vehicle’s center of mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use
vehicle, refer to “Loading your vehicle” gravity is altered with the weight of the a screwdriver to remove the covers. When
F8-12. The maximum load limit of the load on the roof, thus affecting the installing the crossbars on the roof mold-
cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment driving characteristics. ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. effects will be increased.
Always properly secure all cargo.

Black plate (350,1)
8-16 Driving tips
Trailer hitch (dealer option) could get loose and create a

Maximum Maximum
traffic safety hazard. gross trailer gross ton-
. Use only the ball mount supplied weight gue weight
WARNING with this hitch. Use the hitch only XV CROSSTREK 1,500 lbs 200 lbs
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not models (680 kg) (90 kg)
. Never exceed the maximum
use with any type of weight
weight specified for the trailer
distributing hitch. When you tow a trailer, refer to “Trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum towing (XV CROSSTREK models)” F8-
weight could cause an accident . The standard bumper beam must 18.
resulting in serious personal in- be installed after you remove the
juries. Permissible trailer weight trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
changes depending on the situa- dealer for purchase of a standard
tion. For possible recommenda- bumper beam if you do not have
tions and limitations, refer to the original.
“Trailer towing (XV CROSSTREK . Safety performance is decreased
models)” F8-18. and there is increased risk of
. Trailer brakes are required when injury to passengers in the case
the towing load exceeds 1,000 of an accident if the trailer hitch
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer or a standard bumper beam is
has safety chains and that each not installed. One of them must
chain will hold the trailer’s max- always be installed on the vehi-
imum gross weight. Towing trai- cle.
lers without safety chains could . If a trailer hitch is installed, it is
create a traffic safety hazard if not possible to install the rear
the trailer separates from the towing hook.
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage. The trailer hitch is designed to tow a Class
. Be sure to check the hitch pin 1 rated load. The maximum gross trailer
and safety pin for positive lock- weight and maximum gross tongue weight
ing placement before towing a are indicated in the following table.
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer

Black plate (351,1)
Driving tips 8-17
& Connecting a trailer receiver tube. should cross under the trailer tongue to
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes ground in case it should disconnect from
through the ball mount. the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
3. Insert the safety pin onto the hitch pin chains taking tight turn situations into
securely. account; however, be careful not to let
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it them drag on the ground.
does not come off the hitch receiver.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to part
of the vehicle other than the safety
chain hooks.
1) Hitch ball installation point

2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate

for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the Hitch harness connector
1) Ball mount ball mount.
2) Hitch pin 6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball. 8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
3) Safety pin 7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with four-pin wire connector to the towing
A) Hitch receiver tube safety chains that will hold the trailer’s trailer’s wire harness.
maximum gross weight. The chains 9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (352,1)
8-18 Driving tips
wire harness by individually activating the Trailer towing (XV CROSS- injuries or vehicle damage that result from
brake, stop and turn signal lights on the trailer towing equipment, or from any
trailer.
TREK models) errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
NOTE CAUTION failure to follow the proper instructions.
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
This “Trailer towing” section is & Warranties and maintenance
applicable for XV CROSSTREK SUBARU warranties do not apply to
watercraft.
models. Other vehicle models are vehicle damage or malfunction caused
& When not towing a trailer neither designed nor intended to be by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
used for trailer towing. Therefore, tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch never tow a trailer with other vehicle
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover will be required due to the additional load.
models. (Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
onto the hitch receiver tube.
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin Your vehicle is designed and intended to and Maintenance Booklet”.)
connector of the hitch wire harness to be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
protect against possible damage. Under no circumstances should a trailer
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
with any new powertrain component (en-
four-pin connector using terminal grease. brakes, tires and suspension and has an
gine, transmission, differential, wheel
adverse effect on fuel economy.
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety (1,600 km) of driving.
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera- & Maximum load limits
tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary WARNING
towing equipment appropriate for your Never exceed the maximum load
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the limits explained in the following.
instructions on correct installation and use Exceeding the maximum load limits
provided by the trailer and other towing could cause personal injury and/or
equipment manufacturers. vehicle damage.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for

Black plate (353,1)
Driving tips 8-19

XV CROSSTREK models
CAUTION
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
. Adequate size trailer brakes are When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg) When towing a trailer with brakes. 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
total weight. When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade 750 lbs (340 kg)
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
. Before towing a trailer, check the outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are accepta-
ble.
! Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum weight in the following table.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (354,1)
8-20 Driving tips
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and ! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
(GVWR)
Certification label
GVWR is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door of your Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight vehicle. The total weight applied to each axle
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must (GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
Rating (GVWR). GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
combined total of the weight of the vehicle, cle. The front and rear GAWR are also
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, shown on the certification label.
trailer tongue load and any other optional To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
equipment installed on your vehicle. confirm that the total weight and weight
Therefore, the GVW changes depending distribution are within safe driving limits,
on the situation. Determine the GVW each you should have your vehicle and trailer
time before going on a trip by putting your weighed at a commercial weighing station.
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.

Black plate (355,1)
Driving tips 8-21

! Tongue load
1) Jack F: Front
Tongue load 2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be adjusted by
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from The tongue load can be weighed with a proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
and does not exceed the maximum value
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration Never load the trailer with more weight in 8
above. When weighing the tongue load, the back than in the front; approximately
of 200 lbs (90 kg). be sure to position the towing coupler at 60 percent of the trailer load should be in
NOTE the height at which it would be during the front and approximately 40 percent in
actual towing, using a jack as shown. the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
For vehicles with trailer brakes, the
as possible on both the left and right
trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90
sides.
kg) when calculated at 8% of the
maximum total trailer weight. Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
Even in this case, the maximum value prevent a change in weight distribution
is 200 lbs (90 kg). while driving.
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (356,1)
8-22 Driving tips
the rear axle of the towing vehicle. hitch or other trailer towing & Connecting a trailer
This may cause the rear wheels to equipment.
skid, especially during braking or ! Trailer brakes
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
when vehicle speed is reduced dur- as they can cause damage to the
ing cornering, resulting in over- axle housing, wheel bearings,
WARNING
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing. wheels or tires. . Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
& Trailer hitches trailer. The use of a genuine SUBARU total weight.
trailer hitch is recommended. A genuine
WARNING SUBARU hitch is available from your . Do not directly connect your
SUBARU dealer. trailer’s hydraulic brake system
Never drill the frame or under-body to the hydraulic brake system in
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-
of your vehicle to install a commer- your vehicle. Direct connection
able, be sure the hitch is suited to your
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger- would cause the vehicle’s brake
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may performance to deteriorate and
sional hitch supplier to assist you in
enter the passenger compartment could lead to an accident.
choosing an appropriate hitch for your
through the drilled hole. Exhaust vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch
gas contains carbon monoxide, a If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
manufacturer’s instructions for installation plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
colorless and odorless gas which is and use.
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. (453 kg), the trailer is required to be
Also, drilling the frame or under- Never use a hitch that mounts only to the equipped with its own brake system.
body of your vehicle could cause rear bumper. The bumper is not designed Electric brakes or surge brakes are
deterioration of strength of your to handle that type of load. recommended, and must be installed
vehicle and cause corrosion around For all types of hitches, regularly check properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
the drilled hole. that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are conform with Federal, state/province and/
tight. or other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
CAUTION to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
. Do not modify the vehicle ex- dealer and professional trailer supplier for
haust system, brake system, or more information about the trailer’s brake
other systems when installing a system.

Black plate (357,1)
Driving tips 8-23

! Trailer safety chains
! Side mirrors Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-
cle’s electrical system requires modifica-
WARNING tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to
increase its capacity and accommodate
Always use safety chains between
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
are connected properly, please consult
trailer without safety chains could
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
create a traffic safety hazard if the
operation of the turn signals and the brake
trailer separates from the hitch due
lights each time you hitch up.
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage. ! Tires
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch WARNING

ball should break or become discon-
nected, the trailer could get loose and Never tow a trailer when the tem-
create a traffic safety hazard. After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, porary spare tire is used. The tem-
For safety, always connect the towing check that the standard side mirrors porary spare tire is not designed to
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety provide a good rearward field of view sustain the towing load. Use of the 8
chains. Pass the chains crossing each without significant blind spots. If significant temporary spare tire when towing
other under the trailer tongue to prevent blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan- can result in failure of the spare tire
the trailer from dropping onto the ground dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that and/or less stability of the vehicle.
in case the trailer tongue should discon- conform with Federal, state/province and/
nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient or other applicable regulations. Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12-
slack in the chains taking tight turn ! Trailer lights 8.
situations into account; however, be care-
ful not to let them drag on the ground. CAUTION Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
For more information about the safety proper inflation pressure should be in
chain connection, refer to the instructions Direct splicing or other improper accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
for your hitch and trailer. connection of trailer lights may specifications.
damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
your vehicle’s lighting system. when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
road service to repair the flat tire.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (358,1)
8-24 Driving tips
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your the rear, check the total trailer weight, ! Driving with a trailer
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then . You should allow for considerably more
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare confirm that the load and its distribution stopping distance when towing a trailer.
tire is firmly secured. are acceptable. Avoid sudden braking because it may
. Check that the tire pressures are result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
& Trailer towing tips correct. control.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are . Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
CAUTION connected properly. Confirm that erations. If your vehicle has a manual
– the trailer tongue is connected transmission, always start out in first gear
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) properly to the hitch ball. and release the clutch at moderate engine
when towing a trailer in hilly – the trailer lights connector is con- revolution.
country on hot days. nected properly and trailer’s brake . Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
. When towing a trailer, steering, lights illuminate when the vehicle’s rapid lane changes.
stability, stopping distance and brake pedal is pressed, and that the . Slow down before turning. Make a
braking performance will be dif- trailer’s turn signal lights flash when longer than normal turning radius because
ferent from normal operation. For the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper- the trailer wheels will be closer than the
safety’s sake, you should employ ated. vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
extra caution when towing a – the safety chains are connected a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
trailer and you should never properly. vehicle.
drive at excessive speeds. You – all cargo in the trailer is secured
should also keep the following . Crosswinds will adversely affect the
safety in position. handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
tips in mind: – the side mirrors provide a good ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
rearward field of view without a sig- weather conditions or the passing of large
! Before starting out on a trip nificant blind spot. trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to- . Sufficient time should be taken to learn grip the steering wheel and slow down
hitch mounting are in good condition. If the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination immediately but gradually.
any problems are apparent, do not tow the before starting out on a trip. In an area free . When passing other vehicles, consid-
trailer. of traffic, practice turning, stopping and erable distance is required because of the
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally backing up. added weight and length caused by
with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
tipped sharply up at the front and down at

Black plate (359,1)
Driving tips 8-25
engine braking effect and prevent over- . For CVT models, avoid using the
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not accelerator pedal to stay stationary on
make sudden downshifts. an uphill slope instead of using the
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the parking brake or foot brake. That may
air conditioner may turn off automatically cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
to protect the engine from overheating. ! Parking on a grade
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay Always block the wheels under both
attention to the following indicators be- vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
cause the engine and transmission are the parking brake firmly. You should not
relatively prone to overheating. park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
: Coolant temperature high warning light hill or slope cannot be avoided, you
: AT OIL TEMP warning light should take the following steps:
1) Left turn (CVT models) 1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
2) Right turn down.
If the coolant temperature high warning 2. Have someone place wheel blocks
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
takes practice. When backing up with a illuminates, immediately turn off the air
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
8
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly. conditioner and stop the vehicle in the
When turning back, grip the bottom of the release the regular brakes slowly until the
nearest safe location. For further instruc-
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to blocks absorb the load.
tions and additional information, refer to
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right the following sections. 4. Apply the regular brakes and then
for a right turn. apply the parking brake; slowly release
– “If you park your vehicle in case of
. If the ABS warning light illuminates the regular brakes.
an emergency” F9-2
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing – “Engine overheating” F9-11 5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
the trailer and have repairs performed models) or “P” position (CVT models)
– “Coolant temperature low indicator
immediately by the nearest SUBARU and shut off the engine.
light/Coolant temperature high warn-
dealer. ing light” F3-13
! Driving on grades – “AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT
. Before going down a steep hill, slow models)” F3-15
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (17,1)
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in case of an Engine overheating ........................................... 9-11

emergency ........................................................ 9-2 If steam is coming from the engine
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2 compartment ................................................... 9-11
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3 If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment ................................................... 9-11
Flat tires............................................................... 9-5
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-5
Towing ................................................................ 9-12
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-12
(U.S.-spec. models) ........................................... 9-8 Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-14
Jump starting ...................................................... 9-9 Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-15
How to jump start................................................ 9-9 Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
opened............................................................. 9-16

Black plate (364,1)
9-2 In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in NOTE Temporary spare tire

case of an emergency When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
The hazard warning flasher should be original pressure sensor/trans-
used in day or night to warn other drivers mitter being transferred, the low
when you have to park your vehicle under tire pressure warning light will
emergency conditions. illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
This indicates the tire pressure
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
The hazard warning flasher can be acti- able to monitor all four road
vated regardless of the ignition switch wheels. Contact your SUBARU
position. dealer as soon as possible for
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing tire and sensor replacement and/
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it or system resetting.
off by pushing the switch again.

Black plate (365,1)
In case of emergency 9-3
CAUTION Maintenance tools

Never use any temporary spare tire Your vehicle is equipped with the following
other than the original. Using other maintenance tools.
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your . Jack
vehicle. . Jack handle
. Screwdriver
The temporary spare tire is smaller and . Towing hook (eye bolt)
lighter than a conventional tire and is . Wheel nut wrench
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de- 1) Tread wear indicator bar
signed only for temporary use. 2) Indicator location mark
Check the inflation pressure of the tem- . When the wear indicator appears on
porary spare tire periodically to keep the the tread, replace the tire.
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is . The temporary spare tire must be used
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm2). only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire 9
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
When using the temporary spare tire, note rear wheel and install the temporary spare
the following. tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (366,1)
1) Wheel nut wrench

2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
4) Towing hook (eye bolt)
A jack handle is stored under the floor of
the trunk (4-door) or the cargo area (5-
door). A jack and a towing hook are stored
in the tool bucket that is located in the
recess of the spare tire wheel.
Also, a tool bag that contains a wheel nut
wrench and a screwdriver is equipped with
the vehicle. Open the tool bag and store
1) Jack handle 1) Under-floor storage compartment (if the tools in the tool bucket as illustrated in
A) 4-door models equipped) (Refer to “Under-floor storage
compartment” F6-13.) order that all tools are ready for use at any
B) 5-door models time.
2) Tool bucket
3) Spare tire For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”
A) 4-door models
F9-5.
B) 5-door models

Black plate (367,1)
Flat tires . Always turn off the engine before 5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
raising the flat tire off the ground wheel nut wrench.
If you have a flat tire while driving, never using the jack. Never swing or The tools and the spare tire are stored
brake suddenly; keep driving straight push the vehicle supported with under the floor of the trunk (4-door) or the
ahead while gradually reducing speed. the jack. The jack can come out cargo area (5-door). Refer to “Mainte-
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe of the jacking point due to a jolt nance tools” F9-3.
place. and this can result in a severe
accident. NOTE
& Changing a flat tire Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when- cated before using it.
WARNING ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
incline or a loose road surface. or the select lever to the “P” (Park)
The jack can come out of the position (CVT models).
jacking point or sink into the 3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
ground and this can result in a and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
severe accident.
. Use only the jack provided with 9
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack. 6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear “Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire. strictly follow the instructions.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (368,1)
8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts. head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
1) Notch
2) Valve hole
Jack-up points 10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert
a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on 9. Place the jack under the side sill at the screw, and turn the handle until the tire
the opposite side of the valve hole and pry front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
the wheel cover to remove it. tire. higher than necessary.
11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.

Black plate (369,1)
WARNING torque checked at the nearest automotive

service facility.
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise

to lower the vehicle.
16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire

compartment. Put in the spacer and tight-
en the attaching bolt firmly.
Also store the jack, jack handle and wheel 9
nut wrench in their storage locations.
WARNING
15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely Never place a tire or tire changing
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified tools in the passenger compartment
torque, following the tightening order in the after changing wheels. In a sudden
12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean illustration. stop or collision, loose equipment
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer could strike occupants and cause
with a cloth. to “Tires” F12-8. Never use your foot on injury. Store the tire and all tools in
13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension the proper place.
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand. on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (370,1)
& Tire pressure monitoring brake suddenly and keep driving aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. straight ahead while gradually redu- this may cause a malfunction of the
models) cing speed. Then slowly pull off the tire pressure sensors.
road to a safe place. Otherwise an If the light illuminates steadily after
accident involving serious vehicle blinking for approximately one min-
damage and serious personal injury ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
could occur. dealer to have the system inspected.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to lose air
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
vides the driver with the warning message it with a spare tire as soon as
indicated by sending a signal from a possible.
sensor that is installed in each wheel When a spare tire is mounted or a
when tire pressure is severely low. wheel rim is replaced without the
The tire pressure monitoring system will original pressure sensor/transmitter
activate only when the vehicle is driven. being transferred, the low tire pres-
Also, this system may not react immedi- sure warning light will illuminate
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for steadily after blinking for approxi-
example, a blow-out caused running over mately one minute. This indicates
a sharp object). the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
WARNING SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
If the low tire pressure warning light or system resetting.
illuminates while driving, never Do not inject any tire liquid or

Black plate (371,1)
Jump starting eye protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start
objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
WARNING . Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. 2. If the booster battery is in another
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
vehicle. in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed . A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
area with water immediately. Get ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
medical help if the fluid has clothing, hair and tools away
entered your eyes. from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
If battery fluid is accidentally
Removing rings, watches and
swallowed, immediately drink a
ties is advisable.
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical . Jump starting is dangerous if it
done incorrectly. If you are un-
help.
sure about the proper procedure 9
Keep everyone including chil-
for jump starting, consult a com-
dren away from the battery.
petent mechanic.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is When your vehicle does not start due to a
brought near it. Do not smoke or run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
light a match while jump starting. may be jump started by connecting your
. Never attempt jump starting if the battery to another battery (called the
discharged battery is frozen. It booster battery) with jumper cables.
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (372,1)
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the

positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other
cable to the negative (−) terminal of
the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.

Black plate (373,1)
Engine overheating engine compartment. Refer to “Engine until it stops. Release the pressure from
hood” F11-5. the radiator. After the pressure has been
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If fully released, remove the cap by pressing
WARNING the fan is not turning, immediately turn off down and turning it.
the engine and contact an authorized
Never attempt to remove the radia- SUBARU dealer for repair.
tor cap until the engine has been 3. After the coolant temperature high
shut off and has fully cooled down. warning light that has blinked or illumi-
When the engine is hot, the coolant nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.
is under pressure. Removing the For details about the warning light, refer to
cap while the engine is still hot “Coolant temperature low indicator light/
could release a spray of boiling hot Coolant temperature high warning light”
coolant, which could burn you very F3-13.
seriously.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the check the coolant level in the reserve
road and stop the vehicle in a safe tank. If the coolant level is below the
location. “LOW” mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”
mark.
& If steam is coming from the NOTE 9
engine compartment For details about how to check the
. Turn off the engine and get everyone coolant level or how to add coolant,
away from the vehicle until it cools down. refer to “Engine coolant” F11-11.
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal- 5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
er. tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
& If no steam is coming from radiator with coolant.
the engine compartment
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
1. Keep the engine running at idling radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
speed. radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the clockwise slowly without pressing down

Black plate (374,1)
Towing & Towing and tie-down hooks

The towing hooks should be used only in
If towing is necessary, it is best done by an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial from mud, sand or snow).
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety. CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hook. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
front bumper and the towing 2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
hook, do not apply excessive with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
lateral load to the towing hook. scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head
screwdriver into the cutout of the cover
and pry open the cover.
Front towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
WARNING out of the tool bucket. Take the jack
handle out of the trunk (4-door) or cargo
Never tow AWD models (both CVT area (5-door).
and MT models) with the front
wheels raised off the ground while
the rear wheels are on the ground,
or with the rear wheels raised off the
ground while the front wheels are on
the ground. This will cause the
vehicle to spin away due to the
operation or deterioration of the
center differential.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

Black plate (375,1)
hole until its thread can no longer be seen. Rear towing hook:
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
out of the tool bucket. Take the jack
handle out of the trunk (4-door) or cargo
area (5-door).
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread

4. Tighten the towing hook securely hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
using the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper 9
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
WARNING hook.
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag 4. Tighten the towing hook securely
system in a frontal collision. using the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (376,1)
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket. Rear tie-down holes: WARNING
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
WARNING downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
Do not use the towing hook except other direction, cables may slip out
when towing your vehicle. of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
Front tie-down hooks:
& Using a flat-bed truck
The front tie-down hooks are located

between each of the front tires and the
front bumper. This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1) Rear tie-down hole
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
The rear tie-down holes are located near position for CVT models. Shift the shift
each of the jack-up reinforcements. lever into the “1st” position for MT models.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier

Black plate (377,1)
properly with safety chains. Each safety 2. The ignition switch should be in the . For CVT models, the traveling
chain should be equally tightened and “ACC” position while the vehicle is being speed must be limited to less
care must be taken not to pull the chains towed. than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. 3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to traveling distance to less than 31
prevent damage to the vehicle. miles (50 km). For greater speeds
CAUTION and distances, transport your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
WARNING
If your vehicle has a front under-
spoiler and rear underspoiler (both . Never turn the ignition switch to
optional), be careful not to scrape the “LOCK” position while the
them when placing the vehicle on vehicle is being towed because
the carrier and when removing the the steering wheel and the direc-
vehicle from the carrier. tion of the wheels will be locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
& Towing with all wheels on the and power steering do not func-
ground tion when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal 9
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed using this method. Trans-
mission damage could result if
1. Release the parking brake and put the the vehicle is towed with the
transmission in the “N”/neutral position. engine running.

Black plate (378,1)
Rear gate – if the rear gate

cannot be opened
In the event that you cannot open the rear
gate by operating the rear gate opener
button, you can open it from inside the
cargo area.
3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to

the right position using a flat-head screw-
driver or a similar tool.
1. Remove the access cover at the

bottom-center of the rear gate trim.
2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind
the rear gate trim panel.
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate open
lever with fingers because doing so
may cause an injury. Always use a
flat-head screwdriver or a similar
tool.

Black plate (19,1)
Appearance care
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2 Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5

Washing............................................................. 10-2 Seat fabric ......................................................... 10-5
Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3 Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3 Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4 Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4 panel, console panel, and switches .................. 10-5
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4 Monitor (if equipped).......................................... 10-6
10

Black plate (382,1)
10-2 Appearance care
Exterior care brushes could become tangled flushed from the surface and not allowed
around it, damaging the wiper to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
& Washing arm and other components. Ask with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
the automatic car-wash operator remaining water off with a chamois or soft
CAUTION not to let the brushes touch the cloth.
wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm ! Washing the underbody
. When washing the vehicle, the on the rear window glass with
brakes may get wet. As a result, adhesive tape before operating Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
the brake stopping distance will the machine. deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
be longer. To dry the brakes, rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
drive the vehicle at a safe speed derbody components, such as the exhaust
while lightly depressing the NOTE system, fuel and brake lines, brake
brake pedal to heat up the When having your vehicle washed in cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
brakes. an automatic car wash, make sure pension.
beforehand that the car wash is of Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
. Do not wash the engine compart-
suitable type. side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
ment and area adjacent to it. If
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s water at frequent intervals to reduce the
water enters the engine air intake
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the harmful effects of such agents.
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine trouble or a malfunction vehicle at least once a month to avoid Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
of electrical equipment. contamination by road grime. components may accelerate their corro-
. Do not use any organic solvents Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty sion.
when washing the surface of the of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash After driving off-road or on muddy or
bulb assembly cover. However, if the vehicle with hot water and in direct sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
a detergent with organic solvents sunlight. the underbody. Carefully flush the suspen-
is used to wash the cover sur- sion and axle parts, as they are particu-
face, completely rinse off the Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do
detergent with water. Otherwise, sap, and bird droppings should be washed not use a sharp-edged tool to remove
the cover surface may be da- off by using a light detergent, as required. caked mud.
maged. If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
. For 5-door models, since your
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
vehicle is equipped with a rear
cleaning agents should be promptly
w i p e r, a u t o m a t i c c a r - w a s h

Black plate (383,1)
Appearance care 10-3
CAUTION Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, solvents on the surface of the bulb
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of assembly cover. However, if a polish
. Be careful not to damage brake wax on a painted surface leads to loss of or wax with organic solvents is
hoses, sensor harnesses, and the original luster and also quickens the applied to the cover surface, com-
other parts when washing sus- deterioration of the surface. It is recom- pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
pension components. mended that a coat of wax be applied at Otherwise, the cover surface may be
. Be careful not to flush the engine least once a month, or whenever the damaged.
bottom for a long time. It may surface no longer repels water.
cause damage of some electrical If the appearance of the paint has dimin- NOTE
parts. ished to the point where the luster or tone Be careful not to block the windshield
cannot be restored, lightly polish the washer nozzles with wax when waxing
! Using a warm water washer surface with a fine-grained compound. the vehicle.
Never polish just the affected area, but
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
include the surrounding area as well.
or more between the washer nozzle and
Always polish in only one direction. A & Cleaning aluminum wheels
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
No. 2000 grain compound is recom- . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
mended. Never use a coarse-grained clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
ously. compound. Coarse-grained compounds is left on too long, it may be difficult to
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash have a smaller grain-size number and clean off.
by hand. Some warm water washers are could damage the paint. After polishing
of the high temperature, high pressure . Do not use soap containing grit to
with a compound, coat with wax to restore
type, and they can damage or deform the the original luster. Frequent polishing with
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral 10
resin parts such as moldings, or cause cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
a compound or an incorrect polishing with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
water to leak into the vehicle. technique will result in removing the paint stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
& Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When washing device.
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
Always wash and dry the vehicle before . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
waxing and polishing. num wheels) with water as soon as
list.
Use a good quality polish and wax and possible when it has been splashed with
apply them according to the manufac- CAUTION sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when driven on roads treated with salt or other
the painted surface is cool. Do not use any agents with organic agents.

Black plate (384,1)
Corrosion protection though other parts of the vehicle may be assistance.

dry.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
Your SUBARU has been designed and 4. High temperatures will cause corro- soon as you find them.
built to resist corrosion. Special materials sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
and protective finishes have been used on dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila- Check the interior of the vehicle for water
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain tion. and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
fine appearance, strength, and reliable because that could cause corrosion.
operation. & To help prevent corrosion Occasionally check under the mats to
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent make sure the area is dry.
& Most common causes of corrosion of the body and suspension Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
corrosion components. Also, wash the vehicle vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
The most common causes of corrosion promptly after driving on any of the garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
are: following surfaces. be caused by dampness. If you wash the
. roads that have been salted to prevent vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
1. The accumulation of moisture retain-
them from freezing in winter into the garage when wet or covered with
ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,
snow, that can cause dampness.
cavities, and other areas. . mud, sand, or gravel
2. Damage to paint and other protective . coastal roads If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
coatings caused by gravel and stone and/or in areas where road salts and other
chips or minor accidents. After the winter has ended, it is recom- corrosive materials are used, the door
mended that the underbody be given a hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle very thorough washing. latch should be inspected and lubricated
when: periodically.
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust Before the beginning of winter, check the
control chemicals, or used in coastal condition of underbody components, such
areas where there is more salt in the air, as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
or in areas where there is considerable lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
industrial pollution. system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, be given an appropriate rust prevention
especially when temperatures range just treatment or should be replaced. Contact
above freezing. your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
3. Dampness in certain parts of the of maintenance and treatment if you need
vehicle remains for a long time, even

Black plate (385,1)
Appearance care 10-5
Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials & Synthetic leather upholstery
The leather used by SUBARU is a high The synthetic leather material used on the
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
& Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber leather materials may be used when
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a cloth should be performed monthly, taking necessary.
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum to penetrate the stitched seams. CAUTION
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning Strong cleaning agents such as
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove solvents, paint thinners, window
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry cleaner or fuel must never be used
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If on leather or synthetic interior ma-
using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long terials. Doing so could damage the
warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended surface and cause the color to
that the seats and head restraints be deteriorate.
If the stain does not come out, try a covered, or the windows shaded, to
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
prevent fading or shrinkage. 10
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches & Climate control panel, audio
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- may be treated with a commercial leather panel, instrument panel,
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
tions.
leather seat section will develop soft folds
console panel, and switches
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
CAUTION
genuine leather. control panel, audio equipment, instru-
When cleaning the seat, do not use ment panel, center console, combination
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar meter panel, and switches.
materials.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (386,1)
CAUTION & Monitor (if equipped)

To clean the audio/navigation monitor,
. Do not use organic solvents such wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft
as paint thinners or fuel, or cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty,
strong cleaning agents that con- clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
tain those solvents. neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
. Do not use chemical solvents any remaining detergent.
that contain silicone on the vehi-
cle audio system, electrical com- CAUTION
ponents of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres . Do not spray neutral detergent
to these parts, it may cause directly onto the monitor. Doing
damage to electrical compo- so could damage the monitor’s
nents. components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, or any
other volatile substance. Such
cleaning fluid could erase the
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.

Black plate (21,1)
Maintenance and service
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3 Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-16

Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3 Clutch fluid (MT models) ................................. 11-16
Before checking or servicing in the engine Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-16
compartment.................................................... 11-4 Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-17
When checking or servicing in the engine Brake booster .................................................. 11-17
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-4 Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-18
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-5 Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-18
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-6 Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-18
Engine oil............................................................ 11-7 Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-19
Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-7 Checking the clutch function............................ 11-19
Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 11-8 Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-19
Recommended grade and viscosity .................... 11-9 Hill start assist system.................................... 11-19
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-10 Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-20
Cooling system ................................................ 11-10 Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-20
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-10 Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-21
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-11 Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-21
Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-12 Types of tires................................................... 11-21
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-12 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-13 (if equipped) .................................................. 11-21
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-13 Tire inspection................................................. 11-23
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-14 Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-23
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-14 Wheel balance ................................................. 11-25 11
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-14 Wear indicators ............................................... 11-25
Continuously variable transmission fluid....... 11-14 Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-26
Front differential gear oil (CVT models) ......... 11-15 Tire rotation..................................................... 11-26
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-15 Tire replacement.............................................. 11-27
Rear differential gear oil .................................. 11-15 Wheel replacement .......................................... 11-27
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-15 Aluminum wheels ............................................ 11-28
Brake fluid ........................................................ 11-15 Windshield washer fluid.................................. 11-28
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-15

Black plate (22,1)
Maintenance and service
Replacement of wiper blades .......................... 11-30 Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-37

Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-30 Headlights (models with HID headlights)........... 11-37
Windshield wiper blade rubber (type A and Headlights (models without HID headlights)...... 11-37
type B)........................................................... 11-31 Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-39
Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-32 Parking light .................................................... 11-39
Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-33 Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-39
Battery............................................................... 11-34 Rear combination lights ................................... 11-39
Fuses ................................................................ 11-35 License plate light ........................................... 11-41
Main fuse .......................................................... 11-36 Map light ......................................................... 11-42
Installation of accessories............................... 11-37 Dome light and cargo area light ....................... 11-43
Trunk light ....................................................... 11-43
High-mounted stop light (4-door)...................... 11-44
Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-45

Black plate (391,1)
Maintenance and service 11-3
Maintenance schedule Maintenance precautions may result to persons not experi-

enced in servicing vehicles.
The scheduled maintenance items re- When maintenance and service are re- . Always use the proper tools and
quired to be serviced at regular intervals quired, it is recommended that all work be make certain that they are well
are shown in the “Warranty and Main- done by an authorized SUBARU dealer. maintained.
tenance Booklet”.
If you perform maintenance and service . Never get under the vehicle sup-
For details of your maintenance schedule, by yourself, you should familiarize yourself ported only by a jack. Always use
read the separate “Warranty and Main- with the information provided in this safety stands to support the
tenance Booklet”. section on general maintenance and vehicle.
service for your SUBARU. . Never keep the engine running in
NOTE a poorly ventilated area, such as
For models with a multi function dis- Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera- a garage or other closed areas.
play, you can set a reminder to be
displayed when a scheduled mainte- tion. Any problems caused by improper . Do not smoke or allow open
nance item is almost due. For details, maintenance and service performed by flames around the fuel or battery.
refer to “Maintenance settings” F3-51. you are not eligible for warranty coverage. This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
WARNING pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
. Always select a safe area when
by your SUBARU dealer.
performing maintenance on your
vehicle. . Wear adequate eye protection to
guard against getting oil or fluids
. Always be very careful to avoid
in your eyes. If something does
injury when working on the vehi-
get in your eyes, thoroughly 11
cle. Remember that some of the
wash them out with clean water.
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or . Do not tamper with the wiring of
handled, for example, battery the SRS airbag system or seat-
acid. belt pretensioner system, or at-
tempt to take its connectors
. Your vehicle should only be ser-
apart, as that may activate the
viced by persons fully competent
system or it can render it inop-
to do so. Serious personal injury
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (392,1)
11-4 Maintenance and service
erative. NEVER use a circuit on a vehicle equipped with a burn or other injury. Note that the
tester for this wiring. If your remote engine start system (a oil filter becomes very hot when
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten- dealer option) temporarily place the engine is running and re-
sioner needs service, consult that system in the service mode mains hot for some time after
your nearest SUBARU dealer. to prevent it from unexpectedly the engine has stopped.
starting the engine.
& Before checking or servicing & When checking or servicing

in the engine compartment in the engine compartment
while the engine is running
WARNING
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and set
the parking brake firmly to pre- A running engine can be dangerous.
vent the vehicle from moving. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
. Always let the engine cool down. fan, drive belt and any other moving
Engine parts become very hot engine parts. Removing rings,
when the engine is running and watches and ties is advisable.
remain hot for some time after
the engine has stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other CAUTION
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire. . Do not contact the drive belt
cover while checking the compo-
. Always remove the key from the nents in the engine compart-
ignition switch. When the ignition ment. Doing so may cause your
switch is in the “ON” position, hand to slip off the cover and
the cooling fan may operate result in an unexpected injury.
suddenly even when the engine
is stopped. . Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down comple-
. Before performing any servicing tely. Doing so may result in a

Black plate (393,1)
Engine hood To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
To open the hood: hood prop from the slot in the hood and
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the return the prop to its retainer.
windshield, return them to their original 2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
position. mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it

from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it. It could
3. Release the secondary hood release deform the metal.
by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left. WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
2. Pull the hood release knob under the driving. If it is not, it might fly open
instrument panel. while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury. 11
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop

from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.

Black plate (394,1)
1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir

Engine compartment overview (MT) (page 11-15)
2) Fuse box (page 11-35)
3) Battery (page 11-34)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-28)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-7)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-11)
7) Radiator cap (page 11-11)
8) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-7)
9) Air cleaner case (page 11-12)

Black plate (395,1)
Engine oil & Checking the oil level

Check the engine oil level at each fuel
stop.
NOTE
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
. The engine oil consumption rate is
stop the engine. If you check the oil level
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be
just after stopping the engine, wait a few
determined until the vehicle has tra-
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
veled at least several thousand miles
pan before checking the level.
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
the vehicle is used under severe driv-
ing conditions such as those men-
tioned in the Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet, engine oil is consumed
or deteriorated more quickly than un- 1) Full level
der normal driving conditions. If you 2) Low level
drive your vehicle under these severe 3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
conditions, you should check the oil Imp qt) from low level to full level
level at least at every second fuel fill-up 4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
time, and change the oil more fre- 5. Check the oil levels on both sides of
quently. Please refer to the Warranty the level gauge. The engine oil level must
and Maintenance Booklet for more de- be judged by the lowest of the two levels.
tails. If the oil level is below the low level mark,
1) Oil level gauge
. If the oil consumption rate seems add oil so that the full level is reached.
2) Oil filler cap
abnormally high after the break-in
3) Oil filter 11
period, for example more than 1 quart
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000 2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean, CAUTION
kilometers, contact your SUBARU deal- and insert it again.
er. . Be careful not to touch the en-
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
gine oil filter when removing the
inserted until it stops.
oil filler cap. Doing so may result
in a burn, a pinched finger, or
may cause some other injury.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (396,1)
. Use only engine oil with the & Changing the oil and oil filter
recommended grade and vis-
cosity. CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the If you change your own oil, be sure
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad to drain all the oil from the filter
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If before disposal. Do not dispose of
engine oil gets on the exhaust used engine oil by placing it in the
pipe, be sure to wipe it off. trash, or by pouring it onto the
ground, into sewers, or into any
. If the level gauge is not pulled out body of water. Check with your local
easily, twist the level gauge right government office for the proper
and left, then pull it out. Other- disposal options available to you.
wise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself. 4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
Change the oil and oil filter according to the drain plug while the engine is still
the maintenance schedule in the “War- warm. The used oil should be drained into
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil an appropriate container and disposed of
The engine oil and oil filter must be properly.
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
changed more frequently than listed in
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
the maintenance schedule when driving WARNING
on dusty roads, when short trips are
correct. Be careful not to burn yourself with
frequently made, or when driving in
NOTE extremely cold weather. hot engine oil.
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do 1. Warm up the engine by letting the
engine idle for approximately 10 minutes 5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain
not add any additional oil above the
to ease draining the engine oil. plug with a clean cloth and tighten it
upper level when the engine is cold.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and securely with a new sealing washer after
stop the engine. the oil has completely drained out.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.

Black plate (397,1)
seal and drain plug.

Oil filter color Part number Amount of
rotation 12. Run the engine until it reaches the
Black
normal operating temperature. Then stop
15208AA160 1 rotation
the engine and wait a few minutes to allow
the oil drain back. Check the oil level
CAUTION again and if necessary, add more engine
oil.
. Never over tighten the oil filter
because that can result in an oil
leak. CAUTION
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine Be careful not to spill engine oil
oil that has spilled over the when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover. exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
6. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter If spilled oil is not promptly smell, smoke, and/or a fire.
wrench. wiped up, the oil could cause a
7. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a fire.
thin coat of engine oil to the seal.
& Recommended grade and
8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of 10. Pour engine oil through the filler neck. viscosity
the engine and install the oil filter by hand For the oil capacity (guideline), refer to
turning. Be careful not to twist or damage “Engine oil” F12-4. CAUTION
the seal. The oil quantity indicated above is only Use only engine oil with the recom-
9. Tighten the oil filter by the amount guideline. mended grade and viscosity.
indicated in the following table after the The necessary quantity of oil depends on
seal makes contact with the seating sur- the quantity of oil that has been drained. Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.
11
face. The quantity of drained oil differs slightly
depending on the temperature of the oil
and the time the oil is left flowing out. After
refilling the engine with oil, therefore, you
must use the level gauge to confirm that
the level is correct.
11. Start the engine and make sure that no
oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (398,1)
NOTE Cooling system shortened to that of the mixing

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects coolant.
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity . Do not splash the engine coolant
provide better fuel economy. However, WARNING over painted parts. The alcohol
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is contained in the engine coolant
required to properly lubricate the en- Never attempt to remove the radia-
may damage the paint surface.
gine. tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is & Cooling fan, hose and con-
& Synthetic oil under pressure, you may suffer
You should use synthetic engine oil that serious burns from a spray of boil- nections
meets the same requirements given for ing hot coolant when the cap is Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
conventional engine oil. When using removed. fan which is thermostatically controlled to
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same operate when the engine coolant reaches
classification, viscosity and grade shown a specific temperature.
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine CAUTION
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the . Vehicles are filled at the factory even when the coolant temperature high
with SUBARU Super Coolant that warning light blinks or illuminates in RED,
Warranty and Maintenance booklet. the cooling fan circuit may be defective.
does not require the first change
NOTE for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica-
years/220,000 km). This coolant tor light/Coolant temperature high warning
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
should not be mixed with any light” F3-13.
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
mended engine oil for optimum engine other brand or type of coolant Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
performance. Conventional oil may be during this period. Mixing with a Refer to “Fuses” F11-35 and “Fuse panel
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. different coolant will reduce the located in the engine compartment” F12-
life of the coolant. Should it be 11.
necessary to top up the coolant
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
for any reason, use only
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
diluted with another brand or sary, there may be a leak in the engine
type, the maintenance interval is cooling system. It is recommended that

Black plate (399,1)
the cooling system and connections be

checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer 1) “FULL” level mark 1) Fill up to this level
serious burns from a spray of boil- 2) “LOW” level mark
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed. Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
coolant up to just below the filler neck as
shown in the following illustration. 11
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the

radiator, reinstall the cap and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (400,1)
CAUTION Air cleaner element & Replacing the air cleaner

element
. Be careful not to spill engine Replace the air cleaner element according
coolant when adding it. If coolant WARNING to the maintenance schedule in the
touches the exhaust pipe, it may “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
a fire. If engine coolant gets on more frequently. It is recommended that
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
it off.
the engine backfires. If the air
. Do not splash the engine coolant cleaner element is not installed
over painted parts. The alcohol when the engine backfires, you
contained in the engine coolant could be burned.
may damage the paint surface.
CAUTION
! Changing the coolant
It may be difficult to change the coolant. When replacing the air cleaner ele-
Have the coolant changed by your ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
SUBARU dealer if necessary. cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
The coolant should be changed according negative effect to the engine.
to the maintenance schedule in the 1) Connector
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. The air cleaner element functions as a 2) Clip
filter screen. When the element is perfo- 3) Clamp
rated or removed, engine wear will be 4) Air intake boot
excessive and engine life shortened. 5) Clip
It is not necessary to clean or wash the air 1. Unplug the connector that is attached
cleaner element. to the top of the air cleaner case.
2. Detach the connector cable from the
clip on the right side of the air cleaner
case.

Black plate (401,1)
3. Loosen the screw on the clamp and Spark plugs

pull the air intake boot out of the air
cleaner case. It may be difficult to replace the spark
4. Unsnap the two clips holding the air plugs. It is recommended that you have
cleaner case cover. the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
CAUTION
7. To install the air cleaner case, insert Make sure the cables are replaced in
the three projections on the air cleaner the correct order.
case into the slits on the air cleaner case
cover.
8. Install in the reverse order of removal. & Recommended spark plugs
5. Open the air cleaner case and remove For the recommended spark plugs, refer
the air cleaner element. to “Electrical system” F12-7.
6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
and case cover with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
11

Black plate (402,1)
Drive belts Manual transmission oil Continuously variable trans-

mission fluid
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of It is not necessary to check the transmis-
the drive belt periodically because your sion oil level. Check that there are no It is not necessary to check the transmis-
engine is equipped with an automatic belt cracks, damage or leakage. However, the sion fluid level. Check that there are no
tension adjuster. However, replacement of oil inspection should be performed ac- cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
the belt should be done according to the cording to the maintenance schedule in fluid inspection should be performed
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. according to the maintenance schedule
and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
SUBARU dealer for replacement. let”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn, & Recommended grade and details.
contact your SUBARU dealer. viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.

Black plate (403,1)
Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil Brake fluid
(CVT models)
It is not necessary to check the gear oil & Checking the fluid level
It is not necessary to check the gear oil level. Check that there are no cracks,
level. Check that there are no cracks, damage or leakage. However, the oil WARNING
damage or leakage. However, the oil inspection should be performed according
inspection should be performed according to the maintenance schedule in the . Never let brake fluid contact your
to the maintenance schedule in the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. eyes because brake fluid can be
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. harmful to your eyes. If brake
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details. fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
& Recommended grade and ately flush them thoroughly with
& Recommended grade and viscosity clean water. For safety, when
viscosity performing this work, wearing
Each oil manufacturer has its own base eye protection is advisable.
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to . Brake fluid absorbs moisture
oils and additives. Never use different
“Manual transmission, front differential from the air. Any absorbed moist-
brands together. For details, refer to
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6. ure can cause a dangerous loss
“Manual transmission, front differential
of braking performance.
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
11
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (404,1)
Alcohol contained in the brake check the fluid level for the brake system Clutch fluid (MT models)
fluid may damage them. at the front part of the reservoir (shaded
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid area in the illustration). If the fluid level is & Checking the fluid level
when adding it. If brake fluid below “MIN”, add the recommended brake
touches the exhaust pipe, it may fluid to “MAX”. WARNING
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or Use only brake fluid from a sealed
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the container. Never let clutch fluid contact your
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it eyes because clutch fluid can be
off. & Recommended brake fluid harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
CAUTION For safety, when performing this
work, wearing eye protection is
Never use different brands of brake advisable.
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand. CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
1) “MAX” level line refilling, there may be a leak. If
2) “MIN” level line you suspect a problem, have the
A) The brake fluid level must be checked in vehicle checked at your SUBARU
this area. dealer.
Check the fluid level monthly. . When clutch fluid is added, be
Check the fluid level on the outside of the careful not to allow any dirt into
reservoir. Because this reservoir is used the tank.
for both the brake and clutch systems and . Never splash the clutch fluid over
has chambers for each system, be sure to painted surfaces or rubber parts.

Black plate (405,1)
Alcohol contained in the clutch Check the fluid level monthly. Brake booster
fluid may damage them. Check the fluid level on the outside of the
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid reservoir. Because this reservoir is used If the brake booster does not operate as
when adding it. If clutch fluid for both the brake and clutch systems and described in the following, have it checked
touches the exhaust pipe, it may has chambers for each system, be sure to by your SUBARU dealer.
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or check the fluid level for the clutch system 1. With the engine off, depress the brake
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the at the inboard side of the reservoir pedal several times, applying the same
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it (shaded area in the illustration). If the fluid pedal force each time. The distance the
off. level is below “MIN”, add the recom- pedal travels should not vary.
mended clutch fluid to “MAX”.
. The fluid level for the clutch 2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
system must be checked at the Use only clutch fluid from a sealed the engine. The pedal should move
inboard side of the reservoir. It container. slightly down to the floor.
cannot be checked at the out- 3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
board side of the reservoir. & Recommended clutch fluid the engine and keep the pedal depressed
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7. for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
CAUTION 4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately one minute then turn it off.
Never use different brands of clutch Depress the brake pedal several times to
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing check the brake booster. The brake
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if booster operates properly if the pedal
they are the same brand. stroke decreases with each depression.
11
NOTE
For vehicles equipped with the brake
assist system, when you depress the
brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the
1) “MAX” level line following phenomena occur. However,
2) “MIN” level line even though these occur, they do not
A) The clutch fluid level must be checked in indicate any malfunctions, and the
this area. brake assist system is operating prop-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (406,1)
erly. Brake pedal & Checking the brake pedal

. You might feel that the brake pedal reserve distance
is applied by lighter force and gener- Check the brake pedal free play and
ates a greater braking force. reserve distance according to the main-
. You might hear clicking (knocking) tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
sounds around brake pedal. Maintenance Booklet”.
Brake assist is not a system that brings & Checking the brake pedal
more braking ability to the vehicle
beyond its braking capability.
free play
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)
not operate smoothly, contact with your
Stop the engine and firmly depress the SUBARU dealer.
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.

Black plate (407,1)
Clutch pedal (MT models) & Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system
free play
Check the clutch pedal free play and Ensure that the Hill start assist system
reserve distance according to the main- operates properly under the following
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and circumstances.
Maintenance Booklet”. 1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal (all models)
& Checking the clutch function and clutch pedal (MT models only), with
Check the clutch engagement and disen- the engine running.
gagement. 2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
1. With the engine idling, check that there move backward for several seconds after
are no abnormal noises when the clutch the brake pedal is released.
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 3. Then make sure the vehicle starts
1st or reverse feels smooth. climbing the grade by following the normal
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal starting procedures.
slowly to check that the engine and 1) 0.16 – 0.43 in (4.0 – 11.0 mm)
If the Hill start assist system does not
transmission smoothly couple without Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with operate as described above, contact your
any sign of slippage. your finger until you feel resistance, and SUBARU dealer.
check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
11

Black plate (408,1)
Replacement of brake pad result in the need for costly brake range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
rotor repair or replacement. located on the parking brake lever.
and lining
Parking brake stroke:
& Breaking-in of new brake
7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)
pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be WARNING
broken in as follows. A safe location and situation should
! Brake pad and lining be selected for break-in driving.
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake CAUTION
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times. Pulling the parking brake lever too
The right front disc brake and the right rear ! Parking brake lining forcefully may cause the rear
disc brake have audible wear indicators wheels to lock. To avoid this, be
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of certain to pull the lever up slowly
on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). and gently.
close to their service limit, the wear
indicator makes a very audible scraping 2. With the parking brake release button
noise when the brake pedal is applied. pushed in, pull the parking brake lever
SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
If you hear this scraping noise each time force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake 15.3 kgf]).
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as 3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
soon as possible. 220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
CAUTION brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-
If you continue to drive despite the dure.
scraping noise from the audible 5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
brake pad wear indicator, it will parking brake stroke is out of the specified

Black plate (409,1)
Parking brake stroke Tires and wheels ! Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving on
& Types of tires snow-covered and icy roads. However
You should be familiar with type of tires winter tires do not perform as well as
present on your vehicle. summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
! All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide & Tire pressure monitoring
an adequate measure of traction, handling system (TPMS) (if equipped)
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
conditions. However all season tires do vides the driver with a warning message
not offer as much traction performance as by sending a signal from a sensor that is
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow installed in each wheel when tire pressure
or on icy roads. is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the
Check the parking brake stroke according All season tires are identified by “ALL
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
to the maintenance schedule in the SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. not react immediately to a sudden drop in
the tire sidewall.
When the parking brake is properly tire pressure (for example, a blow-out
! Summer tires caused by running over a sharp object).
adjusted, braking power is fully applied
by pulling the lever up 7 to 8 notches Summer tires are high-speed capability If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
gently but firmly (approximately 45 lbf [200 tires best suited for highway driving under garage and will then drive the vehicle in
N, 20.4 kgf]). If the parking brake lever dry conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
stroke is not within the specified range, Summer tires are inadequate for driving pressures may cause the low tire pressure 11
have the brake system checked and on slippery roads such as on snow- warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
adjusted at your SUBARU dealer. covered or icy roads. problem when adjusting the tire pressures
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the pressures higher than those shown on the
use of winter (snow) tires. tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
When installing winter tires, be sure to extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for
replace all four tires. every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
the temperature in the garage and the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (410,1)
temperature outside. By way of example, the tire pressure monitoring system may one minute.
the following table shows the required tire not be functioning normally. In this event,
pressures that correspond to various out- go to a SUBARU dealer to have the When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
side temperatures when the temperature system inspected as soon as possible. necessary to ensure continued normal
in the garage is 608F (15.68C). operation of the tire pressure monitoring
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- system. As with wheel replacement, there-
Example: tween tires and the road surface causes fore, you should have the work performed
Ti r e s i z e : P 2 0 5 / 5 5 R 1 6 8 9 V a n d the tires to warm up. After illumination of by a SUBARU dealer.
P205/50R17 88V the low tire pressure warning light, any
Standard tire pressures: increase in the tire pressures caused by WARNING
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) an increase in the outside air temperature
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) or by an increase in the temperature in the If the low tire pressure warning light
tires can cause the low tire pressure does not illuminate briefly after the
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C) ignition switch is turned ON or the
warning light to turn off.
Outside Adjusted pressure
light illuminates steadily after blink-
temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)] System resetting is necessary when the ing for approximately one minute,
wheels are changed (for example, a you should have your Tire Pressure
Front Rear switch to snow tires) and new TPMS Monitoring System checked at a
308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4) valves are installed on the newly fitted SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
38 37 wheels. Have this work performed by a ble.
108F (−128C) (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55) SUBARU dealer following wheel replace- If this light illuminates while driving,
−108F (−238C) 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7) ment. never brake suddenly and keep
It may not be possible to install TPMS driving straight ahead while gradu-
If the low tire pressure warning light valves on certain wheels that are on the ally reducing speed. Then slowly
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in market. Therefore, if you change the pull off the road to a safe place.
cold outside air after adjusting the tire wheels (for example, a switch to snow Otherwise an accident involving
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the tires), use wheels that have the same part serious vehicle damage and serious
tire pressures using the method described number as the standard-equipment personal injury could occur.
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed wheels. Without four operational TPMS If this light still illuminates while
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS driving after adjusting the tire pres-
see that the low tire pressure warning light will not fully function and the warning light sure, a tire may have significant
turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire on the combination meter will illuminate damage and a fast leak that causes
pressure warning light does not turn off, steadily after blinking for approximately the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have

Black plate (411,1)
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire rough surface, they can suffer damage
as soon as possible. that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
When a spare tire is mounted or a This type of damage does not become
wheel rim is replaced without the evident until time has passed. Try not
original pressure sensor/transmitter to drive over curbs, potholes or on
being transferred, the low tire pres- other rough surfaces. If doing so is
sure warning light will illuminate unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
steadily after blinking for approxi- down to a walking pace or less, and
mately one minute. This indicates approach the curbs as squarely as
the TPMS is unable to monitor all possible. Also, make sure the tires are
four road wheels. Contact your not pressed against the curb when you
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible park the vehicle.
for tire and sensor replacement and/ . If you feel unusual vibration while
or system resetting. If the light driving or find it difficult to steer the Check the tire pressures when the tires
illuminates steadily after blinking vehicle in a straight line, one of the are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
for approximately one minute, tires and/or wheels may be damaged. the tire pressures to the values shown on
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer Drive slowly to the nearest authorized the tire placard. The tire placard is located
to have the system inspected. SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
inspected.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
& Tire inspection & Tire pressures and wear Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
Check on a daily basis that the tires are Maintaining the correct tire pressures outside temperature. It is best to check tire
free from serious damage, nails, and helps to maximize the tires’ service lives pressure outdoors before driving the
stones. At the same time, check the tires and is essential for good running perfor- vehicle. 11
for abnormal wear. mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- it expands, causing the tire pressure to
ately if you find any problem. spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
NOTE journey. release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (412,1)
NOTE . Correct tire pressure (tread worn . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
. The air pressure in a tire increases evenly) worn at shoulders)
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
three hours or has been driven less
than one mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con- Roadholding is good, and steering is Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
trollability and ride comfort, and they responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so sumption is also higher.
cause the tires to wear abnormally. fuel consumption is also lower.

Black plate (413,1)
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread the tires. The resulting loss of NOTE
worn in center) vehicle control could lead to an The suspension system is designed to
accident. hold each wheel at a certain alignment
(relative to the other wheels and to the
road) for optimum straight-line stability
& Wheel balance and cornering performance.
Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will & Wear indicators
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire you suspect that the wheels are not
magnifies the effects of road-surface correctly balanced, have them checked
bumps and dips, possibly resulting in and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
vehicle damage. Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for
the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the CAUTION
tire pressures to the values that match 1) New tread
2) Worn tread
current loading conditions. Loss of correct wheel alignment
3) Tread wear indicator 11
causes the tires to wear on one side
WARNING and reduces the vehicle’s running Each tire incorporates a tread wear
stability. Contact your SUBARU indicator, which becomes visible when
Driving at high speeds with exces-
dealer if you notice abnormal tire the depth of the tread grooves decreases
sively low tire pressures can cause
wear. to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- replaced when the tread wear indicator
crease in temperature could cause appears as a solid band across the tread.
tread separation, and destruction of
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (414,1)
WARNING & Tire rotation direction mark & Tire rotation

When a tire’s tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn
beyond the acceptable limit and
must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly Example of tire rotation direction mark Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-
and replace the tires before their tread 1) Front tional tires
wear indicators become visible. 1) Front
If the tire has the rotation direction
specification, the tire rotation direction
mark is placed on its sidewall.
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
the direction mark facing forward.
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires

1) Front

Black plate (415,1)
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To Using tires of a non-specified size detracts ance between the body and tires.
maximize the life of each tire and ensure from controllability, ride comfort, braking It also may be dangerous and
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to performance, speedometer accuracy and lead to loss of vehicle control.
rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 odometer accuracy. It also creates incor- . You must install four tires that are
km). Move the tires to the positions shown rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro- of the same size, circumference,
in the illustration each time they are priately changes the vehicle’s ground construction, manufacturer,
rotated. clearance. brand (tread pattern), degree of
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn All four tires must be the same in terms of wear, speed symbol and load
tires at the time of rotation. After tire manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con- index. Mixing tires of different
rotation, adjust the tires pressures and struction, and size. You are advised to types, sizes or degrees of wear
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly replace the tires with new ones that are can result in damage to the
tightened. identical to those fitted as standard equip- vehicle’s power train. Use of
ment. different types or sizes of tires
After driving approximately 600 miles can also dangerously reduce
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU controllability and braking per-
and retighten any nut that has become recommends replacing all four tires at formance and can lead to an
loose. the same time. accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
& Tire replacement WARNING
radial tires together with belted
The wheels and tires are important and . When replacing a tire, you must bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; use a tire that is of the same size, Doing so can dangerously re-
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The circumference, construction, duce controllability, resulting in
tires fitted as standard equipment are brand (tread pattern), speed sym- an accident.
optimally matched to the characteristics bol and load index as the original 11
of the vehicle and were selected to give tires listed on the tire placard.
the best possible combination of running Using tires of other sizes, cir- & Wheel replacement
performance, ride comfort, and service cumferences or constructions When replacing wheels due, for example,
life. It is essential for every tire to have a may result in severe mechanical to damage, make sure the replacement
size and construction matching those damage to the drive train of your wheels match the specifications of the
shown on the tire placard and to have a vehicle and may affect ride, wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
speed symbol and load index matching handling, braking, speedometer/ ment. Replacement wheels are available
those shown on the tire placard. odometer calibration, and clear-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (416,1)
from SUBARU dealers. Aluminum wheels Windshield washer fluid

WARNING Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to CAUTION
Use only those wheels that are
maintain their appearance, performance,
specified for your vehicle. Wheels Never use engine coolant as washer
and safety.
not meeting specifications could fluid because it could cause paint
interfere with brake caliper opera- . When any of the wheels are removed
damage.
tion and may cause the tires to rub and replaced for tire rotation or to change
against the wheel well housing dur- a flat tire, always check the tightness of
ing turns. The resulting loss of the wheel nuts after driving approximately
vehicle control could lead to an 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
accident. tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
NOTE wheel.
When any of the wheels are removed . Never let the wheel rub against sharp
and replaced for tire rotation or to protrusions or curbs.
change a flat tire, always check the . When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
tightness of the wheel nuts after driv- the center cap is replaced, be sure to
ing approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
If any nut is loose, tighten it to the designed for aluminum wheels.
specified torque. When there is only a small amount of
washer fluid remaining, the windshield
washer fluid warning light will illuminate.
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid as
follows.

Black plate (417,1)
Washer Fluid Freezing CAUTION

Concentration Temperature
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
30% 10.48F (−128C) tration appropriately for the out-
50% −48F (−208C) side temperature. If the concen-
100% −498F (−458C)
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
In order to prevent freezing of washer windshield and obstruct your
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in view, and the fluid may freeze in
the table above when adjusting the fluid the reservoir tank.
concentration to the outside temperature. . State or local regulations on
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with volatile organic compounds may
a different concentration from the one restrict the use of methanol, a
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then common windshield washer anti-
used previously, purge the old fluid from
add windshield washer fluid until it freeze additive. Washer fluids
the piping between the reservoir tank and
reaches the “FULL” mark on the tank. If containing non-methanol anti-
washer nozzles by operating the washer
windshield washer fluid is unavailable use freeze agents should be used
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
clean water. only if they provide cold weather
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
In areas where water freezes in winter, the piping is too low for the outside protection without damaging
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer temperature, it may freeze and block the your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid nozzles. or washer system.
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it 11
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.

Black plate (418,1)
Replacement of wiper blades carefully return the wiper arms & Windshield wiper blade as-
on the windshield by hand. You sembly
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on should not return the wiper arms
the windshield or the wiper blade results in to the windshield only by the ! Type A
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the return spring. Otherwise, the wi- 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks per arms may be deformed and/
after operating the windshield washer or if or the windshield surface may be
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the scratched.
outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
sponge or soft cloth with a neutral after following this method, replace the
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After wiper blades using the following proce-
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper dures.
blades with clean water. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water.
CAUTION
1) Stopper
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such 2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
as paint thinner or benzine. This holding its pivot area and pushing it in the
will cause deterioration of the direction shown by the arrow while de-
wiper blades. pressing the wiper blade stopper.
. While removing the wiper blades 3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
from the wiper arms, do not wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
return the wiper arms to the 4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
original positions. Otherwise, lower it in position.
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,

Black plate (419,1)
! Type B & Windshield wiper blade rub-

1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield. ber (type A and type B)
NOTE
The following illustrations show the
replacement procedures of the blade
rubber for a type A wiper blade assem-
bly, however the replacement proce-
dures are the same for a type B wiper
blade assembly.
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided

1) Open the cover with two metal spines, remove the metal
2) Pull down the wiper blade spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
opening the cover and pulling it down in
the direction shown in the illustration.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly 1) Metal support 11
lower it in position. 1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
metal support.
3. Align the claws of the metal support

– CONTINUED –

Black plate (420,1)
with the grooves in the rubber and slide & Rear window wiper blade
the blade rubber assembly into the metal assembly
support until it locks.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward

you to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
1) Stopper wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Be sure to position the claws at the 5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
end of the metal support between the lower it in position.
terclockwise.
stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the
rubber is not retained properly, the wiper
blade may scratch the windshield.

Black plate (421,1)
& Rear window wiper blade 2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
rubber the plastic support.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support

with the grooves in the blade rubber
1) Metal spines assembly, then slide the blade rubber
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided assembly into place.
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support. with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
11
Securely retain both ends of the rubber

with the stoppers on the plastic support
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (422,1)
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly, Battery remove rings, metal watchbands,
the wiper may scratch the rear window and other metal jewelry. Never
glass. allow metal tools to contact the
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the WARNING positive battery terminal and any-
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place. thing connected to it WHILE you
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly . Before beginning work on or near are at the same time in contact
lower it in position. any battery, be sure to extinguish with any other metallic portion of
all cigarettes, matches, and light- the vehicle because a short cir-
ers. Never expose a battery to an cuit will result.
open flame or electric sparks.
. Keep everyone including children
Batteries give off a gas which is
away from the battery.
highly flammable and explosive.
. Charge the battery in a well-
. For safety, in case an explosion
ventilated area.
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when work- . Battery posts, terminals and re-
ing near any battery. Never lean lated accessories contain lead
over a battery. and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
. Do not let battery fluid contact
to cause cancer and reproductive
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
harm. Batteries also contain
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
other chemicals known to the
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
State of California to cause can-
skin or in your eyes, immediately
cer. Wash hands after handling.
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,

Black plate (423,1)
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an

overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
1) Cap fuses are located in two fuse boxes. 1) Spare fuses
2) Upper level
3) Lower level The other one is housed in the engine
compartment. Also, the spare fuses are
It is unnecessary to periodically check the stored in the fuse box cover.
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water.
CAUTION 11
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life. One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (424,1)
Main fuse
1) Good 4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.

2) Blown
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same Main fuse box
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the rating. The main fuses are designed to melt
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, 6. If the same fuse blows again, this during an overload to prevent damage to
replace it. indicates that its system has a problem. the wiring harness and electrical equip-
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs. ment. Check the main fuses if any
position and turn off all electrical acces- electrical component fails to operate (ex-
sories. cept the starter motor) and other fuses are
2. Remove the cover. good. A melted main fuse must be
replaced. Use only replacements with the
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
same specified rating as the melted main
Look at the back side of each fuse box
fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
replaced, have the electrical system
F12-9.
checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.

Black plate (425,1)
Installation of accessories Replacing bulbs following precautions.

. Do not replace any headlight
Always consult your SUBARU dealer bulbs (both low beam and high
before installing fog lights or any other WARNING beam) by yourself.
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
Bulbs may become very hot while . Do not remove/restore the head-
accessories may cause the electronic
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs, light assemblies by yourself.
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for turn off the lights and wait until the . Do not remove any headlight-
the vehicle. bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is assembly components by your-
a risk of sustaining a burn injury. self.
For replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new & Headlights (models without
bulb of the specified wattage. Using HID headlights)
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
CAUTION
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
chart” F12-13. Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
& Headlights (models with HID greasy gloves, fingerprints or
headlights) grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the 11
WARNING bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs wipe them away with a soft cloth
are used for the low beams of the moistened with alcohol.
headlights. These HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage. To avoid the
risk of an electric shock that could
result in serious injury, observe the
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (426,1)
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Perform the following steps to replace the
bulbs.
1) Low beam bulb

2) High beam bulb
3. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the bulb and remove the bulb from
the headlight assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
Right-hand side 5. To install the bulb to the headlight
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
the air intake duct, then remove the air 6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
intake duct (right-hand side). Left-hand side
7. Install the air intake duct with clips
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the (right-hand side).
secured clip of the washer tank. To make 8. Set the washer fluid filler pipe to the
it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck of original place and secure it by clip (left-
the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated hand side).
(left-hand side).

Black plate (427,1)
& Front turn signal light & Rear combination lights panel as illustrated.
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. ! 4-door models NOTE
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
Make sure that the “*” part of the trunk
dealer if necessary.
trim in the illustration does not contact
the trunk lid stay. If the “*” part is bent,
& Parking light the trunk trim may be torn.
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
& Front fog light (if equipped)

1. Remove the clips from the trunk trim

with a flat-head screwdriver.
1) Stop light/Tail and rear side marker light

2) Rear turn signal light
3) Backup light
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear 11

combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
2. Open the rear portion of the trunk trim
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (428,1)
6. Secure the rear trunk trim panel with

the clips.
! 5-door models
2. Slide the rear combination light as- 1) Rear side marker light
sembly rearward and remove it from the 2) Rear turn signal light
vehicle. 3) Backup light
4) Stop light/Tail light
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove 3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear
the upper and lower screws that secure combination light assembly by turning it
the rear combination light assembly. counterclockwise.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.

Black plate (429,1)
& License plate light

! 4-door models
1) Guide pins 7. Tighten the upper and lower screws.

2) Catch
3) Clip
6. Put the rear combination light assem- 1. Open the trunk and remove the clips
bly into place while aligning the 2 guide from the trunk lid trim with a flat-head
pins and a catch with the guide holes and screwdriver.
a clip on the vehicle.
11
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (430,1)
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise & Map light

and pull out the socket.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. ! Type A
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the trunk
lid trim.
! 5-door models
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise

and pull out the socket.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb. 1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
license plate light cover.
1. License plate light must be pushed

inwards, then pulled out to be removed.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at
北米Model "A1140BE-B" EDITED: 2015/ 12/ 9

Black plate (431,1)
its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb & Dome light and cargo area the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
straight downward to remove it. light 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb. 3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens. 4. Reinstall the lens.
! Type B & Trunk light
Dome light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of 1. Remove the cover by squeezing its
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. sides and pulling it.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb. 3. Install a new bulb. 11
4. Reinstall the lens. 4. Reinstall the cover.
Cargo area light

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (432,1)
& High-mounted stop light

(4-door)
1) Mount assembly 1) Retainer

2) Locking lug
3. While pushing the mount assembly
1) Trunk light rearward by hand, lift up the front end of 4. Undo the two retainers and slide the
the mount assembly to remove it. At this light assembly to release the locking lug.
1. Open the trunk and locate the elec-
time, be careful not to allow your hand to
trical connector of the high-mounted stop
slip off the mount assembly.
light that is wired near the trunk light by
referring to the illustration.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector by
unlocking its retainer using a flat-head
screwdriver. Then, enter the rear cabin.
1) Lens

Black plate (433,1)
5. Unlock the three retainers and remove

the lens.
7. Reinstall the removed parts in the
reverse order of removal.
& Other bulbs

Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
11

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (23,1)
Specifications
Specifications ..................................................... 12-2 Tires.................................................................. 12-8

Dimensions........................................................ 12-2 Fuses and circuits ............................................. 12-9
Engine ............................................................... 12-3 Fuse panel located in the passenger
Fuel ................................................................... 12-3 compartment ................................................... 12-9
Engine oil .......................................................... 12-4 Fuse panel located in the engine
Manual transmission, front differential and rear compartment ................................................. 12-11
differential gear oil ........................................... 12-6 Bulb chart......................................................... 12-13
Fluids ................................................................ 12-7 Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-16
Engine coolant ................................................... 12-7
Electrical system................................................ 12-7
12

Black plate (436,1)
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
5-door models
Item 4-door models
XV CROSSTREK models SPORT models Other models
Overall length 175.2 (4,450) 173.8 (4,415) 180.3 (4,580)
Overall width 70.1 (1,780) 68.5 (1,740)
Overall height 63.6 (1,615) 59.5 (1,515) 57.7 (1,465)
Wheel base 103.7 (2,635) 104.1 (2,645)
Tread Front 60.0 (1,525) 59.4 (1,510)
Rear 60.0 (1,525) 59.6 (1,515)
Ground clearance* 8.7 (220) 5.9 (150) 5.7 (145)
*: Measured with vehicle empty

Black plate (437,1)
Specifications 12-3
& Engine
Engine model FB20
(2.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 121.7 (1,995)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.31 6 3.54 (84.0 6 90.0)
Compression ratio 10.5 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4
& Fuel
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Except XV CROSSTREK models 14.5 US gal (55 liters, 12.1 Imp gal)
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
XV CROSSTREK models 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
For more details, refer to “Fuel” F7-3.
12
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (438,1)
12-4 Specifications
& Engine oil

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-7.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

Black plate (439,1)
Specifications 12-5
! Alternative engine oil

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
! Non-turbo models
Oil grade SAE viscosity No. and Engine oil capacity

applicable temperature
– Adding the oil from low level to
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil full level:
for optimum engine performance and 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
protection. Conventional oil may be – Changing the oil and oil filter:
used if synthetic oil is unavailable. 5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may
be used if replenishment is needed but
should be changed to 0W-20 synthetic
oil at the next oil change.
or
API classification SM or SN with ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can

the words be identified with the ILSAC 12
“ENERGY CONSERVING” or certification mark (Starburst
“RESOURCE CONSERVING” mark)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (440,1)
12-6 Specifications
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil grade API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable

temperature
– Remarks*2
Manual transmission oil 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt) “Manual transmission oil” F11-14
Oil capacity*1 Front differential gear oil “Front differential gear oil (CVT
(CVT models) 1.4 US qt (1.35 liters, 1.2 Imp qt) models)” F11-15
Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt) “Rear differential gear oil” F11-15
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

Black plate (441,1)
Specifications 12-7
& Fluids
Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3
Continuously variable transmission Consult your SUBARU dealer.
fluid (CVT models) 12.9 US qt (12.2 liters, 10.7 Imp qt) “Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid” F11-14
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 – “Brake fluid” F11-15
brake fluid
Clutch fluid (MT models) FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 – “Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-
brake fluid 16
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant

Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
MT models 7.9 US qt (7.5 liters, 6.6 Imp qt)
SUBARU Super Coolant
CVT models 8.2 US qt (7.8 liters, 6.9 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-10.
& Electrical system

12
Battery type and capacity (5HR) 55D23L (12V-48AH)
Alternator 12V-110A
Spark plugs SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (442,1)
12-8 Specifications
& Tires
Tire size P195/65R15 89H P205/55R16 89V P205/50R17 88V P225/55R17 95H
Wheel size
15 6 6 J 16 6 6 /2 J
1 17 6 7 JJ*1 17 6 7 J
17 6 7 J*2
Pressure Front CVT models 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
MT models 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Rear CVT models 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
MT models 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2)
Temporary Size T135/80 D16 T145/90 D16
spare tire
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
Wheel nut tightening
torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*3
*1: “SPORT” and “SPORT-Ltd” models

*2: Other vehicle models
*3: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening
procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-5.

Black plate (443,1)
Specifications 12-9
Fuses and circuits Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
1 20A . Trailer hitch connector
2 Empty
3 15A . Door locking
4 10A . Front wiper deicer relay
5 10A . Combination meter
. Clock
6 7.5A . Remote control rear
view mirrors
. Seat heater relay
7 15A . Combination meter
. Integrated unit
8 15A . Stop light
9 15A . Front wiper deicer
10 7.5A . Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A . Turn signal unit
12 15A . Transmission control
unit
. Engine control unit
. Integrated unit
13 20A . Accessory power outlet
(center console) 12
. AC110V (If installed)
14 15A . Parking light
. Tail light
. Rear combination light
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (444,1)
12-10 Specifications
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

Circuit Circuit
panel rating panel rating
15 10A . Luggage light 32 7.5A . Clutch switch
. Clock . Steering lock control
unit
16 7.5A . Illumination
33 7.5A . Vehicle Dynamics Con-
17 15A . Seat heaters trol unit
18 10A . Backup light
19 7.5A (Spare)
20 10A . Accessory power outlet
(instrument panel)
21 7.5A . Starter relay
22 10A . Air conditioner
. Rear window defogger
relay coil
23 Empty
24 10A . Audio unit
. Clock
25 15A . SRS airbag system
26 7.5A . Power window relay
. Radiator main fan relay
27 15A . Blower fan
28 15A . Blower fan
29 15A . Fog light
30 Empty
31 7.5A . Auto air conditioner unit
. Integrated unit

Black plate (445,1)
Specifications 12-11
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment Fuse Fuse

Circuit
panel rating
1 30A . ABS unit
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
2 25A . Main fan (cooling fan)
3 25A . Sub fan (cooling fan)
4 Empty
5 Empty
6 30A . Headlight (low beam)
7 15A . Headlight (high beam)
8 20A . Back-up
9 15A . Horn
10 25A . Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
11 15A . Fuel pump
12 20A . Automatic transmission
control unit
13 7.5A . Engine control unit
14 15A . Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher
15 15A . Tail and illumination re-
12
A) Main fuse lay
16 7.5A . Alternator
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (446,1)
Fuse Fuse
Circuit
panel rating
17 Empty
18 Empty
19 15A . Headlight (low beam –
right hand)
20 15A . Headlight (low beam –
left hand)

Black plate (447,1)
Bulb chart
12
NOTE
Lights A and B are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (448,1)
Wattage Bulb No. WARNING

1) High beam headlight 12V-60W HB3 (9005) . Bulbs may become very hot while
2) Low beam headlight illuminated. Before replacing
bulbs, turn off the lights and wait
Models with HID light 12V-35W D2R until the bulbs cool down. Other-
Models with halogen light 12V-55W H11 wise, there is a risk of sustaining
3) Map light 12V-8W – a burn injury.
4) Dome light 12V-8W – . For models with HID low beam
5) headlights, observe the following
Front side marker light 12V-5W W5W (168)
precautions. Not doing so carries
6) Parking light 12V-5W W5W (168) the risk of an electric shock that
7) Front turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W could result in serious injury
8) Front fog light 12V-24W PSX24W because the HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage.
9) High-mounted stop light (4-door) 12V-21W W21W
– Do not replace any headlight
10) Trunk light (4-door) 12V-5W W5W bulbs (both low beam and
11) Stop light/Tail and rear side marker light (4-door) 12V-21/5W W21/5W high beam) by yourself.
12) Rear turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W – Do not remove/restore the
13) Backup light 12V-16W W16W (921) headlight assemblies by your-
14) License plate light 12V-5W W5W (168)
self.
15) Cargo area light (5-door) 12V-5W –
– Do not remove any headlight-
assembly components by
16) Rear side marker light (5-door) 12V-5W W5W (168) yourself.
17) Stop light/Tail light (5-door) 12V-21/5W W21/5W For replacement, contact your
A) Side turn signal light (if equipped) – – SUBARU dealer.
B) High-mounted stop light (5-door) – –

Black plate (449,1)
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
12

Black plate (450,1)
1) Vehicle identification number (under the

Vehicle identification floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)
2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Certification label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label

Black plate (25,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2 Adverse safety consequences of overloading

Tire information .................................................. 13-2 on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-14
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-14
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4 Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-15
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5 Treadwear ....................................................... 13-15
Tire care – maintenance and safety Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-15
practices........................................................ 13-10 Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10 Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-16
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle Supplement ...................................................... 13-17
load capacities ............................................... 13-13 Declaration of conformity with FCC rules ......... 13-17
13

Black plate (454,1)
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A. Tire information Example:
The following information has been & Tire labeling

compiled according to Code of Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part Identification Number or TIN) are (1) P = Certain tire type used on
575”. placed on the sidewall of a tire by light duty vehicles such as passen-
tire manufacturers. These markings ger cars
can provide you with useful infor- (2) Section Width in millimeters
mation on the tire. (3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
! Tire size 7 section width).
Your vehicle comes equipped with (4) R = Radial Construction
P-Metric tire size. It is important to (5) Rim diameter in inches
understand the sizing system in ! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-
selecting the proper tire for your tions
vehicles. Here is a brief review of The load and speed rating descrip-
the tire sizing system with a break- tions will appear following the size
down of its individual elements. designation.
! P Metric They provide two important facts
With the P-Metric system, Section about the tire. First, the number
Width is measured in millimeters. designation is its load index. Sec-
To convert millimeters into inches, ond, the letter designation indicates
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio the tire’s speed rating.
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.

Black plate (455,1)
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3
Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- The first two figures identify the
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs week, starting with “01” to represent
maged, repaired, retreaded,
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 the first full week of the calendar
or otherwise altered from
kg). year; the second two figures repre-
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
WARNING means the 1st week of 2001.
treaded, or otherwise al-
Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment The following makings are also
a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
does not mean the vehicle can speeds.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated ! Maximum permissible inflation
load. pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “300 kPa
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS” 13
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review
For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its
(240 km/h) individual elements.
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (456,1)
! Maximum load rating STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE- The vehicle placard is affixed to the
The load rating at the maximum WALL 2 POLYESTER” driver’s side B-pillar.
permissible weight load for this tire. ! Uniform Tire Quality Grading Example:
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg (UTQG)
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI) For details, refer to “Uniform tire
MAX. PRESS.” quality grading standards” F13-15.
WARNING
& Recommended tire inflation
Maximum load rating applies pressure
only to the tire, not to the ! Recommended cold tire infla-
vehicle. Putting a load rated tion pressure
tire on any vehicle does not For recommended cold tire inflation
mean the vehicle can be pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
loaded up to the tire’s rated refer to “Tires” F12-8.
load. The vehicle placard shows original
! Vehicle placard tire size, recommended cold tire
! Construction type inflation pressure on each tire at
Applicable construction of this tire. maximum loaded vehicle weight,
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL seating capacity and loading infor-
BELTED RADIAL” mation.
! Adverse safety consequences
! Construction of under-inflation
The generic name of each cord Driving at high speeds with exces-
material used in the plies (both sively low tire pressures can cause
sidewall and tread area) of this tire. the tires to flex severely and to
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2 rapidly become hot. A sharp in-

Black plate (457,1)
crease in temperature could cause & Glossary of tire terminology sidewall rubber which, when in-
tread separation, and failure of the . Accessory weight flated, bears the load.
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of The combined weight (in excess of . Chunking
vehicle control could lead to an those standard items which may be The breaking away of pieces of the
accident. replaced) of automatic transmis- tread or sidewall.
! Measuring and adjusting air sion, power steering, power brakes, . Cold tire pressure
pressure to achieve proper in- power windows, power seats, radio, The pressure in a tire that has been
flation and heater, to the extent that these driven less than 1 mile or has been
Check and, if necessary, adjust the items are available as factory-in- standing for three hours or more.
pressure of each tire (including the stalled equipment (whether in- . Cord
spare) at least once a month and stalled or not). The strands forming the plies in the
before any long journey. Check the . Bead tire.
tire pressures when the tires are The part of the tire that is made of . Cord separation
cold. Use a pressure gauge to steel wires, wrapped or reinforced The parting of cords from adjacent
adjust the tire pressures to the by ply cords and that is shaped to fit rubber compounds.
specific values. Driving even a the rim. . Cracking
short distance warms up the tires . Bead separation Any parting within the tread, side-
and increases the tire pressures. A breakdown of the bond between wall, or inner liner of the tire
Also, the tire pressures are affected components in the bead. extending to cord material.
by the outside temperature. It is . Bias ply tire . Curb weight
best to check tire pressure out- A pneumatic tire in which the ply The weight of a motor vehicle with
doors before driving the vehicle. cords that extend to the beads are standard equipment including the
When a tire becomes warm, the air laid at alternate angles substantially maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
inside it expands, causing the tire less than 90 degrees to the center- coolant, and if so equipped, air 13
pressure to increase. Be careful not line of the tread. conditioning and additional weight
to mistakenly release air from a . Carcass optional engine.
warm tire to reduce its pressure. The tire structure, except tread and
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (458,1)
. Extra load tire ing on a vehicle. . Measuring rim

A tire designed to operate at higher . Light truck (LT) tire The rim on which a tire is fitted for
loads and higher inflation pressure A tire designated by its manufac- physical dimension requirements.
than the corresponding standard turer as primarily intended for use . Normal occupant weight
tire. on lightweight trucks or multipur- 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
. Groove pose passenger vehicles. occupants specified in the second
The space between two adjacent . Load rating column of Table 1 that is appended
tread ribs. The maximum load that a tire is to the end of this section.
. Innerliner rated to carry for a given inflation . Occupant distribution
The layer(s) forming the inside sur- pressure. Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
face of a tubeless tire that contains . Maximum inflation pressure cle as specified in the third column
the inflating medium within the tire. The maximum cold inflation pres- of Table 1 that is appended to the
. Innerliner separation sure to which a tire may be inflated. end of this section.
The parting of the innerliner from . Maximum load rating . Open splice
cord material in the carcass. The load rating for a tire at the Any parting at any junction of tread,
. Intended outboard sidewall maximum permissible inflation sidewall, or innerliner that extends
(1) The sidewall that contains a pressure for that tire. to cord material.
whitewall, bears white lettering . Maximum loaded vehicle weight . Outer diameter
or bears manufacturer, brand, The sum of: The overall diameter of an inflated
and/or model name molding that (a) Curb weight new tire.
is higher or deeper than the (b) Accessory weight . Overall width
same molding on the other side- (c) Vehicle capacity weight The linear distance between the
wall of the tire, or (d) Production options weight exteriors of the sidewalls of an
(2) The outward facing sidewall . Maximum permissible inflation
inflated tire, including elevations
of an asymmetrical tire that has pressure
due to labeling, decorations, or
a particular side that must al- The maximum cold inflation pres- protective bands or ribs.
ways face outward when mount- sure to which a tire may be inflated.

Black plate (459,1)
. Passenger car tire sory weight, including heavy duty . Rim type designation
A tire intended for use on passen- brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger heavy duty battery, and special ignation for a rim by style or code.
vehicles, and trucks, that have a trim. . Rim width
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) . Radial ply tire Nominal distance between rim
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less. A pneumatic tire in which the ply flanges.
. Ply cords that extend to the beads are . Section width
A layer of rubber-coated parallel laid at substantially 90 degrees to The linear distance between the
cords. the centerline of the tread. exteriors of the sidewalls of an
. Ply separation . Recommended inflation pres- inflated tire, excluding elevations
A parting of rubber compound sure due to labeling, decoration, or
between adjacent plies. The cold inflation pressure recom- protective bands.
. Pneumatic tire mended by a vehicle manufacturer. . Sidewall
A mechanical device made of rub- . Reinforced tire That portion of a tire between the
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or A tire designed to operate at higher tread and bead.
other materials, that, when loads and at higher inflation pres- . Sidewall separation
mounted on an automotive wheel, sures than the corresponding stan- The parting of the rubber com-
provides the traction and contains dard tire. pound from the cord material in
the gas or fluid that sustains the . Rim the sidewall.
load. A metal support for a tire or a tire . Test rim
. Production options weight and tube assembly upon which the The rim on which a tire is fitted for
The combined weight of those tire beads are seated. testing, and it may be any rim listed
installed regular production options . Rim diameter as appropriate for use with that tire.
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in Nominal diameter of the bead seat. . Tread 13
excess of those standard items . Rim size designation That portion of a tire that comes
which they replace, not previously Rim diameter and width. into contact with the road.
considered in curb weight or acces-
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (460,1)
. Tread rib accessory weight, and normal oc-

A tread section running circumfer- cupant weight (distributed in accor-
entially around a tire. dance with Table 1 that is ap-
. Tread separation pended to the end of this section)
Pulling away of the tread from the and dividing by 2.
tire carcass. . Wheel-holding fixture
. Treadwear indicators (TWI) The fixture used to hold the wheel
The projections within the principal and tire assembly securely during
grooves designed to give a visual testing.
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,

Black plate (461,1)
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating Vehicle normal load, Occupant distribution in a
capacity, number of number of occupants normally loaded vehicle
occupants
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
2 in front, 1 in second
11 through 15 5 seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
2 in front, 2 in second
16 through 22 7 seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
13
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (462,1)
& Tire care – maintenance and rotation. After tire rotation, adjust carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
safety practices the tire pressures and make sure a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
. Check on a daily basis that the the wheel nuts are correctly tigh- can be calculated by the following
tires are free from serious damage, tened. For information about the method.
nails, and stones. At the same time, tightening torque and tightening
check the tires for abnormal wear. Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
sequence for the wheel nuts, refer weight of occupants + total weight
. Inspect the tire tread regularly to “Flat tires” F9-5.
and replace the tires before their of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
tread wear indicators become visi- & Vehicle load limit – how to
ble. When a tire’s tread wear determine For information about vehicle load-
indicator becomes visible, the tire The load capacity of your vehicle is ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
is worn beyond the acceptable limit determined by weight, not by avail- F8-12.
and must be replaced immediately. able cargo space. The load limit of
With a tire in this condition, driving For information about towing capa-
your vehicle is shown on the city and weight limits, refer to
at even low speeds in wet weather vehicle placard attached to the
can cause the vehicle to hydro- “Trailer towing (XV CROSSTREK
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the models)” F8-18.
plane. Possible resulting loss of statement “The combined weight
vehicle control can lead to an of occupants and cargo should
accident. never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
. To maximize the life of each tire on your vehicle’s placard.
and ensure that the tires wear The vehicle placard also shows
uniformly, it is best to rotate the seating capacity of your vehicle.
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). The total load capacity includes the
For information about the tire rota- total weight of driver and all pas-
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation” sengers and their belongings, any
F11-26. Replace any damaged or cargo, any optional equipment such
unevenly worn tires at the time of as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike

Black plate (463,1)
! Calculating total and load ca- occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) Example 1B
pacities varying seating con- plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
figurations kg).
Calculate the available load capa- 1. Calculate the total weight.
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
2. Calculate the available load ca-

pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 900 lbs (408 kg). For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calcula-
tions are as follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
is indicated on the vehicle placard further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
with the statement “The combined be carried.
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 900 lbs or 13
408 kg”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (464,1)
2. Calculate the available load ca- with the statement “The combined 2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity. weight of occupants and cargo pacity.
should never exceed 408 kg or
900 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
3. The total weight now exceeds 3. The result of step 2 shows that a
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42 further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
(10 kg), to which is attached a
kg), so the cargo weight must be be carried.
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
10% of the trailer weight is applied
Example 2A to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
Vehicle capacity weight of the

vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard

Black plate (465,1)
Example 2B & Determining compatibility of

tire and vehicle load capaci-
ties
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
For example, if a person weighing fulfill those conditions.
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing 2. Calculate the available load ca- The maximum loaded vehicle
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same pacity. weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
vehicle (bringing the number of Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
occupants to three), and a child axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5 referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
child to use, the calculations are as axle’s GAWR are shown on the
follows. vehicle certification label affixed to
1. Calculate the total weight. 3. The total weight now exceeds the driver’s door.
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15 The GVWR and front and rear
kg), so the cargo weight must be GAWRs are determined by not only 13
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more. the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
cle’s suspension, axles and other
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (466,1)
parts of the body. . Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo
Therefore, this means that the and luggage load capacity calcu-
& Steps for Determining Cor- lated in Step 4.
vehicle cannot necessarily be rect Load Limit
loaded up to the tire’s maximum 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
load rating on the tire sidewall. 1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be
bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult
& Adverse safety conse- cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this
quences of overloading on kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s reduces the available cargo and
handling and stopping and placard. luggage load capacity of your ve-
on tires 2. Determine the combined weight hicle.
Overloading could affect vehicle of the driver and passengers that
handling, stopping distance, and will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle and tire performance in the 3. Subtract the combined weight of
following ways. This could lead to the driver and passengers from
an accident and possibly result in XXX kg or XXX lbs.
severe personal injury. 4. The resulting figure equals the
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate. available amount of cargo and
. Heavy and/or high-mounted luggage load capacity. For exam-
loads could increase the risk of ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
rollover. 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
. Stopping distance will increase. lb passengers in your vehicle, the
. Brakes could overheat and fail. amount of available cargo and
. Suspension, bearings, axles and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
other body parts could break or (1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.)
experience accelerated wear that 5. Determine the combined weight
will shorten vehicle life. of luggage and cargo being loaded
. Tires could fail. on the vehicle. That weight may not
. Tread separation could occur.

Black plate (467,1)
Uniform tire quality grading form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of
standards ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
This information indicates the rela- & Treadwear mance.
tive performance of passenger car The treadwear grade is a compara-
tires in the area of treadwear, tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING
traction, and temperature resis- the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to
tance. This is to aid the consumer trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight-
in making an informed choice in the government test course. ahead braking traction tests,
purchase of tires. For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accel-
Quality grades can be found where would wear one and one-half (1- eration, cornering, hydroplan-
applicable on the tire sidewall be- 1/2) times as well on the govern- ing, or peak traction charac-
tween tread shoulder and maxi- ment course as a tire graded 100. teristics.
mum section width. For example: The relative performance of tires
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem- depends upon the actual conditions
perature A of their use, however, and may & Temperature A, B, C
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the
The quality grades apply to new due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the
pneumatic tires for use on passen- service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of
ger cars. However, they do not road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat
apply to deep tread, winter type when tested under controlled con-
snow tires, space-saver or tempor- & Traction AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
ary use spare tires, tires with The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. Sustained high
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those temperature can cause the material 13
grades represent the tire’s ability to of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tion tires. stop on wet pavement as measured tire life, and excessive temperature
All passenger car tires must con- under controlled conditions on spe- can lead to sudden tire failure. The
– CONTINUED –

Black plate (468,1)
grade C corresponds to a level of Reporting safety defects Building, Washington, DC 20590.

performance which all passenger (U.S.A.) You can also obtain other informa-
car tires must meet under the tion about motor vehicle safety
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- If you believe that your vehicle has from http://www.safercar.gov.
dards No. 109. Grades B and A a defect which could cause a
represent higher levels of perfor- crash or could cause injury or
mance on the laboratory test wheel death, you should immediately in-
than the minimum required by law. form the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
WARNING addition to notifying Subaru of
The temperature grade for this America, Inc.
tire is established for a tire If NHTSA receives similar com-
that is properly inflated and plaints, it may open an investiga-
not overloaded. Excessive tion, and if it finds that a safety
speed, underinflation, or ex- defect exists in a group of vehi-
cessive loading, either sepa- cles, it may order a recall and
rately or in combination, can remedy campaign. However,
cause heat buildup and possi- NHTSA cannot become involved
ble tire failure. in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New Jersey Avenue, SE, West

Black plate (469,1)
Supplement
& Declaration of conformity with FCC rules
! Electrostatic sensor for occupant detection system
13

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (27,1)
Index
14

Black plate (2,1)
14-2 Index
A Set ........................................................................ 5-4

Abbreviation ................................................................... 3 USB storage device operations ................................ 5-24
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-26 Auto on/off headlights ................................................. 3-63
Warning light ......................................................... 3-16 Auto-dimming mirror/compass .............................. 3-71, 3-73
Accessories....................................................... 5-4, 11-37 Automatic climate control.............................................. 4-7
Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-7 Automatic headlight beam leveler ................................. 3-67
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-12 Warning light.......................................................... 3-22
Air conditioner Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-13
Automatic climate control .......................................... 4-7 Auxiliary input jack...................................................... 5-21
Manual climate control .............................................. 4-8
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-12 B
Air flow mode .............................................................. 4-8 Battery .................................................................... 11-34
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-12 Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-5
All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-19 Jump starting .......................................................... 9-9
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-28 Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........... 7-14
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3 Replacement (remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-10
Antenna system........................................................... 5-3 Bluetooth® audio ........................................................ 5-31
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-26 Booster seat .............................................................. 1-31
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-13 Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-6
Armrest....................................................................... 1-7 Brake
Ashtray ....................................................................... 6-9 Assist.................................................................... 7-25
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-15 Booster ....................................................... 7-25, 11-17
Audio Fluid ........................................................... 11-15, 12-7
Antenna system....................................................... 5-3 Pad and lining...................................................... 11-20
Auxiliary input jack ................................................. 5-21 Parking ....................................................... 7-32, 11-21
Bluetooth® audio.................................................... 5-31 Pedal .................................................................. 11-18
CD player operation ............................................... 5-16 System.................................................................. 7-25
Control button........................................................ 5-30 Brake system............................................................. 7-25
FM/AM radio operation ........................................... 5-11 Warning light.......................................................... 3-17
iPod® operations.................................................... 5-24 Braking ..................................................................... 7-24
Power and audio controls.......................................... 5-7 Tips ...................................................................... 7-24

Black plate (3,1)
Index 14-3
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-20 Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-31
Bulb Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-27
Chart .................................................................. 12-13 Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-32
Replacing............................................................. 11-37 Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-35
Child safety ................................................................... 5
C Locks.................................................................... 2-17
Cargo area Chime
Cover ................................................................... 6-10 Key........................................................................ 3-4
Light............................................................. 6-2, 11-43 Light ..................................................................... 3-63
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-12 Seatbelt.......................................................... 1-13, 3-9
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Cigarette lighter........................................................... 6-8
Center Cleaning
Console .................................................................. 6-5 Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Changing Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Coolant................................................................ 11-12 Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-11
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-5 Climate control system ................................................. 4-3
Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-8 Automatic ............................................................... 4-7
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-14 Manual................................................................... 4-8
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Clock ................................................................ 3-27, 3-28
light....................................................................... 3-12 Clutch
Checking Fluid ........................................................... 11-16, 12-7
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-18 Pedal .................................................................. 11-19
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-18 Compass........................................................... 3-71, 3-73
Clutch function...................................................... 11-19 Console ..................................................................... 6-5
Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-19 Continuously variable transmission ............................... 7-18
Coolant level ........................................................ 11-11 Fluid ........................................................... 11-14, 12-7
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-15 Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-15
Fluid level (clutch fluid) .......................................... 11-16 Coolant ........................................................... 11-11, 12-7
Fluid level (washer fluid) ........................................ 11-28 Temperature high warning light................................. 3-13
Oil level (engine oil) ............................................... 11-7 Temperature low indicator light ................................. 3-13
Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-25 Cooling system ........................................................ 11-10

Black plate (4,1)
14-4 Index
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4 Snowy and icy roads ............................................... 8-9
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-37 Tips ................................................. 7-17, 7-23, 8-2, 8-4
Indicator light................................................. 3-22, 7-40 Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 8
Set indicator light ................................... 3-22, 7-37, 7-40 Winter .................................................................... 8-8
Cup holder .................................................................. 6-6
E
D ECO gauge ................................................................ 3-8
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-65 Electrical system ........................................................ 12-7
Defogger................................................................... 3-80 Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system... 3-17, 7-27
Defrosting ................................................................. 4-10 Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................. 1-13
Deicer ...................................................................... 3-80 Engine
Differential gear oil Compartment overview............................................ 11-6
Front ........................................................... 11-15, 12-6 Coolant ....................................................... 11-11, 12-7
Rear............................................................ 11-15, 12-6 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............................. 6, 8-2
Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2 Hood .................................................................... 11-5
Disarming the alarm system ........................................ 2-14 Low oil level warning light........................................ 3-14
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-25 Oil ................................................................ 11-7, 12-4
Dome light ........................................................ 6-2, 11-43 Overheating ........................................................... 9-11
Door Starting .................................................................. 7-8
Locks ..................................................................... 2-3 Stopping................................................................ 7-10
Open warning light ................................................. 3-18 Event data recorder ........................................................ 9
Drive belts................................................................ 11-14 Exterior care .............................................................. 10-2
Driving
All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-19 F
AWD vehicles .......................................................... 8-4 Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-5
Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 8 Floor mat.................................................................... 6-9
Drinking ..................................................................... 7 Fluid level
Drugs ........................................................................ 7 Brake.................................................................. 11-15
Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4 Clutch ................................................................. 11-16
Off road .................................................................. 8-6 Continuously variable transmission ......................... 11-14
Pets .......................................................................... 8

Black plate (5,1)
Index 14-5
Fog light H
Bulb .......................................................... 11-39, 12-13 Hands-free system...................................................... 5-34
Indicator light......................................................... 3-22 Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-5, 9-2
Switch .................................................................. 3-67 Head restraint adjustment
Folding mirror switch .................................................. 3-79 Front seat............................................................... 1-4
Front Rear seat ............................................................... 1-8
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-15, 12-6 Headlight
Fog light ............................................ 3-67, 11-39, 12-13 Beam leveler.......................................................... 3-67
Fog light indicator light............................................ 3-22 Bulb replacing ...................................................... 11-37
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-21 Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-13
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-39 Control switch ........................................................ 3-63
Front seats.................................................................. 1-2 Flasher.................................................................. 3-65
Forward and backward adjustment ............................. 1-3 Indicator light ......................................................... 3-22
Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-4 HID headlights ...................................................... 1, 11-37
Reclining................................................................. 1-3 High beam indicator light ............................................. 3-22
Seat cushion height adjustment ................................. 1-4 High-mounted stop light............................................. 11-44
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3 High/low beam change (dimmer) .................................. 3-64
Consumption indicator .................................... 3-23, 3-31 Hill start assist ................................................. 7-34, 11-19
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2 OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-18
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-4 Warning light.......................................................... 3-18
Gauge .................................................................... 3-8 HomeLink® ................................................................. 3-73
Requirements .................................................. 7-3, 12-3 Hook
Fuses ...................................................................... 11-35 Cargo tie-down....................................................... 6-12
Main fuse............................................................. 11-36 Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-10
Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-9 Towing and tie-down ............................................... 9-12
Horn ......................................................................... 3-82
G Hose and connections............................................... 11-10
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-13
Glove box ................................................................... 6-5 I
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-13 Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-3
Light ...................................................................... 3-4

Black plate (6,1)
14-6 Index
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-66 Replacement........................................................... 2-3

Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-2 Keyless entry system ................................................... 2-7
Indicator light (security indicator light) ................. 2-3, 3-21
Indicator light L
Coolant temperature low ......................................... 3-13 Lap belt pretensioner .................................................. 1-22
Cruise control ................................................ 3-22, 7-40 Leather seat materials................................................. 10-5
Cruise control set........................................... 3-22, 7-40 License plate light..................................................... 11-41
Front fog light ........................................................ 3-22 Light
Headlight .............................................................. 3-22 Backup ............................................................... 11-39
High beam ............................................................ 3-22 Cargo area .................................................... 6-2, 11-43
Hill start assist OFF................................................ 3-18 Control switch ........................................................ 3-63
Immobilizer............................................................ 3-21 Daytime running ..................................................... 3-65
Security .......................................................... 2-3, 3-21 Dome............................................................ 6-2, 11-43
Select lever/Gear position ....................................... 3-21 Front fog ..................................................... 3-67, 11-39
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-22 Front side marker ......................................... 3-63, 12-13
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ................................ 3-21 High-mounted stop ............................................... 11-44
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ......................... 3-19 Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-4
Information display ..................................................... 3-23 License plate ....................................................... 11-41
Inside mirror ...................................................... 3-71, 3-73 Map .............................................................. 6-3, 11-42
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2 Parking ............................................................... 11-39
Internal trunk lid release handle ................................... 2-21 Rear combination ................................................. 11-39
iPod® operations........................................................ 5-24 Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-39
Stop.................................................................... 11-39
J Tail ..................................................................... 11-39
Jack-up point............................................................... 9-5 Trunk .................................................................. 11-43
Jump starting............................................................... 9-9 Turn signal .................................................. 3-66, 11-39
Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-12
K Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-18
Key ............................................................................ 2-2 Low tire pressure warning light..................................... 3-15
Number .................................................................. 2-2 Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-32
Reminder chime....................................................... 3-4

Black plate (7,1)
Index 14-7
M Manual transmission ............................................. 11-14
Main fuse................................................................. 11-36 Rear differential gear ............................................ 11-15
Maintenance Warning light.......................................................... 3-14
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3 Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-14
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3 Outside
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-20 Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-80
Tools ...................................................................... 9-3 Mirrors .................................................................. 3-78
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light) ... 3-12 Temperature indicator.............................................. 3-23
Manual Overheating engine .................................................... 9-11
Climate control ........................................................ 4-7
Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................ 7-20 P
Transmission ......................................................... 7-16 Parking
Transmission oil............................................ 11-14, 12-6 Brake.................................................................... 7-32
Map light........................................................... 6-3, 11-42 Brake stroke ........................................................ 11-21
Maximum load limits................................................... 8-18 Light ................................................................... 11-39
Meters and gauges ...................................................... 3-5 Tips ...................................................................... 7-33
Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-80 Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-71 Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-3
Moonroof .................................................................. 2-24 Power
Multi function display .................................................. 3-28 Door locking switch.................................................. 2-6
Outlets ................................................................... 6-7
N Outside mirrors .............................................. 3-79, 3-80
New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2 Steering ................................................................ 7-23
Steering warning light.............................................. 3-19
O Windows ............................................................... 2-17
Odometer.................................................................... 3-6 Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-24, 1-66
Off road driving............................................................ 8-6 Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8
Oil filter..................................................................... 11-8
Oil level R
Engine.................................................................. 11-7 Rear
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-15 Combination lights ................................................ 11-39

Black plate (8,1)
14-8 Index
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-15, 12-6 Replacing bulbs ............................................. 11-37, 12-13
Gate............................................................. 2-23, 9-16 Backup light......................................................... 11-39
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-39 Cargo area light ................................................... 11-43
Rear seat.................................................................... 1-7 Dome light ........................................................... 11-43
Folding down........................................................... 1-9 Front fog light....................................................... 11-39
Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-13 Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-39
Rear window Headlight............................................................. 11-37
Defogger............................................................... 3-80 High-mounted stop light......................................... 11-44
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-70 License plate light................................................. 11-41
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-32 Map light ............................................................. 11-42
Recommended Parking light......................................................... 11-39
Automatic transmission fluid .................................... 12-7 Rear combination light .......................................... 11-39
Brake fluid.................................................... 11-16, 12-7 Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-39
Clutch fluid ................................................... 11-17, 12-7 Rear turn signal light............................................. 11-39
Continuously variable transmission fluid .................... 12-7 Stop light............................................................. 11-39
Engine oil...................................................... 11-9, 12-4 Tail light............................................................... 11-39
Front differential gear oil ................................ 11-15, 12-6 Trunk light ........................................................... 11-43
Manual transmission oil ................................. 11-14, 12-6 Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11
Rear differential gear oil................................. 11-15, 12-6 Roof molding and crossbar .......................................... 8-14
Spark plugs.................................................. 11-13, 12-7 Roof rails................................................................... 8-14
Refueling .................................................................... 7-4
Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-10 S
Remote keyless entry system ........................................ 2-7 Safety
Replacement Precautions when driving............................................. 5
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-20 Symbol...................................................................... 2
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-30 Warnings ................................................................... 2
Replacing Screensaver .............................................................. 5-49
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-12 Seat
Battery (remote engine start transmitter) ................... 7-14 Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Battery (remote keyless entry system) ...................... 2-10 Front...................................................................... 1-2
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-11 Heater.................................................................... 1-6

Black plate (9,1)
Index 14-9
Rear....................................................................... 1-7 Servicing ............................................................... 1-65
Seatbelt ................................................................. 5, 1-12 Warning light.......................................................... 3-11
Fastening.............................................................. 1-13 Starting the engine ...................................................... 7-8
Maintenance.......................................................... 1-20 State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7
Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-21 Steering wheel
Safety tips............................................................. 1-12 Power ................................................................... 7-23
Warning light and chime ................................... 1-13, 3-9 Tilt/telescopic ......................................................... 3-81
Security Stop light................................................................. 11-39
Alarm system ........................................................ 2-12 Stopping the engine.................................................... 7-10
Immobilizer.............................................................. 2-2 Storage compartment................................................... 6-4
Indicator light................................................... 2-3, 3-21 Sun shade................................................................. 2-26
Shock sensors....................................................... 2-16 Sun visors .................................................................. 6-4
Select lever Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-38
Position indicator ................................................... 3-21 Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-5
Shift lock function................................................... 7-22
Shock sensors........................................................... 2-16 T
Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-10 Tachometer................................................................. 3-7
Shoulder pretensioners ............................................... 1-21 Temperature warning light
Snow tires........................................................ 8-10, 11-21 AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-15
Snowy and icy roads .................................................... 8-9 Coolant ................................................................. 3-13
Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-10 Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2
Spark plugs...................................................... 11-13, 12-7 Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-32, 1-35
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2 Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-12
Speedometer............................................................... 3-6 Tire................................................................. 11-21, 12-8
SRS Chains .................................................................. 8-11
Curtain airbag........................................................ 1-53 Inspection............................................................ 11-23
Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-42 Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-23
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-53 Replacement........................................................ 11-27
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 5, 1-38 Rotation .............................................................. 11-26
SRS airbag system Size and pressure .................................................. 12-8
Monitors................................................................ 1-64 Types.................................................................. 11-21

Black plate (10,1)
14-10 Index
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)....... 7-31, 9-8, 11-21 Vehicle

Warning light ......................................................... 3-15 Capacity weight...................................................... 8-12
Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-21 Identification ........................................................ 12-16
Tools .......................................................................... 9-3 Symbols .................................................................... 3
Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-32, 1-35 Vehicle Dynamics Control
Towing...................................................................... 9-12 OFF indicator light .................................................. 3-21
All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-15 OFF switch ............................................................ 7-30
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-14 Operation indicator light........................................... 3-19
Hooks................................................................... 9-12 System.................................................................. 7-28
Weight.................................................................. 8-18 Warning light.......................................................... 3-19
Trailer Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
Connecting............................................................ 8-17
Hitch ............................................................ 8-16, 8-22 W
Towing.................................................................. 8-18 Warning and indicator lights .......................................... 3-9
Towing tips............................................................ 8-24 Warning chimes
Trip meter ................................................................... 3-7 Seatbelt.......................................................... 1-13, 3-9
Trunk lid ................................................................... 2-20 Warning light
Release handle ..................................................... 2-21 ABS.............................................................. 3-16, 7-26
Trunk light................................................................ 11-43 All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-19
Turn signal AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-15
Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-22 Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. 3-22
Lever.................................................................... 3-66 Brake system......................................................... 3-17
Charge.................................................................. 3-14
U CHECK ENGINE .................................................... 3-12
Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-13 Coolant temperature high ........................................ 3-13
USB storage device operations.................................... 5-24 Door open ............................................................. 3-18
Engine low oil level................................................. 3-14
V Hill start assist ............................................... 3-18, 7-37
Valet mode................................................................ 2-14 Low fuel ................................................................ 3-18
Vanity mirror ................................................................ 6-4 Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-15
Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-14

Black plate (11,1)
Index 14-11
Power steering ...................................................... 3-19
Seatbelt .......................................................... 1-13, 3-9
SRS airbag system ................................................ 3-11
Vehicle Dynamics Control ....................................... 3-19
Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-14
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-18
Washing ................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators......................................................... 11-25
Wheel
Aluminum............................................................. 11-28
Balance ............................................................... 11-25
Nut tightening torque ........................................ 9-5, 12-8
Replacement ........................................................ 11-27
Windows................................................................... 2-17
Windshield
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-28
Wiper and washer switches..................................... 3-69
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-30
Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-80
Winter
Driving.................................................................... 8-8
Tires............................................................ 8-10, 11-21
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-68
Wiper deicer.............................................................. 3-80

Black plate (2,1)
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Left Page
Black plate (2,1)
GAS STATION REFERENCE

& Fuel: & Engine oil:
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI Use only the following oils.
(90 RON) or higher. . API classification SM or SN with the words “ENERGY
CONSERVING” or “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
& Fuel octane rating: . or ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can be identified with the
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel octane rating” F7-3. F12-4.
& Fuel capacity: & Engine oil capacity:
Except XV CROSSTREK models: 14.5 US gal (55 liters, 12.1 5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
Imp gal)
XV CROSSTREK models: 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal) The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
checked using the oil level gauge. For more details about
maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-7.
& Cold tire pressure:

Refer to “Tires” F12-8.

Subaru Crosstrek Subaru Impreza Subaru XV 2013 en US US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Subaru Crosstrek Subaru Impreza Subaru XV 2013 en US US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Black plate (1,1)

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 5/ 11

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 5/ 11

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22

All warranty information, including details This manual is composed of fourteen

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

Chapter 4: Climate control Chapter 12: Specifications CAUTION

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

& Abbreviation list Abbreviation Meaning Vehicle symbols 0

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

Mark Name Mark Name Mark Name

Hazard warning flasher Rear window washer Windshield defroster

Rear window defogger/Out-

Seat heater Headlights Engine oil

Child restraint top tether an-

Child restraint lower an-

Horn Fan speed Door unlock (transmitter)

Trunk lid open (4-door) or rear

Wiper intermittent Instrument panel outlets and

Windshield washer Foot outlets

Rear window wiper Windshield defroster and foot

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

depressing the accelerator and/or brake

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

北米Model "A1140BE-A" Edited: 2012/ 1/ 30

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

& Interior 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

& Instrument panel 1) Illumination brightness control

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

& Combination meter 1) Tachometer (page 3-7)

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

! Except U.S.-spec. models 1) Tachometer (page 3-7)

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

System servicing ............................................... 1-24

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 27

1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats If the front seatbacks are not

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Seat heater (if equipped) depending on the temperature.

北米Model "A1140BE-A" EDITED: 2012/ 6/ 20

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7

Rear seats & Armrest (if equipped) 1